Home

Acura 2011 RDX User's Manual

1. e Specifications Dimensions Capacities Length 182 5 in 4 635 mm Fuel tank Approx Width 73 6 in 1 870 mm 18 0 US gal 68 L Height 65 2 in 1 655 mm Engine oil Change Wheelbase 104 3 in 2 650 mm Including 5 0 US qt 4 7 L Track Front 61 9 in 1 572 mm filter Rear 62 6 in 1 590 mm Without filter 4 8 US qt 4 5 L F Total 6 1 US qt 5 8 L Weights Engi lant a i a 1 85 iA 1 7 7 L Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached to TINSEN ange gan the driver s doorjamb Total 2 22 US gal 8 4 L Engine Automatic Change transmission fluid Type Water cooled 4 stroke DOHC i VTEC 2WD 3 0 US qt 2 8 L 4 cylinder gasoline engine with turbo 4WD _3 1 US qt 2 9 L charger intercooler Total Bore x Stroke 3 39 x 3 90 in 86 0 x 99 0 mm 2WD 8 8 US qt 8 3 L Displacement 140 3 cu in 2 300 cm AWD 8 2 US qt 7 8 L Compression ratio 8 8 Rear differential Change 2 67 US qt 2 53 L Spark plugs SILKR8A S NGK fluid 4WD Total 2 93 US qt 2 77 L Seating Capacities TENT ra emip change 0 45 US qt 0 43 L Total F uid 4WD Total 0 48 US qt 0 45 L Front 2 Windshield U S Vehicles 2 6 US qt 2 5 L washer reservoir Canada 4 8 US qt 4 5 L Rear 3 k Vehicles 1 Excluding the oil remaining in the engine 2 Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine Reserve tank capacity
2. 3 3 CCCC V AUDIO MENU U S model is shown 260 2011 RDX Playing an iPod Models with navigation system U S model is shown AUDIO BUTTON DISC AUX BUTTON SCAN pisciaux ux gan adu 2Y aa 3 an f Awra DISP Move OEE i CK 5 4 SEEK SKIP BAR 5 REA N JA JO 2011 RDX INTERFACE DIAL PWR VOL KNOB CONTINUED 261 soinjeoy Playing an iPod Models with navigation system To Play an iPod This audio system can operate the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the in dash disc changer To play an iPod connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector then press the DISC AUX button The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY M or ON ID position The iPod will also be recharged with the ignition switch in these positions The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc Voice Control System You can select the AUX mode by using the navigation system voice control buttons but cannot operate the play mode functions 262 iPods compatible with your audio system using the USB adapter cable are Model Software iPod classic _ Ver 1 0 or more iPod
3. 4 SEEK SKIP BAR 2011 RDX EEA TUNE FOLDER BAR CONTINUED 271 soinjeoy Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models with navigation system To Play a USB Flash Memory Device This audio system can operate the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the in dash disc changer To play a USB flash memory device connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment then press the DISC AUX button The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY M or ON ID position 272 The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3 WMA or AAC formats Depending on the format the audio control display shows MP3 WMA or AAC when a USB flash memory device is playing The USB flash memory device limit is up to 700 folders or up to 65535 files x Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit 2011 RDX The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 MB or higher and formatted with the FAT file system Some digital audio players may be compatible as well Some USB flash memory devices such as devices with security lock out features etc will not work in this audio unit Even if recorded in MP3 WMA or AAC format unsupported files cannot be played If the system finds it the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE and then skips to the next file Playin
4. PWR VOL KNOB DISC AUX BUTTON Rey eae YP p02 1 DISP MODE BUTTON 4 l s e N JA scan DISCIAUX IL T SEEK SKIP BAR CONTINUED 281 2011 RDX soinjeoy Bluetooth Audio System Models with navigation system Your vehicle is equipped with a NOTE In some states it may be To Play Bluetooth Audio Files Bluetooth Audio system which illegal to perform some data device allows you to listen to streaming functions while driving audio from your Bluetooth Audio compatible phone This function is only available on Bluetooth Audio Compatible phones that are paired and linked to the vehicle s OCONEE 1 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink HFL system see page 313 Y muno menu Not all Bluetooth enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system You can find an approved phone by visiting Make sure that your phone is paired www acura com handstreelink or by and linked to the HFL calling the HandsFreeLink se sou consumer support at 1 888 528 7876 Press the DISC AUX button with the ignition switch in the en Cy cama ACCESSORY 1 or ON 1 position When the phone is recognized you will see the Bluetooth Audio message and indicator on the upper display and the audio control display if selected and the system begins to play Bluetooth AUDIO vo 9 282 2011
5. 121 Steering Wheel Adjustments 122 Keys and LockS cscccssseeeeseeeees 122 Immobilizer System 0000 124 Ignition Switch ccccceesseeeeees 125 Door LOCKS ccccccsessseeceenseeeeees 126 Power Door Locks 006 126 Childproof Door Locks 127 Tailgates scsscissscicisesdeesadivocassseoetees 128 Remote Transmitter 000 130 Sats csacsc esheets eileen 134 Front Seat Power Adjustments cccsceceseeeees 134 Head Restraints cceseees 135 ATMrests rS 138 Folding the Rear Seats DOWD visesciegusnedisrdenceiets 138 Seat Heaters cccsssccccessereesees 141 Power Windows ssccceesseeeees 142 MOOnif0Gf i35 065 3 see hediasessesdorsesses 144 2011 RDX MITOS osem 146 Adjusting the Power MirrOt S esccssssnsecevsccsssebeesaceees 146 Reverse Tilt Door Mirror 147 Heated Mirrors cccceseeees 147 Driving Position Memory SYSOIN E eves 148 Parking Brake cccscccesssseeeees 150 Interior Lights cccccceseeeeeees 151 Ceiling Lights ccecseecees 151 Individual Map Lights 152 Courtesy Lights ceeeeeees 153 Cargo Area Light cccee 153 Interior Convenience Itema 154 Glove BOX s sscccssseceessneesess 155 Front Door Pockets 06 155 Beverage Holders 006 156 Accessory Power Sockets 157 Sun VISOL cecessseeesseeces
6. Feature Guide read NOTE Only diagnostic info messages overlay the screen while driving They indicate that your vehicle has a problem that may need immediate attention see page 345 Your dealer has to register the vehicle identification before you can receive messages This can take several days to process Quick Tips cA Scheduled Dealer Appointment 1 Diagnostic Info Maintenance Minder Select Messages then select a message category Select the message you want to read and press ENTER 334 2011 RDX AcuraLink U S models only Deleting Messages NOTE Diagnostic info and recall campaign messages can only be deleted by your dealer To delete a single message e Press the INFO button to bring up the Information screen Scroll to the Messages option then select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector Use the interface knob to scroll up or down to the message title you want to delete and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector Scroll to Delete with the interface knob and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector To delete all messages Message Options NOTE The Delete All Messages command does not apply to Recall or Diagnostic Info messages These messages must be deleted by your Emissions System P0117 Jun 30 07 There may be a problem with the d
7. 0000 36 Recalling a Memorized Driving Rotation Tire ssiisiirsserssiessisesis 447 General Guidelines 36 POSION si i sessertcseressssosneatcesssss 133 Protecting Infants c006 41 Reclining the Seat Backs 134 Protecting Larger Children 53 Refueling sccccsssssesesseeeees 353 Protecting Small Children 42 Reminder Indicators 006 64 Using Child Seats with Remote Audio Controls 289 a ira cts Rebortin gt US 9 20 Tethers isssccsssccecsssectecssdesiesss 51 Remote Transmitter 0 130 only as S 5 496 Using LATCH secnccmvcennses 46 Replacement Information s ao Featares oa TE 8 Dust and Pollen Filter 439 a a ten EE ee ae AIP Dags sorria 10 24 R Engine Oil and Filter 422 Dor Locks 12 o abs Oa ey py Head Restraints ccceseeees 15 Radiator Overheating 463 S S d je Os a 418 Seat Belts cccccceseseeee 9 15 20 Radio CD Sound System 172 5 k Ph ee ad ea 480 Seats amp Seat Backs n 000 13 14 Radio Theft Protection 292 i ANE IUES veteacbticna nea tiaceatass 447 Safety Labels Location of 58 Readiness Codes cccccssceeeees 490 Wine Blades 440 Safety Messages ssssseesseeessesesse iii Rear Lights Bulb R ein a i Balke Ai ie Seat Belt c2 8ectocrcstbeiccc seers 9 20 Replacement cccsccce
8. 0006 171 Audio System sosscsesscsesscvessonensone 172 Playing the FM AM Radio Models without navigation system 174 To Play the Radio ssccsescceeeee 174 Adjusting the Sound eeee 177 Playing the XM Radio Models without navigation system 179 Playing Discs Models without Navigation system csscccsseceeeees 185 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models without navigation SYSTE wwesesecesscccivescdevaasy lt doeesses 204 USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages Models without Navigation system cceeecees 21i Bluetooth Audio System Models without navigation system 212 Audio System Models with navigation system Interface Dial Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system 217 Adjusting the Sound eeee Playing the XM Radio Models with Navigation system ssccceeeeeeeees 228 Playing Discs Models with navigation SYSTEM vo sccesiecessscoovtveseertevewesvexsss 239 Disc Changer Error Messages Models with navigation SYSTEM cwsescvessesces eves essu suss 255 2011 RDX system USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages Models with navigation system Bluetooth Audio System Models with navigation System s sssssssessesssecsss FM AM Radio Reception Remote Audio Controls Auxiliary Input Jack Radio Theft Protection Setti
9. 2011 RDX We recommend using quality gasolines containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits In addition in order to maintain good performance fuel economy and emissions control we strongly recommend in areas where it is available the use of gasoline that does NOT contain manganese based fuel additives such as MMT Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on If this happens contact your authorized dealer for service Fuel Recommendation Service Station Procedures Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10 ethanol by volume and up to 15 MTBE by volume Do not use gasoline containing methanol If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline For further important fuel related information for your vehicle or information on gasoline that does not contain MMT visit My Acura at owners acura com In Canada visit www acura ca for additional information on gasoline Refueling FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE 1 Park with the driver s side closest to the service station pump 2 Open the fuel fill door by pulling on the handle at the outside of the driver s seat 2011 RDX Gas
10. All Children Should Sit in a Back Seat According to crash statistics children of all ages and sizes are safer when they are restrained in a back seat The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children aged 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat Some states have laws restricting where children may ride Children who ride in back are less likely to be injured by striking interior vehicle parts during a collision or hard braking Also children cannot be injured by an inflating front airbag when they ride in the back The Passenger s Front Airbag Can Pose Serious Risks Front airbags have been designed to help protect adults in a moderate to severe frontal collision To do this the passenger s front airbag is quite large and it can inflate with enough force to cause very serious injuries Even though your vehicle has an advanced front airbag system that automatically turns the passenger s front airbag off under certain circumstances see page 33 please follow these guidelines Infants Never put a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger s front airbag If the airbag inflates it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or very seriously injure an infant 2011 RDX Small Children Placing a forward facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger s front airbag ca
11. Fuses FUSE PULLER 4 Check the smaller fuses in the under hood fuse box and all the fuses in the interior fuse box by pulling out each one with the fuse puller provided on the back of the primary under hood fuse box cover on BLOWN Look for a blown wire inside the fuse If it is blown replace it with one of the spare fuses of the same rating or lower The spare fuses are provided on the back of the under hood fuse cover 2011 RDX If you cannot drive the vehicle without fixing the problem and you do not have a spare fuse take a fuse of the same rating or a lower rating from one of the other circuits Make sure you can do without that circuit temporarily such as the accessory power socket or radio If you replace the blown fuse with a spare fuse that has a lower rating it might blow out again This does not indicate that anything is wrong Replace the fuse with one of the correct rating as soon as you can CONTINUED 471 pepedxouy op jo 3 Surely Fuses NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system If you do not have a replacement fuse with the proper rating for the circuit install one with a lower rating 472 6 If the replacement fuse of the same rating blows in a short time there is probably a serious electrical problem in your vehicle Leave the blown fuse in that circuit and have
12. 2011 RDX Headlights Turning the switch to the 500 position turns on the parking lights taillights instrument panel lights side marker lights and rear license plate lights Turning the switch to the ZD position turns on the headlights When the light switch is in the 300 or ED position the lights on indicator comes on as a reminder This indicator stays on if you leave the light switch on and turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY D or the LOCK 0 position If you leave the lights on with the key removed from the ignition switch you will hear a reminder beeper when you open the driver s door Turn Signals and Headlights High Beams Push the lever forward and the high beam indicator will come on see page 69 Pull it back to return to low beams To flash the high beams pull the lever back lightly then release it The high beams will stay on as long as you hold the lever back AUTO The automatic lighting feature turns on the headlights and all other exterior lights when it senses low ambient light To turn on automatic lighting turn the light switch to AUTO The lights will come on automatically when the outside light level becomes low at dusk for example The lights on indicator comes on as a reminder The lights and indicator will turn off automatically when the system senses high ambient light 2011 RDX The lights will remain on when you turn off the ignition switch They wi
13. DISP Each time you press and release the DISP MODE button the upper display changes in the following sequence Channel name category artist name and music title 2011 RDX Hea AxMm2 CATEGORY 022 CCC adla 023DDD 021 BBB 2 5 024 EEE A 001 AAA 6 025 FFF MODE To switch between the category mode and channel mode press and hold the DISP MODE button until the mode changes A CH channel or CAT category mode indicator appears on the upper display Playing the XM Radio Models with navigation system To Select a Channel When in the satellite radio mode you can use any of four methods to find channels TUNE SEEK SKIP CATEGORY SCAN and the preset icons You can also switch between the category mode and channel mode on the audio control display Press the AUDIO button to view the display then push down the selector on the interface dial Rotate the interface dial to select the mode Press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection TUNE Press the TUNE FOLDER bar to change channel selections Press the B side of the bar to tune to higher numbered channels and the lt 4 side of the bar to tune to lower numbered channels In the category mode you can only select channels within that category A 022 CCC 3 4 _023ppD oo7eeeE 2 5 0248B8 OO6AAAA 106 025FFF T
14. Store in HandsFreeLink the phone number will be stored in HFL so you can call it using a voice tag To make a call using the navigation display on models with navigation system Select an option Search Imported Phonebook Dial Import Cellular Delete Imported Phonebook Phonebook PIN Number 1 From the INFO screen select Cellular Phone then select Dial 2011 RDX Enter phone number GHI DELETE lt li DEF 2 ABC 2 The navigation display will change as shown above Enter a phone number 3 To make a call press the selector on the interface dial to the right 4 To end the call press the HFL Back button CONTINUED 319 soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Receiving a Call When you receive a call an incoming call notification if activated will play and interrupt the audio system if it is on Press the HFL Talk button to answer the call or the HFL Back button to hang up Call Waiting If your phone has Call Waiting press and release the HFL Talk button to put the original call on hold and answer the incoming call To return to the original call press the HFL Talk button again If you don t want to answer the incoming call disregard it and continue with your original call If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call press the HFL Back button 320 Transferring a Call You c
15. or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www satercar gov Authorized Manuals Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals U S only Service Manual The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for Incorporated You can order by phone or online repair to engine and chassis components It is written e Call Helm Inc at 1 800 782 4356 credit card orders only for the Journeyman mechanic but it is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand Electrical Troubleshooting Manual Go online at www helminc com If you are interested in other years or models contact Helm Inc Complements the Service Manual by providing in depth at 1 800 782 4356 troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in Publication Form Description your vehicle Form Number Body Repair Manual 61STK04 2007 2011 Acura RDX Service Manual Describes the procedures involved in the replacement 61STKO4EL 2011 Acura RDX of damaged body parts Electrical Troubleshooting Manual 61STK30 2007 Model series Acura RDX Body Repair Manual 31STK640 2011 Acura RDX Owner s Manual 31STK840 2011 Acura RDX Navigation System Manual 31STKM40 2011 Acura RDX Maintenance Journal 31STKQ40 2011 Acura RDX Advanced Technology Guide ACU R Order F
16. when the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears in the upper display at the same time Insert it only halfway the drive will pull it in the rest of the way You will see BUSY on the upper display and the disc load indicator turns red again and blinks as the CD is loaded When the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears on the upper display again insert the next CD in the slot 2011 RDX iN Do not try to insert a disc until LOAD appears You could damage the audio unit Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all six positions are loaded If you are not loading all six positions press the LOAD button again after the last CD has loaded DISC READ appears on the upper display then the system begins playing the last loaded If you stop loading discs before all six positions are filled the system will wait for 10 seconds stop the load operation and begin playing the last disc loaded To load a single disc 1 Press and release the LOAD button on the changer unit You will see BUSY on the upper display and the disc load indicator turns red and starts blinking Playing Discs Models with navigation system 2 Insert a disc into the disc slot when the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears on the upper display at the same time Insert the disc only about halfway the drive will pull it in the rest of the way You will see the disc num
17. 2011 RDX Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Redial Redial the last number called See page 317 Transfer Transfer a call from HFL to your phone or from your phone to HFL See page 320 Mute Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call See page 320 Send Send numbers or names during a call See page 321 Press HPL E Store Store a phonebook entry See page 321 Edit Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry See page 322 Phonebook LS Delete Delete a phonebook entry See page 322 Receive If your phone supports this function use this to transfer contacts from Contact your phone to HFL See page 323 List Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries See page 322 G Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command CONTINUED 311 2011 RDX soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Security Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key y cycle to access the system See page 328 Change Passcode Change your security passcode See page 329 System _ amp zi nn Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call Set up Ks Call Notification See page 329 Auto Transfer Set calls to automatically transfer from
18. 6 Put a new washer on the drain bolt then reinstall the drain bolt Tighten the drain bolt to 29 Ibf ft 39 N m 4 0 kgf m 7 Refill the engine with the recommended oil Engine oil change capacity including filter 5 0 US qt 4 7 L 8 10 Reinstall the engine oil fill cap Start the engine The oil pressure indicator should go out within 5 seconds If it does not turn off the engine and check your work Let the engine run for several minutes then check the drain bolt and oil filter for leaks Turn off the engine and let it sit for several minutes then check the oil level on the dipstick If necessary add more oil 2011 RDX NOTICE Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmful to the environment If you change your own oil please dispose of the used oil properly Put it in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center Do not discard it in a trash bin or dump it on the ground 423 aoueUD UIP Engine Coolant Adding Engine Coolant RESERVE TANK MAX MIN If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN line add coolant to bring it up to the MAX line Inspect the cooling system for leaks 424 Always use Honda Long life Anti freeze Coolant Type 2 This coolant is pre mixed with 50 percent antifreeze and 50 percent water Never add straight antifreeze or plain water If Honda antifreeze coolant is not available you may use a
19. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK Yellow loop 419 aouUeUD UIP Adding Engine Oil ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap on top of the valve cover Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill any Clean up any spills immediately Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment 420 Reinstall the engine oil fill cap and tighten it securely Wait a few minutes and recheck the oil level on the engine oil dipstick Do not fill above the upper mark you could damage the engine 2011 RDX Required Engine Oil Oil is a major contributor to your engine s performance and longevity Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance turbocharged engine that requires the use of synthetic motor oil Always use Mobil 1 5W 30 or an equivalent oil that meets the Acura HTO 06 standard Not all synthetic oils will meet this standard Only use oils that display the HTO 06 standard on the label Failure to use Mobil 1 or an equivalent oil that meets the HTO 06 standard can lead to a reduction in engine performance or durability and can cause engine damage not covered by your warranty Adding Engine Oil Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require any oil additives Additives may adversely affect the engine or transmission E gt performance and durability 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 F 30 20 40 0 10 20 30 40C Ambient Tempe
20. BULB SOCKET 3 Determine which of the three bulbs is burned out brake taillight turn signal or rear side marker 4 Remove the socket by turning it one quarter turn counterclockwise 5 Pull the bulb straight out of its socket Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms Lights 6 Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working 7 Put the socket back into the light assembly and turn it clockwise to lock it in place 8 Install the rear light assembly in the rear pillar Tighten the two bolts Snap the bolt covers into position Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb Your vehicle uses halogen light bulbs When replacing a bulb handle it by its plastic case and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects If you touch the glass clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit Oil perspiration or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter 2011 RDX pi bo Use a Phillips head screwdriver to remove the screw and use a flat tip screwdriver to remove the holding clip located under the front bumper Push up the undercover CONTINUED 435 oueUD UIP Lights 5 Install the new bulb into the hole and turn it one quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place 6 Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb Make sure it is on all the way
21. Be sure to read the Off Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 405 if you plan to tow off paved surfaces AWARNING Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive 2011 RDX Load Limits Total Trailer Weight The maximum allowable weight of the trailer and everything in or on it must not exceed 1 500 Ibs 680 kg Towing a load that is too heavy can seriously affect your vehicle s handling and performance It can also damage the engine and drivetrain CONTINUED 397 Sunna Towing a Trailer To achieve a proper tongue load start by loading 60 of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40 toward the rear then re adjust the amp load as needed Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle all occupants all accessories all cargo and the tongue load is 4WD Tongue Load The weight that the 4 894 Ibs 2 220 kg tongue of a fully loaded trailer puts 2WD on the hitch should be approximately 10 of the total trailer weight Too SG ORIANTAD k much tongue load reduces front tire traction and steering control Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway 398 2011 RDX Gross Axle Weight Ratings GAWR The maximum allowable weight of the ve
22. How Your Side Airbags Work 30 Side Curtain Airbags ceeee 31 How Your Side Curtain Airbags WOOK eee testes oats fete 31 Side Marker Lights Bulb Replacement iN ceceseeee 432 Signaling Turns cccsssseeeseees 69 SNOW LILES E 448 Sound System eeeeeeeees 172 216 Spare Tire ccscccessesescessereesees 454 Inflating A 444 454 Specifications cccsscceesseees 481 Spark Plugs ccceeessseeceesseeeeees 480 Specifications Aseissa 480 Speed Control cscccesssreeeees 300 Speed Limiter cccccesseseesees 378 Speedometer csesccecsssseeesseees O SRS Additional Information 24 Additional Safety Precautions 35 2011 RDX Index Airbag Service cccceeesseeeeeeees 34 Airbag System Components 24 How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works 00006 32 How the SRS Indicator Works 32 How Your Front Airbags WOrk cessctek isihestscniansecttis 26 How Your Side Airbags Work 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags WOU EE E E 31 SRS Indicator scssisicssssssiseisisass 32 65 START Ignition Key POSITION ccceeeceeeceeseseeeeeeeeees 125 Starting the Engine 0 374 Auto Control Mode 45 375 In Cold Weather at High Alltitude ccccssssecseseerers 374 With a Dead Battery 461 State Emissions Testing 490 Steam Coming from Engine 463 Steering Whee
23. TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message appears on the multi information display after you start the engine Service Station Procedures Turn the engine off and confirm the fuel fill cap is installed If it is loosen it then retighten it until it clicks at least once When you can restart the engine the message appears again The message goes off after several days of normal driving once you tighten or replace the fuel fill cap To scroll to another message press the INFO A V button If the system still detects a leak in your vehicle s evaporative emissions system the malfunction indicator lamp MIL comes on If the fuel fill cap was not already tightened turn the engine off and check or retighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once The MIL should go off after several days of normal driving once the cap is tightened or replaced If the MIL does not go off have your vehicle inspected by a dealer For more information see page 466 Opening and Closing the Hood HOOD RELEASE HANDLE 1 Park the vehicle and set the parking brake Pull the hood release handle located under the lower left corner of the dashboard The hood will pop up slightly 2011 RDX LATCH bo Put your fingers under the front edge of the hood near the center Slide your hand to the left until you feel the hood latch handle Push this handle up to release it Lift up the hood If the hood latch handle moves stiffly
24. TUNE ICON You can also change channel selections on the audio control display Press the AUDIO button to view the display then push down the selector on the interface dial Rotate the interface dial to select TUNE Press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection Rotate the interface knob to the desired channel In the category mode you can only select channels within that category 2011 RDX xI Axm2 3 i 2 5 02 EEE 1 6 Y SEEK SKIP CATEGORY ICON SEEK SKIP CATEGORY Press either side of the SEEK SKIP CATEGORY bar lt 4 or gt to select another category You can also change the category on the audio control display Press the AUDIO button to view the display then push the selector on the interface dial to the right side or left side to select another category CONTINUED 231 soinjeoy Playing the XM Radio Models with navigation system SCAN The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode In the category mode only the channels within that category are scanned To activate scan press the SCAN button The x system plays each channel in ae numerical order for a few seconds oeaana 16 025 FFF then selects the next channel When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to press the button again SCAN INDICATOR 007 EEEE
25. The cruise control will be canceled when the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph 40 km h or less Tapping either of the paddle shifters shifts the gear up or down but the cruise control will be canceled if you downshift to first gear For more information on driving with paddle shifters see page 380 2011 RDX Resuming the Set Speed When you push the CANCEL button or tap the brake pedal the system remembers the previously set speed To return to that speed accelerate to above 25 mph 40 km h then press and release the RES ACCEL button The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on The vehicle accelerates to the same speed as before Pressing the CRUISE button turns the system completely off and erases the previous cruising speed HomeLink Universal Transceiver The HomeLink Universal Transceiver built into your vehicle can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home such as garage doors lighting or home security systems General Safety Information Before programming your HomeLink to operate a garage door opener confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system such as an electronic eye or other safety and reverse stop features If your garage door was manufactured before April 1 1982 you may not be able to program HomeLink to operate it These units do not have safety features that cause the motor to stop and reverse it if an obstacle is d
26. You can also select the folder scan feature with the SCAN button on the control panel Press and release the SCAN button repeatedly Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled 278 To Stop Playing a USB Flash Memory Device To play the radio press the AM FM or xm button Press the DISC AUX button to switch to the disc mode if a disc is loaded Press the DISC AUX button to switch the audio mode between the USB mode and Bluetooth Audio If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device the system will begin playing where it left off USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages For information see page 279 2011 RDX Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Device You can disconnect the USB flash memory device at any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system Always follow the USB flash memory device s instructions when you remove it When you disconnect the USB flash memory device while it is playing the upper display and the audio control display if selected show NO DATA USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages Models with navigation system If you see an error message on the upper display while playing a USB flash memory device find the solution in the chart to the right If you cannot clear the error message take your vehicle to your dealer Error Message Cause Solution USB ERROR USB ROM error as is a pr
27. information display will show a SERVICE PAST DUE message the total distance traveled after the remaining oil life became 0 and the maintenance item code s 414 This message is displayed again when you drive over 10 miles for U S models or 10 km for Canadian models after seeing the 0 message Immediately have the service performed and make sure to reset the display as previously described The message will be canceled if the V or A button on the steering wheel is pressed Press the V or A button to see the message again 2011 RDX INST MPG i GY o CANADA INST 1160km ee ea GH innin SERVICE Al When you press the SEL RESET button to select the engine oil life the message SERVICE along with the maintenance item code and the total negative distance traveled after the oil life became 0 will be displayed on the lower part of the multi information display Maintenance Minder Maintenance Main Items and Sub Items INST MPG Q 20 40 OIL LIFE A123456 10 MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM All the maintenance items displayed on the multi information display are in code For an explanation of the maintenance codes see page 418 Resetting the Engine Oil Life Display Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service You will see OIL LIFE 100 on the display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the O
28. s rotate the interface dial or push up and down the selector on the interface dial Then press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection If the disc has several folders the list advances to the next folder When the list of the files is displayed select it by rotating the knob or pushing the selector up and down 248 You will see REPEAT next to the TRACK icon on the audio control display To turn off this feature aj i select track repeat as previously T described then press ENTER again REPEAT INDICATOR DISC SCAN P ccc 3h odd Vr BBB 2 5 No Disc Pe sit aaO SP cece i E T TRACK REPEAT ICON REPEAT This feature when activated continuously replays the current track file in MP3 WMA mode To activate it press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display then push down the selector on the interface dial Rotate the interface dial to select track repeat Press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection 2011 RDX Playing Discs Models with navigation system REPEAT INDICATOR DISC REPEAT ICON DISC REPEAT This feature when activated continuously replays the current CD Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display then push down the selector on the interface dial Rotate the interface dial to select DISC REPEAT Press ENTER on the selector to en
29. see page 93 Outside Temperature Display This shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit U S models or in Celsius Canadian models 2011 RDX The temperature sensor is in the front bumper The temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road surface engine heat and the exhaust from surrounding traffic This can cause an incorrect temperature reading when your vehicle speed is under 19 mph 30 km h When you start your trip the sensor is not fully acclimatized therefore it may take several minutes until the proper temperature is displayed In certain weather conditions temperature readings near freezing 82 F 0 C could mean that ice is forming on the road surface You can adjust the outside temperature display see page 91 Multi Information Display Maintenance Minder The multi information display in the instrument panel shows you the engine oil life and maintenance service items when the ignition switch is in the ON ID position This information helps to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued trouble free driving Refer to page 411 for more information INST MPG U S models INST L 100 km Canadian models This shows your instant fuel economy When you turn off the engine INST MPG or INST L 100 km is also reset RANGE This shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the fuel tank This distance
30. 90 1 Q 106 1 87 7 CES 107 9 so z SEEK ICONS SCAN ICON TUNE ICON SCAN INDICATOR To tune with the interface dial press SEEK The SEEK function SCAN The SCAN function the AUDIO button to view the audio searches up and down from the samples all stations with strong control display then push the current frequency to find a station signals on the selected band To selector down and turn the dial to with a strong signal To activate it activate it press the SCAN button TUNE Then press ENTER on the press the I lt or gt PI side of the then release it You will see SCAN selector and turn the dial to the SEEK SKIP bar then release it on the upper display desired frequency To exit the TUNE mode press ENTER again To activate the seek function with the interface dial press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display then push the selector on the interface dial to the right or left 220 2011 RDX Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system To activate the scan function with the interface dial press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display then push down the selector on the interface dial and push the selector to the right You will see SCAN on the audio control display When it finds a strong signal it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds If you do nothing the system will then scan for the next
31. CD DA e CD R RW e DVD A The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO o COMPACT ISG DIGITAL AUDIO BEIC EG Hisi RESICE AUDIO COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO COMPACT IGITAL AUDIO ReWritable Mise ReWritable 2011 RDX The changer can also play MP3 or WMA format see page 245 DVD A discs not meeting DVD verification standards may not be playable The changer cannot play DVD V or DVD R RW formats Some CD DA and CD ROM mixed discs are not playable You cannot load and play 3 inch 8 cm discs in this system NOTICE Do not use discs with adhesive labels The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit CONTINUED 241 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models with navigation system S dts Digital Surround Manufactured under license under U S Patent s 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 487 535 amp other U S and worldwide patents issued amp pending DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS Inc 1996 2007 DTS Inc All Rights Reserved 242 Loading Discs To load multiple discs in one operation 1 bo 3 Press and hold the LOAD button on the changer unit until you hear a beep You will see BUSY on the upper display and the disc load indicator turns red and starts blinking Insert the disc into the disc slot
32. DOOR amp TAILGATE OPEN message will come on You will also hear a beep when you turn the ignition switch to the ON I position and each time you open any door or the tailgate with the key in the ON ID position Protecting Adults and Teens Locking the doors and the tailgate reduces the chance of someone being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash and it helps prevent passengers from accidentally opening a door or the tailgate and falling out Locking the doors and the tailgate also helps prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate when you come to a stop See page 126 for how to lock the doors and the tailgate This vehicle has auto door locking unlocking features See pages 103 and 111 for how to set them 2 Adjust the Front Seats Adjust the driver s seat as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle Have a front passenger adjust their seat as far to the rear as possible 2011 RDX If you sit too close to the steering wheel or dashboard you can be seriously injured by an inflating front airbag or by striking the steering wheel or dashboard The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches 25 cm between the center of the steering wheel and the chest In addition to adjusting the seat you can adjust the steering wheel up and down and in and out see
33. INTERCOOLER Your vehicle is equipped with a intercooler on the engine to cool the air flow from a turbo charger into the engine The intercooler fins bend easily Do not push them with your finger 2011 RDX NOTICE Do not spray water from such sources as garden hoses high pressure sprayers into the engine compartment It may cause serious damage to your vehicle and could also damage the intercooler fins Dust and Pollen Filter This filter removes the dust and pollen that is brought in from the outside through the climate control system Have your dealer replace the filter when this service is indicated by a maintenance message on the multi information display It should be replaced every 15 000 miles 24 000 km if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air or if the flow from the climate control system becomes less than usual 439 IIULUJQJUIE IN Table of Contents Wiper Blades Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS blades at least every six months Replace them if you find signs of cracking in the rubber areas that are getting hard or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used To replace a front wiper blade 2 Disconnect the blade assembly 1 Raise each wiper arm off the from the wiper arm windshield lifting the driver s side e Press and hold the lock tab first then the passenger s side e Slide the blade assembly towar
34. Incidents Weather Information cA in Computer SG Assistance Calender Calculator 2 From the INFO screen select Cellular Phone 1 Press the INFO button and the 3 Select Search Imported INFO screen will be shown Phonebook CONTINUED 317 2011 RDX soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Select a phonebook Eric s Phone Sep 2 2006 mm A 2 Razr V3 J Oct 25 2006 Juan 24 2006 3 K700i Lisa s Cell Jan 12 2006 3660 May 22 2006 My Phone l June 5 2006 4 Select a phonebook you want to choose a phone number from If the phonebook you select is PIN protected you will need to enter the PIN to access it See page 326 for more information 318 Enter keyword for a name A ust 1234567890 1 8 amp lt gt 0 To search for a specific name in the phonebook enter the keyword for either the first or last name To display all names in the phonebook select the List option 2011 RDX Select a number to call E BTOREIN jandsFreelink 1e I 123 456 7890 2 H 123 456 7891 3 E 123 456 7892 y 5 Select the name All the phone numbers stored for that name will be listed 6 Select the phone number and push the interface selector HFL begins dialing Bluetooth HandsFreeLink If you choose
35. P 172 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR P 33 EAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HEATED MIRROR BUTTON P 121 147 AUXILIARY INPUT JACK P 291 ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET P 157 SEAT HEATER SWITCHES P 141 3 Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system Refer to the navigation system manual 2011 RDX Driver and Passenger Safety This section gives you important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers It shows you how to use seat belts properly It explains how your airbags work and it tells you how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle Important Safety Precautions 6 Your Vehicle s Safety Features 8 Seat BelStress 9 INIP DAS vosss sexes ceccs cletesieues caste tsseesd 10 Protecting Adults and Teens 12 1 Close and Lock the Doors 12 2 Adjust the Front Seats 13 3 Adjust the Seat Backs 14 4 Adjust the Head Restraints 15 5 Fasten and Position the Seat Belt ecs scccsssccesosscecvectivevsovss 15 6 Maintain a Proper Sitting IPOSIUION sxe scececvexeseeeciseisests 17 Advice for Pregnant Women 18 Additional Safety Precautions 19 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts ccccccscssssseeeceees 20 Seat Belt System Components 20 Lap Shoulder Belt 0008 21 Automatic Seat Belt TONSIONETS cccceceeeeeeeseeees 22 Seat Belt Maintenanc
36. SOUND CLOCK button and PWR VOL knob Press and release the SOUND CLOCK button to switch the display to an iPod menu then turn the PWR VOL knob to select a desired list Press and release the SOUND CLOCK button to set your selection Playing an iPod Models without navigation system ALBUM MODE is selected Pod The center display shows items on the selected list Press either side of the TUNE FOLDER bar repeatedly After making a selection wait for a few seconds to set your selection If you select ALL all available files on the selected list are played To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode You can select any type of repeat and shuffle mode by using the RPT button or the ASSEL RDM button REPEAT This feature continuously plays a file To activate the repeat feature press the RPT button You will see RPT in the center display To turn it off press the RPT button again SHUFFLE ALL This feature plays all available files in a selected list playlists artists albums or songs in random order To activate the shuffle all feature press the A SEL RDM button You will see RDM in the center display To turn it off press and hold the ASEL RDM button 2011 RDX SHUFFLE ALBUM This feature plays all available albums in a selected list playlists artists albums or songs in random order The files in each album are played in the recorded order To activate the shuffle album feature
37. Vehicle Identification Number 478 Operating the Power 142 Identification Number 478 Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Rear Defogger cceseeceeeees 121 Shifting the Automatic 376 SYSUEM vss eescesesseeessvesdensensiis 395 Windshield Tr ad Wear csssssnsssevcesccovacsvooses 482 VSA Activation Indicator 69 Cleaning erursan 114 Trip Met r s ssisccsssscccs aeetetsecntcess 76 VSA System Indicator 68 Defroster s sic isssaessiteesoesesentess 167 Turbo Boost Meter ccceee 73 Vehicle Storage cccccccssseeees 451 WaAshefS Sa eneas 114 426 Turn Signals irrisica He VIN cscdiesiedersscctetseteressts aaceeverteeets 478 Wipers Windshield Turn Signals and Headlights 116 Viscosity Oil csissssisssseressecozsscsesss 420 Changing Blades 008 440 Operatlon seistes 114 Rest Yoni 4 Warr Washer ccesssseesssseceessseees 115 7 ae Worn TIES cs cciscissseseosetces sees enses 445 Unexpected Taking Care of WARNING Explanation of iii i i aLe EE E oss 453 Warning Labels Location of 58 Wrecker Emergency Towing 475 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Warranty Coverages U S U S only ener W ony eanan ninini 495 Unleaded Gasoline 0006 352 Washer Windshield USB Flash Memory Device Error Checking the Fluid Level 426 XM Radio cesseesseeeeees 179 228 Message
38. Vehicle Stability Assist 31 Press the INFO button to go to the information screen select Messages and select Scheduled Dealer Appointment from the message category list Then press ENTER 342 Appt Dec 22 at 8 00am Dec 18 07 Appt with Acura Of Brooklyn for appt MT 72974 v Voice a Call Reschedule Cancel Appointment Appointment You will see the screen to reschedule as shown To make an appointment select Reschedule Appointment then press ENTER The system will automatically connect to the Acura server then show you a new appointment date and time on the navigation screen If you accept this appointment select Confirm Appointment then press ENTER 2011 RDX To cancel the appointment Appt Dec 22 at 8 00am Dec 18 07 Appt with Acura Of Brooklyn for appt MT 72974 Voice Call Reschedule Cancel Appointment Appointment Select Messages on the information screen then press ENTER Select Scheduled Dealer Appointment from the message category list Then press ENTER To cancel the appointment select Cancel Appointment AcuraLink U S models only Confirmation Would you like to connect and cancel the appointment Yes No The system will request you to confirm the cancel on the navigation screen To ca
39. begins to flash then stays on again You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi information display This is normal the system cannot monitor the spare tire pressure Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure it is correct 394 This indicator and the warning message on the multi information display will go off after several miles kilometers driving when the spare tire is replaced with the specified regular tire equipped with the tire pressure monitor sensor Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor You must use TPMS specific wheels It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician Never use a puncture repairing agent in a flat tire If used you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor Have the flat tire repaired by your dealer as soon as possible 2011 RDX As required by the FCC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1
40. dealer for a replacement m Never put a rear facing child seat in the front m Alvays use seat belts and child restraints m See owner s manual for more information about air bags y AIR BAG OA BETWEEN THE AIR BAG GONFLABLE OU ENTRE LE COUSSIN a AND YOURSELF VOUS WNER S MANUAL FOR FURTHER e LISEZ LE GUIDE UTILISATEUR POUR DE INFORMATION AND EXPLANATIONS PLUS AMPLES RENSEIGNEMENTS DASHBOARD U S models SUN VISORS U S models only This Vehicle is Equipped with Advanced Air Bags Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Even with Advanced Air Bags Children can be killed or seriously injured by the air bag The back seat is the safest place for children Never put a rear facing child seat in the front Always use seat belts and child restraints See owner s manual for more information about air bags Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information To be removed by owner only 58 2011 RDX Safety Labels DOOR JAMBS U S models Canadian models SIDE AIRBAG SIDE AIRBAG This car is equipped Thi i with side airbags in the This car is equipped front seals and side with side airbags in the curtain airbags g s front seats and side Dorotiean agen the h Joor curtain airbags See owners manual for Do not lean against the more information door COUSSIN GONFLABLE See owner s manual for LATERAL more information Cette automobile
41. different types of music satellite radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator therefore objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions To help compensate for this ground based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas SATELLITE Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator GROUND REPEATER CONTINUED 235 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing the XM Radio Models with navigation system Depending on where you drive you may experience reception problems Interference can be caused by any of these conditions e Driving on the north side of an east west mountain road e Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east west road e Driving in tunnels 236 e Driving on a road beside a vertical wall steep cliff or hill to the south of you e Driving on the lower level of a multi tiered road e Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft 15 m to the south of you There may also be other geographic situations or structures that could affect satellite radio reception 2011 RDX As required by the FCC Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Play
42. display see page 80 The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch 125 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Door Locks Power Door Locks Driver s Side a MASTER DOOR Passenger s Side LOCK SWITCH Each front door has a master door lock switch Either switch locks and unlocks all doors and the tailgate Push the top of the switch to lock all doors and the tailgate push the bottom to unlock them 126 LOCK TAB Each door has a lock tab next to the inside door handle When you pull backward on the lock tab on the driver s door all the doors and the tailgate lock Pushing forward on the lock tab on the driver s door unlocks only that door The lock tab on each passenger s door locks and unlocks only that door 2011 RDX When the door is unlocked you can see the red indicator on the lock tab next to the inside door handle All doors and the tailgate can be locked from the outside by using the key in the driver s door lock To unlock only the driver s door insert the key turn the key and release it The remaining doors and the tailgate unlock when you turn the key a second time within a few seconds You can change the DOOR LOCK MODE setting on the multi information display see page 105 Door Locks When the vehicle speed reaches about 9 mph about 15 km h or more all the doors lock automatically You can change the AUTO DOOR
43. do not try to turn around Your vehicle could roll over Slowly back down the hill following the same route you took up the hill Off Highway Driving Guidelines Crossing a Stream Avoid driving through deep water If you encounter water in your route a small stream or large puddle for example evaluate it carefully before going ahead Make sure it is shallow flowing slowly and has firm ground underneath If you are not sure of the depth or the ground turn around and find another route Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle The water can get into the transmission and differential diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings If You Get Stuck Avoid driving on soft sand deep mud or other surfaces where you could get stuck If you do happen to get stuck because of inclement weather or other conditions choose a safe and appropriate course of action You should never use a jack to try getting unstuck A jack only works on firm level ground Also your vehicle could easily slip off the jack and hurt you or someone else 2011 RDX If you spin the wheels excessively trying to get unstuck you may overheat the components of the SH AWD system The SH AWD indicator on the instrument panel will blink to indicate the rear differential temperature is too high You will also see an SH AWD DIFF TEMP HIGH message on the multi
44. press and hold the switch then lift up 128 2011 RDX VEE HANDLE To close the tailgate use the tailgate handle or the pull pockets to lower the tailgate then press down on the back edge Keep the tailgate closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging the tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page 57 Tailgate Unlocking the Tailgate If the power door lock system cannot unlock the tailgate unlock it manually Place a cloth on the top side of the cover to prevent scratches then use a small flat tip screwdriver to remove the cover on the back of the tailgate RELEASE LEVER Push the release lever to the lower right as shown with the screw driver then push and open the tailgate 2011 RDX If you need to unlock the tailgate manually it means there is a problem with the tailgate Have the vehicle checked by your dealer 129 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Remote Transmitter UNLOCK Press this button once to unlock the driver s door Push it twice to unlock the other doors Some exterior lights will flash twice when you push the button If you do not open any door or the tailgate within 30 seconds they will automatically relock To change the DOOR LOCK MODE setting see page 105 To change the SECURITY RELOCK TIMER setting see page 109 UNLOCK LOCK Press this button once to lock
45. release the button e Push on the accelerator pedal Accelerate to the desired cruising speed then press the SET DECEL button e To increase your speed in very small amounts tap the RES ACCEL button Each time you do this the vehicle speeds up about 1 mph 1 6 km h You can decrease the set cruising speed in any of these ways NOTE If you need to decrease your speed quickly use the brakes as you normally would e Press and hold the SET DECEL button Release the button when you reach the desired speed e To slow down in very small amounts tap the SET DECEL button Each time you do this your vehicle will slow down about 1 mph 1 6 km h e Tap the brake pedal lightly with your foot The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will go out When the vehicle slows to the desired speed press the SET DECEL button 2011 RDX Even with cruise control on you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing After completing the pass take your foot off the accelerator pedal The vehicle will return to the set cruising speed Resting your foot on the brake pedal causes cruise control to cancel CONTINUED 301 soinjeoy Cruise Control Canceling Cruise Control CRUISE BUTTON FD CANCEL BUTTON You can cancel cruise control in any of these ways e Tap the brake pedal e Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel e Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel 302
46. switch the disc will stay in the drive When you turn the system back on the disc will begin playing where it left off To take the system out of disc mode press the AM FM or DISC AUX or xm button to switch to the radio or satellite radio or auxiliary input while a disc is playing When you return to disc mode by pressing the DISC AUX button play will continue at the same point that it left off 2011 RDX Removing Discs from the Changer To remove the disc that is currently playing press and release the eject 4 button You will see EJECT on the upper display When you remove the disc from the slot the system begins the load sequence so you can load another disc in that position If you do not load another disc within 10 seconds the system selects the previous mode AM FM1 FM2 or XM Radio If you do not remove the disc from the slot the system will reload the disc after 10 seconds and put the CD changer in pause mode To begin playing the disc press the DISC AUX button CONTINUED 253 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models with navigation system To remove a different disc from the Protecting Discs changer first select it by pressing For information on how to handle the corresponding number on the and protect compact discs see preset button or turning the interface page 257 knob and pressing ENTER on the Di 2 isc Changer Error Messages interface selector When that disc For information
47. this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Vehicle Stability Assist VSA aka Electronic Stability Control ESC System The vehicle stability assist VSA system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than desired It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces It does this by regulating the engine s output and by selectively applying the brakes When VSA activates you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator in the same way it does at other times There may also be some noise from the VSA hydraulic system You will also see the VSA activation indicator blink The VSA system cannot enhance the vehicle s driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicle s entire braking system It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety VSA Activation Indicator A When VSA activates you will see the VSA activation indicator blink see page 69 VSA Vehicle Stability Assist VSA System Indicator If this indicator comes on while driving pull to the side of the road when it is safe and turn off the engine Reset the system by restarting the engine If the VSA system indicator stays on or comes back on while driving hav
48. turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery 3 Make sure the shift lever is in Park Press on the brake pedal 374 4 Without touching the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the START ID position then release the ignition switch You do not need to hold the ignition switch in the START IID position to start the engine The starter motor can run for up to 9 seconds to guarantee starting when the outside temperature is very low If you hold the ignition switch in the START IID position for more than 7 seconds the starter motor depending on the outside temperature runs for up to 25 seconds until the engine starts If the engine does not start wait at least 10 seconds before trying again 2011 RDX NOTICE The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft If an improperly coded key or other device is used the engine s fuel system is disabled For more information see page 124 NOTICE The engine is harder to start in cold weather Also the thinner air found at altitudes above 8 000 feet 2 400 meters adds to this problem Starting the Engine Your vehicle has an electric vacuum pump located in the engine compartment When you drive in cold weather or thinner air at high altitude the electric vacuum pump operates more frequently after the engine is started When the electric vacuum pump is in operation it makes some mech
49. turn the rear window wiper ON The wiper operates intermittently OFF The wiper is not activated When you turn the wiper switch to OFF while the rear window wiper is in action it will return to its parked position When you shift the transmission to the reverse position with the front windshield wipers activated the rear window wiper operates automatically When the wiper control lever position is INT the rear wiper operates intermittently When it is LO or HI the rear wiper operates continuously 2011 RDX Rear Window Washer with Wiper Hold past ON to turn the rear window wiper on and to spray the rear window washer The rear window wiper makes one more sweep after you release the switch Rear Window Washer Only Rotate the switch counterclockwise from OFF to spray the window washer without activating the wiper The washer will operate until you release the switch The rear window washer uses the same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer 115 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Turn Signals and Headlights 1 Turn signal 2 Off 3 Parking and interior lights 4 AUTO 5 Headlights on 6 High beams 7 Flash high beams 8 Fog lights off 9 Fog lights on 116 Turn Signal Push down on the lever to signal a left turn and up to signal a right turn To signal a lane change push lightly on the lever and hold it The lever will return to center when you release it or complete a turn
50. undesired operation of the device 331 soinjeoy AcuraLink U S models only On models with navigation system except Alaska Hawaii and Puerto Rico AcuraLink enhances your ownership experience by providing a direct communication link between your vehicle and the Acura Server Working through the XM radio satellite AcuraLink works in conjunction with the navigation system Bluetooth HandsFreeLink HFL and audio system in your vehicle It displays and receives several kinds of messages including e Operating tips and information on your vehicle s features e Important recall and safety information e Maintenance information to keep your vehicle in top condition e Diagnostic information to provide information about any problems with your vehicle 332 Interface Dial Most AcuraLink functions are controlled by the interface dial The interface dial has two parts a knob and a selector 2011 RDX SELECTOR The knob turns left and right Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen The selector can be pushed left right up down and in Use the selector to scroll through lists to select menus and to highlight menu items When you make a selection push the center of the selector ENTER to go to that selection AcuraLink U S models only Reading Messages To view p
51. 0 18 US gal 0 7 L 480 2011 RDX Specifications Lights Air Conditioning Headlights High 12 V 60 W HB3 Refrigerant type HFC 134a R 134a Low 12 V 35 W D2S Charge quantity 15 9 17 6 oz 450 500 g Front turn signal parking lights 12 V 24 2 2 CP Amber Lubricant type SP 10 Front fog lights 12 V 55 W H11 Battery Front side marker lights 12V 3 CP Capacity 12 V 52 AH 5 HR Rear turn signal lights 12V 21W 12 V 65 AH 20 HR Brake Taillights in fenders 12 V 21 55 W Fuses Taillights in tailgate 12V 3CP Interior See page 473 or the fuse label Back up lights 12V 21W attached to the dashboard Rear side marker lights 12V 2CP Under hood See page 474 or the fuse box License plate lights 12V 3 CP covers High mount brake light 12V 16W Alignment Front ceiling lights Spotlights 12V 4CP Toe in Front 0 0 in 0 mm Rear ceiling light 12V 8W Rear 0 10 in 2 5 mm Glove box light 14V 14W Camber Front 0 10 Console compartment light 14V 14W Rear f Vanity mirror lights 12V 2W Caster Front 2 67 Door courtesy lights 12V 2CP Tires Cargo area light i2v 5W Size Front Rear P235 55R18 99V x The low beam headlights are high voltage discharged type Spare T165 80D17 104M Replacement of a low beam headlight bulb shou
52. 485 Emissions Controls cc00000 487 The Clean Air Act 0000 487 Crankcase Emissions Control SYSCOM o E EE 487 Evaporative Emissions Control E a P 487 Onboard Refueling Vapor RECOVELY ieicceceesesetecevesteceses 488 Exhaust Emissions Controls usses essersi 488 Replacement Parts 006 488 2011 RDX Three Way Catalytic CONVELER Sc scesciscsces Sesestleeeticiess 489 Emissions Testing ccccceese 490 477 woneULIoyUy Pey Identification Numbers Your vehicle has several identifying numbers located in various places The vehicle identification number VIN is the 17 digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard You can see it by looking through the windshield on the driver s side It is also on the certification label attached to the driver s doorjamb and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label 478 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 2011 RDX CERTIFICATION LABEL Identification Numbers The engine number is stamped into the front of the engine block The transmission number is on a label on top of the transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER 2011 RDX 479 woneULIoyUy eya
53. 6 psi 30 to 40 kPa 0 3 to 0 4 kgf cm higher than the cold readings This is normal Do not let air out to match the recommended cold air pressure The tire will be underinflated You should get your own tire pressure gauge and use it whenever you check your tire pressures This will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges While tubeless tires have some ability to self seal if they are punctured you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure Recommended Tire Pressures The following charts show the recommended cold tire pressures for most normal driving conditions Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving Front Rear P235 55R18 99V 32 psi 220 kPa 2 2 kgf cm The compact spare tire pressure is 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 kgf cm For convenience the recommended tire sizes and cold tire pressures are on a label on the driver s doorjamb For additional information about your tires see page 484 2011 RDX Tire Inspection Every time you check inflation you should also examine the tires for damage foreign objects and wear You should look for e Bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions e Cuts splits or cracks in the side of the tire Replace the tire if you can see fabric or cord e Excessive tread wear CON
54. 7 Turn on the fog lights to test the new bulb 8 Put the undercover in place Reinstall the clip and tighten the screw securely 3 Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down 4 Remove the bulb from the fog light assembly by turning it one quarter turn counterclockwise 436 2011 RDX Replacing a High mount Brake Light Bulb SCREWS COVERS 1 Remove the two screw covers on the light assembly by prying on the side edge with a flat tip screwdriver 2 Remove the screws with a Phillips head screwdriver then remove the light assembly from the tailgate Lights SOCKET BULB C 3 Remove the socket from the light assembly by turning it one quarter turn counterclockwise 4 Pull the bulb straight out of its socket Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms 5 Press the brake pedal to make sure the new bulb is working 6 Put the socket back into the light assembly and turn it clockwise to lock itin place 7 Reinstall the high mount brake light assembly into the tailgate Tighten the two screws and reinstall the covers 2011 RDX Side Turn Signal Lights Each outside mirror has side turn signal lights The lights should be replaced by your dealer Replacing a Rear License Plate Light Bulb The license plate has two lights above it The bulbs should be replaced by your dealer 437 IDULUJQJUIE IN Cl
55. A V button the screen changes as shown in the illustration Press the INFO A V button until you see the setting you want to customize then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection CUSTOMIZE GROUP LIGHTING SETUP Press the SEL RESET button or the select reset knob 2011 RDX INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME HEADLIGHT AUTO F TIMER FEI 7 button or rotate the select reset knob CONTINUED 97 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display Interior Light Dimming Time The interior lights fade out when you close all doors You can change the time that the interior lights fade out CUSTOMIZE LIGHTING SETUP FY DIMMING TIME ES TER While LIGHTING SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button You will see the above display 98 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZE Nissi OE SCARE DIMKING TIME a 24 F Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as shown above Select how long you want the lights to stay on before they fade out 15 30 or 60 seconds by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection Multi Information Display INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME SETUP INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME SETTING INCOMPLETE CUSTOMIZE TSG ee DIMMING TIME SETUP When your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back t
56. Control Sensors 171 Front Parking Lights 432 Changing a Flat Tire 455 Climate Control System 164 Front Side Marker Lights 432 Changing Oil Clock nerne 293 Headlights cccsssccesseeees 431 HOW O ei ccssessesectedecssnvessetecestese A22 Coat Hook c csesscsscsssecccssosseeessed 161 High mount Brake Light 436 WHEN tO sesser isrtri 411 Code Audio System 000 292 Rear Bulbs cceseeeeee 433 434 Charging System CO in the Exhaust 57 487 Rear License Plate Lights 437 Tindicator 552 lt 50 0sseseesscesse 65 465 Cold Weather Starting in 374 Specifications sssi 481 Checklist Before Driving 373 Compact Spare Tire cceee 454 Taillights cccccccceeees 433 434 Childproof Door Locks 127 Compass Operation 00 295 Turn Signal Lights 432 433 Child Safety cccssccssssseeeesseees 36 Console Compartment 158 Bulbs Halogen ceceesseeeees 431 Booster Seats cccccsssseccesseseees 54 Consumer Information 494 Child Seats ccceeeee 41 42 44 Controls Instruments and 61 Important Safety Reminders 40 Coolant Infants E T 41 Adding ET 424 Capacities Chart aoenainnini 480 Larger Children cc 000 53 Checking seeseseeseneeveneesnesessesee
57. If this happens you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multi information display along with a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message 390 Low Tire Pressure TPMS Indicator When the low tire pressure TPMS indicator is on one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle s tire information placard It is possible that the pressures shown on the multi information display and the pressures you manually measure are slightly different If the difference is significant or you cannot make the low tire pressure TPMS indicator and message on the multi information display go out after inflating the tires to the specified values have your dealer check the system as soon as possible 2011 RDX If you think you can safely drive a short distance to a service station proceed slowly to the station then inflate the tire to the recommended pressure If the tire is flat or if the tire pressure is too low to continue driving replace the tire with the compact spare tire see page 454 Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Because tire pressure varies by temperature and other conditions the l
58. LOCK setting on the multi information display see page 103 When you shift to P after driving the driver s door unlocks You can change the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK setting on the multi information display see page 111 To lock any passenger s door when getting out of the vehicle pull backward on the lock tab and close the door To lock the driver s door remove the key from the ignition switch and pull backward on the lock tab Then close the door Lockout Prevention With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition both master door lock switches are disabled They are not disabled if the driver s door is closed Pushing the switch down on the open front passenger s door will lock all doors and the tailgate 2011 RDX Childproof Door Locks The childproof door locks are designed to prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge With the lever in the LOCK position lever is down the door cannot be opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab To open the door push the lock tab forward and use the outside door handle 127 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Table of Contents Tailgate The tailgate will lock when you lock the driver s door and will unlock when you unlock all doors You can change the DOOR LOCK MODE setting on the multi information display see page 105 To open the tailgate
59. Open the hood Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one quarter turn counterclockwise 2 Pull the bulb straight out of its socket Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms Lights Replacing Rear Bulbs in Tailgate 3 Install the socket back into the headlight assembly Turn it clockwise to lock it in place 4 Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working 1 Open the tailgate Place a cloth on the edge of the light assembly cover to prevent scratches Remove the cover by carefully prying in the notch on its middle edge with a flat tip screwdriver 2 Determine which of the two bulbs is burned out taillight or back up light 2011 RDX SOCKETS 3 Remove the socket by turning it one quarter turn counterclockwise 4 Pull the bulb straight out of its socket Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms CONTINUED 433 aouUeUD UIP Lights 5 Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working 6 Reinstall the socket into the light assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks 7 Reinstall the light assembly cover 434 Replacing Rear Bulbs in Rear Pillar 1 Open the tailgate 2 Remove the two bolt covers on the rear pillar by prying on the bottom edge with a flat tip screwdriver Remove the bolts with a Phillips head screwdriver and remove the light assembly from the rear pillar 2011 RDX
60. RDX Bluetooth Audio System Models with navigation system Once a device is linked the name of the device will appear on the screen Pressing the DISP MODE button switches the audio control display between the Bluetooth Audio and the device name If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system there will be a delay before the system begins to play To play the audio files you may need to operate your phone If so follow the phone maker s operating instructions x Ifan iPod USB flash memory device or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode you will see iPod USB or AUX in the upper display and the audio control display if selected Push the DISC AUX button again to play audio files from your Bluetooth Audio phone In the following conditions the display shows NO CONNECT message e The phone is not linked to HFL e The phone is not turned on e The phone is not in the vehicle e Another HFL compatible phone which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio is already connected 2011 RDX If your Bluetooth Audio compatible phone does not operate as described make sure it is an Acura approved phone To find out if your phone is approved go to www acura com handstreelink in Canada www acura ca or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 888 528 7876 Voice Control System You can select the AUX mode by using the navigation system vo
61. RDX Front Door Pockets FRONT DOOR POCKET The interior of each front door has an extendable pocket for maps and other small lightweight items For safety be sure both front door pockets are closed while driving 155 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Interior Convenience Items Beverage Holders Be careful when you are using the E Push beverage holders A spilled liquid sy that is very hot can scald you or your a passengers Spilled liquids can NE damage the upholstery carpeting and electrical components in the V N interior a D WW To use the front beverage holder push on the lid It will swing open To close the lid push it down until it latches 156 2011 RDX The rear seat also has a beverage holder in the center armrest To use it pivot the armrest down Interior Convenience Items Accessory Power Sockets A CZ a COVER Front To use the accessory power socket pull up the cover The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY I or ON ID position These sockets are intended to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less 10 amps Console Compartment lh None of the sockets will power an automotive type cigarette lighter element When both sockets are being used the combined power rating of the accessories should be 120 watts or less 10 amps 2011 RDX Sun Visor To use the sun visor pull it do
62. SCAN ICON You can also scan the channels on the audio control display Press the AUDIO button to view the display then push down the selector on the interface dial Push the selector to the right to activate scan feature 232 2011 RDX Preset You can store up to 12 preset channels using the preset buttons icons Each button icon stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band To store a channel 1 Press the xm button To view the audio control display press the AUDIO button Either XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the display 2 Use the tune seek or scan function to tune to a desired channel In category mode only channels within that category can be selected In channel mode all channels can be selected Playing the XM Radio Models with navigation system 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the Adjusting the Sound first six channels For information see page 224 5 Press the xm button again The XM Radio Reception other XM band will be shown For information see page 235 Store the next six channels by a 3 ee repeating steps 2 and 3 l 021 BBB 2C E 024 EEE 001 AAA 1 6 025FFF Once a channel is stored press and release the proper preset button to tune to it 3 Pick a preset number for the channel you want to store Press and hold the appropriate button until you hear a beep To store
63. SELECT press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display Push the interface selector down to scroll down the display turn the knob to A SEL then press ENTER on the interface selector You will see AUTO SEL flashing in the audio control display and A SEL on the upper display Then the system goes into scan mode for several seconds The system stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons You will see 0 displayed if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system If you do not like the stations auto select has stored you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons icons as previously described To turn off auto select press ENTER on the interface selector again This restores the presets you originally set Radio Frequencies and Reception For information on AM FM radio frequencies and reception see page page 287 Adjusting the Sound For information see page 224 2011 RDX 223 soinjeoy Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system Adjusting the Sound BASS TREBLE BALANCE and 001 AAA Eo FADER are each adjustable You can eS also adjust the strength of the sound mE mvo 9 coming from the center and Pee i a subwoofer speakers In addition you 021 BBB can set the Dolby PL ProLogic II and Sp
64. SYSTEM SRS INDICATOR P 32 65 SIDE AIRBAG OFF N INDICATOR P 32 66 1 zA PARKING BRAKE AND D IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR P 66 LOW OIL PRESSURE A INDICATOR P 65 465 _ BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR RED P 67 467 SH AWD INDICATOR P 70 CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR P 65 465 ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS INDICATOR P 66 388 LOW FUEL INDICATOR P 68 A T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR P 70 P 65 ae has INDICATOR LAMP SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR P 20 64 If equipped ek The U S instrument panel is shown Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text 63 2011 RDX sjonuop pue suoumysuj Instrument Panel Indicators The instrument panel has many indicators that give you important information about your vehicle 64 Kk Seat Belt Reminder _ Indicator This indicator reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts If you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position before fastening your seat belts the beeper sounds and the indicator flashes If you do not fasten your seat belts before the beeper stops the indicator stops flashing but remains on 2011 RDX If your front passenger does not fasten their seat belt the indicator comes on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON dI position If either of you do not fasten your seat belt while drivin
65. When you shift to reverse with the ignition switch in the ON ID position the rear view is shown on the left side of the inside mirror For more information see page 348 2011 RDX Adjusting the Power Mirrors SELECTOR SWITCH 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON dD position 2 Move the selector switch to L driver s side or R passenger s side Mirrors Outside mirror positions can be stored in the driving position memory system see page 148 Reverse Tilt Door Mirror The passenger s outside mirror has a reverse tilt feature When in reverse the mirror will tilt down slightly to improve your view as you parallel park Shifting out of reverse will return the mirror to its original ADJUSTMENT SWITCH position 3 Push the appropriate edge of the e To tilt the passenger mirror place adjustment switch to move the the selector switch in the right mirror right left up or down position 4 When you finish move the e To turn the feature off place the selector switch to the center off switch in the center or left position This turns the adjustment position switch off to keep your setting 2011 RDX Heated Mirrors HEATED MIRROR BUTTON The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost With the ignition switch in the ON ID position turn on the heaters by pressing the button The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder Press the button again to turn the heaters off Pressin
66. a CD compressed in MP3 WMA format the audio control display shows disc number folder name file number and elapsed time When playing a CD without this information the disc number track number and the elapsed time are shown on the audio control display 2011 RDX If the disc has a complex structure it will take a while to read the disc before the system begins to play it Depending on the software the files were made with it may not be possible to play some files or display some text data CONTINUED 245 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models with navigation system To Change or Select Tracks Files While a disc is playing you can use the SEEK SKIP bar to select passages and change tracks files in MP3 WMA mode In MP3 WMA mode use the TUNE FOLDER bar to select folders on the disc and use the SEEK SKIP bar to change files 246 SEEK SKIP Each time you press and release the I side of the SEEK SKIP bar the system skips forward to the beginning of the next track file in MP3 WMA mode Press and release the I lt side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track file Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track file SKIP ICON To move rapidly within a track file agra ae A tor gt gt side of You can also change tracks files on the audio control display Press the AUDIO button to view the display then push
67. after pressing the SET button do any of the following e Fail to press a memory button within 5 seconds e Readjust the seat position e Readjust the outside mirror position Each memory button stores only one driving position Storing a new position erases the previous setting stored in that button s memory If you want to add a new position while retaining the current one use the other memory button 2011 RDX Selecting a Memorized Position To select a memorized position do this 1 Make sure the vehicle is parked 2 Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 until you hear a beep then release the button The system will move the seat and outside mirrors to the memorized positions The indicator in the selected memory button will flash during movement When the adjustments are complete you will hear two beeps and the indicator will remain on CONTINUED 149 sjonuop pue sjusUInQsUy Driving Position Memory System Parking Brake To stop the system s automatic adjustment do any of these actions e Press any button on the control panel SET 1 or 2 e Push any of the adjustment switches for the seat e Shift out of Park e Adjust the outside mirrors If desired you can use the adjustment switches to change the positions of the seat or outside mirrors after they are in their memorized positions If you change the memorized position the indicator in the memory button will go out To keep
68. all doors and the tailgate Some exterior lights will flash When you push LOCK twice within 5 seconds you will hear a beep to verify that the doors and tailgate are locked and the security system has set This button does not work if any door or tailgate is not fully closed To change the KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT setting see page 107 130 2011 RDX When you press the UNLOCK button the ceiling lights if the front and rear ceiling light switches are in the door activated position will come on If you do not open any door the lights stay on for about 30 seconds then fade out If you relock the doors with the remote transmitter before 30 seconds have elapsed the lights go off immediately To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME setting see page 98 PANIC Press this button for about 1 second to attract attention the horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds To cancel panic mode press any button on the remote transmitter or turn the ignition switch to the ON dD position Remote Transmitter Remote Transmitter Care e Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter e Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature e Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid e Ifyou lose a transmitter the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer Replacing the Transmitter Battery If it takes several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors an
69. and objects are away from the window before closing it 2011 RDX NOTE The driver s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch 143 sjonuop pue s usuInQsUy Moonroof Turn the ignition switch to the ON I position before operating the moonroof switch on the ceiling console To open the moonroof fully pull back the moonroof switch firmly The moonroof opens all the way To stop the moonroof from opening fully briefly move the switch in either direction To tilt the moonroof push the center of the moonroof switch straight up To stop the moonroof from tilting fully open push the moonroof switch forward 144 MOONROOF SWITCH To close the moonroof fully push the moonroof switch forward to the second detent then release it The moonroof closes all the way To stop the moonroof from closing all the way briefly move the switch in either direction To open or close the moonroof partially pull or push the moonroof switch lightly to the first detent and hold it The moonroof will stop when you release the switch 2011 RDX Moonroof A WARNING The moonroof has a key off delay Auto Reverse You can open and close the If the moonroof runs into any Opening or closing the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after obstacle while it is closing moonroof on someone s hands you turn off the ignition switch The automatically it will reverse or fingers can cause serious key of
70. and the windows are closed e Turn off the lights e Place any packages valuables etc in the cargo area or take them with you e Lock the doors and the tailgate e Never park over dry leaves tall grass or other flammable materials The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire 2011 RDX e If the vehicle is facing uphill turn the front wheels away from the curb If the vehicle is facing downhill turn the front wheels toward the curb Check the indicator on the instrument panel to verify that the security system is set Make sure the parking brake is fully released before driving away Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or damage the rear brakes Braking System Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels A power assist using negative pressure generated by the engine and the electric vacuum pump helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal The anti lock brake system ABS helps you retain steering control when braking very hard When the electric vacuum pump is in operation it makes some mechanical noises come from the engine compartment This is normal When you drive in cold weather or thinner air at high altitude the electric vacuum pump operates more frequently after the engine is started For more information about the electric vacuum pump see page 468 Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes
71. cause serious or fatal injuries Never let two children use the same seat belt If they do they could be very seriously injured in a crash Use the childproof door locks to prevent children from opening the rear doors This can prevent children from accidentally falling out see page 127 40 Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach ts buckled the lockable retractor is activated and the belt is fully retracted and locked If a child wraps a loose seat belt around their neck they can be seriously or fatally injured See pages 50 and 51 for how to activate and deactivate the lockable retractor Do not leave children alone ina vehicle Leaving children without adult supervision is illegal in most states Canadian provinces territories and can be very hazardous For example infants and small children left in a vehicle on a hot day can die from heatstroke A child left alone with the key in the ignition switch can accidentally set the vehicle in motion possibly injuring themselves or others 2011 RDX Lock all doors and the tailgate when your vehicle is not in use Children who play in vehicles can accidentally get trapped inside Teach your children not to play in or around vehicles Keep vehicle keys remote transmitters out of the reach of children Even very young children learn how to unlock vehicle doors turn on the ignition switch and open the tailgate which can lead to accidental injur
72. changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU Press the INFO A button until you see the above display 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZE ea oe SETUP Pana a Vy Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as shown above Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection CONTINUED 95 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display ELAP TIME RESET CONDITION TRIP amp RESET SETUP When your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU 96 ELAP TIME RESET CONDITION SETTING INCOMPLETE If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZE AA SLA CONDITION re R C exit ES pee To exit ELAP TIME RESET CONDITION without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The display goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU Multi Information Display Lighting Setup There are two settings in the lighting setup e INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME e HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER While CUSTOMIZE GROUP is shown on the multi information display select LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button Each time you press the INFO
73. d un Manuel du Conducteur en frangais veuillez demander a votre concessionnaire de commander le num ro de pi ce 33STKC40
74. disc Check the disc for damage or deformation CHANGER ERROR Check Disc and Changer For more information see page 258 Error If the disc cannot be pulled out or the error message does not disappear after the disc is ejected see your dealer CONTINUED 255 2011 RDX soinjeoy Disc Changer Error Messages Models with navigation system The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc press the eject button After ejecting the disc check it for damage or deformation If there is no damage insert the disc again For the additional information on damaged discs see page 258 The audio system will try to play the disc If there is still a problem the error message will reappear Press the eject button and pull out the disc Insert a different disc If the new disc plays there is a problem with the first disc If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it take your vehicle to a dealer 256 Error Cause Solution Message FORMAT Track File format not Current track will be skipped The next supported supported track or file plays automatically BAD DISC Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc s PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage signs of OWNER S Mechanical error deformation excessive scratches and or dirt oe Gee mae Insert the dis
75. disc again press the preset bar again To Stop Playing a Disc If you turn the system off while a CD is playing either with the PWR VOL knob or by turning off the ignition switch the disc will stay in the drive When you turn the system back on the CD will begin playing where it left off To take the system out of CD mode press the AM or FM CD AUX or xm button To return to CD mode press the CD AUX button The system will continue at the same point that it left off 194 Removing CDs from the Changer To remove the disc that is currently playing press and release the eject 4 button You will see EJECT on the center display When you remove the disc from the slot the system begins the load sequence so you can load another disc in that position If you do not load another CD within 10 seconds the system selects the previous mode AM FM1 FM2 or XM If you do not remove the CD from the slot the system will reload the CD after 10 seconds and put the CD changer in pause mode To begin playing the CD press the CD AUX button To remove a different CD from the changer select it with the appropriate side of the preset bar When that CD begins playing press the eject button 2011 RDX Press and hold the eject button until you hear a beep to remove all the discs from the changer You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off by pressing the eject button The disc that was last selec
76. display by pressing the select reset knob in the instrument panel 2011 RDX Multi Information Display U S model is shown Welcome IGNITION ON in Press the SEL RESET Button Press the INFO 4 7 Button E ELAPSED TIME O1n 30m A 2011 RDX R T CULEN l I TIRE PRESS OK SYSTEM FUNC I NORMAL ALLING HEE 0123456888 SH AWD model only PRESSURE 132 21 132 PSI a IGNITION OFF L CONTINUED 75 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display Odometer The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven It measures miles in U S models and kilometers in Canadian models It is illegal under U S federal law and Canadian provincial territorial regulations to disconnect reset or alter the odometer with the intent to change the number of miles or kilometers indicated Trip Meter This meter shows the number of miles U S or kilometers Canada driven since you last reset it There are two trip meters Trip A and Trip B Each trip meter works independently so you can keep track of two different distances To reset a trip meter display it then press and hold the SEL RESET button until the number resets to 0 0 76 When you reset Trip A AVG FUEL A is reset at the same time When you reset Trip B AVG FUEL B is reset You can customize the Trip A and AVG FUEL A reset condition on the multi information display
77. doing the following 1 Make sure the gas tank is nearly but not completely full around 3 4 2 Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 6 hours or more 3 Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 and 95 F 4 and 35 C 2011 RDX 4 Without touching the accelerator pedal start the engine and let it idle for 20 seconds on Keep the vehicle in Park Increase the engine speed to 2 000 rpm and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least 1 4 of the scale about 3 minutes 6 Without touching the accelerator pedal let the engine idle for 20 seconds R Drive your vehicle for 30 seconds while accelerating Emissions Testing 8 Select a nearby lightly traveled 9 Then drive in city suburban traffic major highway where you can for at least 10 minutes When maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph traffic conditions allow let the 80 to 100 km h for at least 20 vehicle coast for several seconds minutes Drive on the highway in without using the accelerator pedal D Do not use the cruise control or the brake pedal When traffic allows drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal Vehicle speed may vary slightly this is okay If you cannot do this for a continuous If the testing facility determines the 90 seconds because of traffic readiness codes are still not set see conditions drive for at least 30 your dealer seconds then repeat it
78. door lock master switch or remote transmitter The security system indicator on the instrument panel starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself 294 SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR Once the security system is set opening any door the tailgate or the hood without using the key or the remote transmitter will cause the alarm to activate It will also activate if the audio unit is removed from the dashboard or the wiring is cut 2011 RDX The alarm will also be activated if a passenger inside the locked vehicle turns the ignition switch on The security system will not set if the hood tailgate or any door is not fully closed Before you leave the vehicle make sure the doors tailgate and hood are securely closed NOTE To see if the system is set after you exit the vehicle press the LOCK button on the remote transmitter within 5 seconds If the system is set a beep will sound Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it Compass Compass Operation On models without navigation system The compass shows your direction of travel It indicates eight directions The compass is displayed on the center display when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position The compass can be affected by driving near power lines or stations across bridges through tunnels over railroad crossings past large vehicles or driving near large objects that cause magnetic inter
79. from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal To activate it press the I lt or gt gt I side of the SEEK SKIP bar then release it SCAN The SCAN function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band To activate it press the SCAN button then release it You will see SCAN on the center display When it finds a strong signal it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds If you do nothing the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds When it plays a station you want to listen to press the SCAN button again 2011 RDX Preset Each side of the bars 1 6 can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM 1 Select the desired band AM or FM FM1 and FM2 let you store two frequencies with each side of the preset bar Use the TUNE SEEK or SCAN function to tune the radio to a desired station 3 Pick the preset number 1 6 for the station you want to store Press the left or right side of the bar and hold it until you hear a beep bo A Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM CONTINUED 175 soinjeoy Playing the FM AM Radio Models without navigation system AUTO SELECT If you are traveling and can no longer receive your preset stations you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area To activate it press the
80. hear a lights on reminder beeper You can change the HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER setting on the multi information display see page 100 Daytime Running Lights With the headlight switch off or in the 500 position the high beam headlights and the high beam indicator come on with reduced brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position and release the parking brake They remain on until you turn the ignition switch off even if you set the parking brake The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the switch If you see a CHECK DRL SYSTEM message on the multi information display there is a problem with the daytime running light system Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked 2011 RDX Fog Lights Turn the fog lights on and off by turning the switch next to the headlight switch You can use the fog lights only when the headlights are on low beam They will go off when the headlights are turned off 119 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Instrument Panel Brightness You will hear a beep when maximum or minimum brightness is reached You will also hear a beep when the maximum level is canceled by BRIGHTNESS turning the knob a click to the left wan INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB U S model is shown The knob on the instrument panel To reduce glare at night the controls the brightness of the instrument panel illumination dims instrume
81. in the engine speed will enter into the tachometer s red zone If this occurs you may feel the engine cut in and out This is caused by a limiter in the engine s computer controls The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Release This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal and pressing the release button does not work 1 Set the parking brake 2 Remove the key from the ignition switch 3 Put a cloth on the notch of the shift lock release slot cover to prevent scratches Using a small flat tip screwdriver or a metal fingernail file carefully pry on the notch of the cover to remove it 4 Insert the key in the shift lock release slot 5 Push down on the key while you press the release button on the shift lever and move the shift lever out of Park to neutral 2011 RDX RELEASE BUTTON SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT 6 Remove the key from the shift lock release slot then install the cover Make sure the notch on the cover is on the rear Insert the key back into the ignition switch press the brake pedal and restart the engine If you need to use the shift lock release it means your vehicle is developing a problem Have it checked by your dealer 379 SUIALIG Driving with the Paddle Shifters Using the Paddle Shifters in the D position D Paddle Shi
82. indicator on your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti lock function You will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 80 For more information see page 388 2011 RDX Immobilizer System Indicator This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position It will then go off if you have inserted a properly coded ignition key If it is not a properly coded key the indicator will blink and the engine s fuel system will be disabled see page 124 Instrument Panel Indicators U S Canada 2 If it stays on after you have fully U S Canada sjonuop pue suoumysuj released the parking brake while BRAKE BRAKE the engine is running or if it SYSTEM comes on while driving it can Parking Brake and Brake System indicate a bees a Ie brake Brake System Indicator Amber Indicator Red system You will also see a The brake system indicator amber This indicator has two functions BRAKE FLUID LOW or normally comes on when you turn 1 It comes on when you turn the CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM the ignition switch to the ON ID ignition switch to fi ON ID message on the multi information position and goes off after the engine position It is a reminder to check display For more information see Starts M it comes on at any other the parking brake Driving with page
83. information display see page 385 If this happens stop and allow everything to cool down The SH AWD indicator goes off after the rear differential temperature drops 407 SUIALIG 408 2011 RDX Maintenance This section explains why it is USS Vehicles Maintenance Maintenance Safety sc00 410 important to keep your vehicle well replacement or repair of Maintenance Minder 4 411 maintained and how to follow basic emissions control devices and Fluid Locations c cccessseeeees 419 maintenance safety precautions systems may be done by any Adding Engine Oil 420 automotive repair establishment Required Engine Oil 420 ER pA Te i die or individual using parts that are Changing the Engine Oil and maintenance minder messages on certified to EPA standards ee E canes the multi information display and ee id W T E adeeb 426 instructions for simple maintenance A MESME ASAS le eia ais tasks you may want to take care of utomatic Transmission Fluid 427 yourself Brake Fluid isrsiesssrsrasissess 429 i Power Steering Fluid 430 If you have the skills and tools to E AEE N E 431 perform more complex maintenance Cleaning the Seat Belts 438 tasks on your vehicle you may want POOF Mats rsrsrs 438 to purchase the service manual See Audio Antenna ccssccecsseees 439 page 497 for information on how to INtErcoOle raene 439
84. is estimated from the fuel economy you received over the last several miles U S or kilometers Canada so it will vary with changes in speed traffic etc When the battery is disconnected or you refuel RANGE is also reset ELAPSED TIME This shows the accumulated traveling time since you last reset it When you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position ELAPSED TIME is reset You can customize the ELAPSED TIME reset condition on the multi information display see page 95 2011 RDX AVG SPEED This shows the average speed you are traveling in miles per hour mph for U S models or kilometers per hour km h for Canadian models When you reset Trip A AVG SPEED is also reset AVG FUEL A B This shows your vehicle s average fuel economy in mpg U S models or liter 100 km Canadian models since you last reset Trip A or Trip B You can customize the Trip A and AVG FUEL A reset condition on the multi information display see page 93 The average fuel economy will be reset when you reset the trip meter or if the vehicle s battery goes dead or is disconnected CONTINUED 77 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display SH AWD Torque Distribution Monitor On SH AWD models This monitor shows how much torque is being delivered to each wheel For more information see page 384 Tire Pressure Monitor You can see the pressure of each tire in this monitor If one or more tire pres
85. least 12 hours from the activation request If the service has not been activated after 36 hours contact XM Radio In Canada contact XM CANADA Playing Discs Models with navigation system Normal mode MP3 WMA mode DISC NUMBER MP3 MODE INDICATOR FOLDER NUMBER SS IE 5 I te cu V im iru H ic TEMP SCAN L CLOCK aic on si TEMP n SCAN INDICATOR TRACK NUMBER kaa skip TRACK LIST ccc 3 4 FOLDER RANDOM BBB Q NoDisc REPEAT ese AAA 1 r6 EEE RANDOM V AUDIO MENU U S model is shown CONTINUED 239 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing Discs Models with navigation system U S model is shown PASSENGER AIRBAG co AUDIO BUTTON INTERFACE DIAL PWR VOL KNOB DISC LOAD INDICATOR DISC SLOT DISC AUX BUTTON SCAN BUTTON re Ca Eei em a SSL osrmone BUTTON EJECT BUTTON LOAD rom Se E SEEK SKIP BAR TUNE FOLDER BAR PRESET BUTTONS 240 2011 RDX Playing Discs Models with navigation system Your vehicle s audio system has an in dash disc changer with the same controls used for the radio To operate the disc changer the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY M or the ON I position The disc changer can play these disc formats e CD
86. load on the engine increasing fuel consumption 2011 RDX Keep your vehicle clean In particular a build up of snow or mud on your vehicle s underside adds weight and rolling resistance Frequent cleaning helps your fuel economy CONTINUED 359 SUIALI 0g Fuel Economy Drive Efficiently e Drive moderately Rapid acceleration abrupt cornering and hard braking increase fuel consumption e Always drive in the highest gear possible If your vehicle has a manual transmission you can boost your fuel economy by up shifting as early as possible e Observe the speed limit Aerodynamic drag has a big effect on fuel economy at speeds above 45 mph 75 km h Reduce your speed and you reduce the drag Trailers car top carriers roof racks and bike racks are also big contributors to increased drag e Avoid excessive idling Idling results in 0 miles per gallon 0 kms per liter 360 2011 RDX e Minimize the use of the air conditioning system The A C puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel Use the fresh air ventilation when possible Plan and combine trips Combine several short trips into one A warmed up engine is more fuel efficient than a cold one Fuel Economy Calculating Fuel Economy Measuring Techniques Direct calculation is the recommended source of information about your actual fuel economy Using frequency of fill ups or taking fuel gauge rea
87. models only Maintenance System A1 May 16 07 Vehicle maintenance is due See owner s manual or select VOICE to hear maintenance items Find Acura Dir Schedule Dealer Appt Delete Stop Reading Call Your Dealer Select the received message then press ENTER You will see the message as shown To make an appointment select Schedule Dealer Appt then press ENTER Next available time Acura Of Brooklyn Dec 22 at 8 00 AM Confirm this time or call your dealer Cancel to return v Voice Confirm Appointment The system will automatically connect to the Acura server then show you an appropriate appointment date and time on the navigation screen If you accept this appointment select Confirm Appointment then press ENTER 2011 RDX Confirmation Appt Acura Of Brooklyn Dec 22 at 8 00am The confirmation message will be displayed on the screen Make sure to confirm the appointment date time and dealer If it is OK press ENTER If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date select Cancel then press ENTER CONTINUED 341 soinjeoy AcuraLink U S models only Scheduled Dealer Appointment To reschedule the appointment Select a message 1 E Aprt Dec 22 at 8 00am Electric Power Steering 22 Emissions System P0420 Tire Pressure Monitor 83 AcuraLink Messages
88. of all paired phones Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phone setup 2 Say List after the prompts 3 HFL will read out all the paired phone s names Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To hear which paired phone is currently linked Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phone setup 2 Say Status after the prompts 3 HFL will tell you which phone is linked to the system To change from the currently linked phone to another paired phone Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phone setup 2 Say Next Phone after the prompts 3 HFL will tell you which phone is linked to the system 4 Once another phone is found it is linked to the system HFL will inform you which phone is now linked If no other phones are found or paired HFL will inform you that the original phone is linked again 2011 RDX To change the pairing code setting Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phone setup 2 Say Set pairing code after the prompts 3 If you want HFL to create a random code each time you pair a phone say Random If you want to choose your own 4 digit code to be used each time say Fixed and follow the HFL prompts CONTINUED 315 soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Making a Call You can make calls using a name in the HFL phoneb
89. only e To keep stale air and mustiness from collecting you should have the fan running at all times When the climate control system is turned off the temperature in the display will also turn off Climate Control System Dual Temperature Control Your vehicle has four temperature control buttons two for the driver and two for the front passenger The driver s side and the passenger s side can be controlled independently by adjusting these buttons when the indicator in the DUAL button is lit Temperature Control Buttons To set the driver s side temperature to a different value than the passenger s press the DUAL button then press the temperature control buttons A or V on the driver s side To set the passenger s side to a different value than the driver s press the temperature control buttons A or V on the passenger s side You can adjust the passenger s side without pressing the DUAL button first Models without navigation system Models with navigation system DRIVER S SIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY DRIVER S SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS DUAL BUTTON U S model is shown 2011 RDX DRIVER S SIDE PASSENGER S TEMPERATURE SIDE DISPLAY TEMPERATURE DISPLAY PASSENGER S SIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY i FRONT REAR ENSA PASSENGER S SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS CONTINUED 169 soinjeoy Climate Control System When you set the temperature to its lower or
90. or if you can open the hood without lifting the handle the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated CONTINUED 355 SUIALI ag Service Station Procedures SUPPORT ROD CLIP 3 Holding the grip pull the support rod out of its clip Insert the end into the designated hole in the hood 356 To close the hood lift it up slightly to remove the support rod from the hole Put the support rod back into its holding clip Lower the hood to about a foot 30 cm above the fender then let it drop Make sure it is securely latched 2011 RDX Oil Check DIPSTICK Park the vehicle on a level surface Wait a few minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil 1 Remove the dipstick orange loop 2 Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel 3 Hold the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel and then insert it all the way back in its hole Service Station Procedures UP MARK Engine Coolant Check RESERVE TANK UPPER MARK LOWER MARK Make sure the UP mark on the loop is facing up when you insert the dipstick 4 Remove the dipstick again and check the level It should be between the upper and lower marks If it is near or below the lower mark see Adding Engine Oil on page 420 Look at the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank Make sure it is between the MAX and MIN lines If it is below the MIN line see Adding Engine Coolant on page 424
91. over the strongest bones in your upper body A WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving If the seat belt touches or crosses your neck or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder you need to adjust the seat belt anchor height 2011 RDX The front seats have adjustable seat belt anchors To adjust the height of an anchor press and hold the release button and slide the anchor up or down as needed it has four positions Protecting Adults and Teens Never place the shoulder portion of a lap shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back This could cause very serious injuries in a crash If a seat belt does not seem to work properly it may not protect the occupant in a crash No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt Using a seat belt that is not working properly can result in serious injury or death Have your dealer check the belt as soon as possible See page 20 for additional information about your seat belts and how to take care of them 6 Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints and put on their seat belts it is very important that they continue to sit upright well back in their seats with their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the engine is off Sitting improper
92. page 122 If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help CONTINUED 13 Jes Jesuesseg pur PAIA Protecting Adults and Teens AWARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible See page 134 for how to adjust the front seats 14 3 Adjust the Seat Backs Adjust the driver s seat back to a comfortable upright position leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel Passengers with adjustable seat backs should also adjust their seat back to a comfortable upright position 2011 RDX Reclining the seat back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash Adjust the seat back to an upright position and sit well back in the seat Reclining a seat back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured The farther a seat back is reclined the greater the risk of injury See page 134 for how to adjust the seat backs Protecting Adults and Teens 4 Adjust the Head Restraints Adjust the driver s he
93. place It can set on fire any combustible materials that come near it Park your vehicle away from high grass dry leaves or other flammables THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS A defective three way catalytic converter contributes to air pollution and can impair your engine s performance Follow these guidelines to protect your vehicle s three way catalytic converter e Always use unleaded gasoline Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals making the three way catalytic converter ineffective 2011 RDX e Keep the engine well maintained e Have your vehicle diagnosed and repaired if it is misfiring backfiring stalling or otherwise not running properly 489 uoneULIOyUy ey Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes If you take your vehicle for an emissions test shortly after the battery has been disconnected or gone dead it may not pass the test This is because of certain readiness codes that must be set in the on board diagnostics for the emissions systems These codes are erased when the battery is disconnected and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions 490 If the testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set you will be requested to return at a later date to complete the test If you must get the vehicle retested within the next two or three days you can condition the vehicle for retesting by
94. procedure 2011 RDX To exit KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU Multi Information Display Security Relock Timer If you unlock the doors and the tailgate with the remote transmitter but do not open any of the doors or the tailgate within 30 seconds the doors and the tailgate automatically relock and the security system sets You can change this relock time from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds wae la DOOR fe TUPI While DOOR SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU Press the INFO A V button until you see the above display 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZER eae aay K TIMER 1 fa F Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as shown above Select the relock time you want 30 60 or 90 seconds by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection CONTINUED 109 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display lt TIMER SETUP When your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU 110 SECURITY RELOCK TIMER SETTING INCOMPLETE If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen g
95. pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger s seat 2011 RDX e Moving the front seat forcibly back against cargo on the seat or floor behind it Hanging heavy items on the front passenger seat or placing heavy items in the seat back pocket Moving the front seat or seat back forcibly back against the folded rear seat Back seat passengers should not wedge objects or intentionally force their feet under the front passenger seat Also make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger s seat is properly positioned on the floor see page 438 If it is not the mat may interfere with the proper operation of the front passenger s seat and its sensors 29 Ayoyes Jesuesseg pur PAIA Additional Information About Your Airbags How Your Side Airbags Work If you ever have a moderate to severe side impact sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate either the driver s or the passenger s side airbag 30 Only one airbag will deploy during a side impact If the impact is on the passenger s side the passenger s side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger To get the best protection from the side airbags front seat occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats 2011 RDX Side Airbag Cutoff System Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff system designed primarily to protect a child riding in the front passeng
96. retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly much faster than a person can do it The electronic brake distribution EBD system which is part of the ABS also balances the front to rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading You should never pump the brake pedal Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm steady pressure on the brake pedal This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer 388 You will feel a pulsation in the brake pedal when the ABS activates and you may hear some noise This is normal it is the ABS rapidly pumping the brakes On dry pavement you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates However you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice 2011 RDX ABS Indicator S If this indicator comes on the anti lock function of the braking system has shut down The brakes still work like a conventional system but without anti lock You should have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible You will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 80 If the indicator comes on while driving test the brakes as instructed on page 467 Anti lock Brakes ABS If the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on together and the parking brake is fully released the EBD system may also be shut down Test your brakes
97. screen before you can check the information 2011 RDX Depending on the severity of the problem the message will let you know if you should see your dealer immediately or if you can wait a while CONTINUED 345 soinjeoy AcuraLink U S models only When you select the Diagnostic Info Reminder Message option if the HFL is connected to a cellular data service AcuraLink Emissions System P0117 Jun 30 07 gathers more information about the There may be a problem with the emissions system Select VOICE for problem and sends it to Acura Appt Dec 22 at 8 00am May 16 07 details at your next stop There the information is analyzed Appt iN eo i Brooklyn for Stop Reading call Your and returned to the vehicle with the oo Find Acura Dir A diagnostic Info most accurate repair information Voice a Call NOTE There may not be any Reschedule O additional information depending on Appointment Appointment the time elapsed since the previous time you retrieved the information from the Acura server You will see information from the onboard troubleshooting database You can then use message options to call your dealer for an appointment to find the nearest dealer or to find out more information about the issue 346 2011 RDX AcuraLink U S models only When you make an appointment through My Acura s online Schedule Service Appointment you can be reminded i
98. seating positions except the driver s have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat 50 1 With the child seat in the desired 2 To activate the lockable retractor slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops then let the belt feed back into the retractor 3 After the belt has retracted tug on it If the belt is locked you will not be able to pull it out If you can pull the belt out it is not locked and you will need to repeat these steps seating position route the belt through the child seat according to the seat maker s instructions then insert the latch plate into the buckle and remove any slack from the lap portion of the belt 2011 RDX Installing a Child Seat 4 After confirming that the belt is locked grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt Remember if the lap part of the belt is not tight the child seat will not be secure To remove slack it may help to put weight on the child seat or push on the back of the seat while pulling up on the belt 5 Push and pull the child seat forward and from side to side to verify that it is secure enough to stay upright during normal driving maneuvers If the child seat is not secure unlatch the belt allow it to retract fully then repeat these steps To deactivate the lockable retractor and remove a child seat u
99. selector to display the iPod menu Turn the knob on the interface dial to select a desired list 264 2011 RDX Playing an iPod Models with navigation system Artists 1 al 2 AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE Push ENTER on the selector to display the items on that list then turn the knob on the interface dial to select a desired list Pushing the selector up or down moves a selection to the top or bottom of the screen items Press ENTER to set your selection If you select ALL on either the artists or albums list all available files on the selected list are played Press the AUDIO button to go back to the normal audio playing display Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio control display 2011 RDX To Select Repeat or Random Mode armst Artist 1 Album 1 Track 01 WV AUDIO MENU Push down the selector You can select any type of repeat and random mode on the audio menu Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control display then push down the selector to display the audio menu Turn the knob on the interface dial to select an audio mode repeat album random and track random Press ENTER to set your selection CONTINUED 265 soinjeoy Playing an iPod Models with navigation system To cancel the selected mode press EN
100. shown above Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection CONTINUED 93 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display TRIP A amp AVG FUEL RESET with REFUEL When your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU 94 TRIP amp amp AVG FUEL RESET with REFUEL SETTING INCOMPLETE If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZE i dee AYG FUEL SEUA RESET with REFUEL es EXIT To exit TRIP A amp AVG FUEL RESET with REFUEL without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU Multi Information Display Elap Time Reset Condition There are three elapsed time reset choices you can make IGN RESET The elapsed time is reset when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK 0 position TRIP A The elapsed time is reset when Trip A is reset TRIP B The elapsed time is reset when Trip B is reset CUSTOMIZE 8 am rea ETUP AP TIME RESE TI DITION re While METER SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button The screen
101. system adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels to maintain the interior temperature you select On models with navigation system In AUTO mode the vehicle s interior temperature is independently regulated for the driver and passenger based on inputs from sunlight and temperature sensors see page 171 If one side of the vehicle is getting too much sun the system lowers the temperature only on that side 1 Press the AUTO button The indicator in the button comes on 2011 RDX 2 Set the desired temperature by pushing the driver s side temperature control buttons A or V The selected temperature will show in the display When you push the passenger s side temperature control buttons the indicator in the DUAL button comes on and the driver s side and passenger s side temperature can be controlled independently see page 169 The system automatically selects the proper mix of conditioned and or heated air that will as quickly as possible raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference CONTINUED 165 soinjeoy Climate Control System When you set the temperature to its lowest limit 1 or its highest limit H the system runs at full cooling or heating only It does not regulate the interior temperature In cold weather the fan will not come on automatically until the heater starts to develop warm air 166 Semi automatic Operation You can manually select various functions of
102. tank Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle s cooling system They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine components 425 ouUvUD UIP Windshield Washers Check the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir at least monthly during normal use WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR On U S models To check the windshield washer fluid level open the hood and look at the windshield washer reservoir located behind the left headlight You will see a 1 2 mark on the reservoir On Canadian models If the washer fluid is low a WASHER FLUID LOW message appears on the multi information display 426 2011 RDX Fill up to here Fill the reservoir with a good quality windshield washer fluid This increases the cleaning capability and prevents freezing in cold weather When you refill the reservoir clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid on a clean cloth This will help to condition the blade edges Windshield Washers Automatic Transmission Fluid NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar water solution in the windshield washer reservoir Antifreeze can damage your vehicle s paint while a vinegar water solution can damage the windshield washer pump Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid Automatic Transmission Fluid The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid whe
103. that work together to protect you and your passengers during a crash ae Some features do not require any 8 action on your part These include a A strong steel framework that forms a A safety cage around the passenger compartment front and rear crush 10 zones a collapsible steering column G and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash Y 11 However you and your passengers can t take full advantage of these ne Cage features unless you remain sitting in 5 7 1 1 2 Crush Zones the correct position and always wear 3 Seats and Seat Backs your seat belts In fact some safety 4 Head Restraints 5 Collapsible Steering Column features can contribute to injuries if gt 6 Seat Belts they are not used properly 7 Front Airbags P 8 Side Airbags The following pages explain how you Che Curtain Airbags can take an active role in protecting oor LOCKS 2 2 11 Front Seat Belt Tensioners yourself and your passengers 1 12 Occupant Position Detection System OPDS Sensor 2011 RDX Your Vehicle s Safety Features Seat Belts Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts in all seating positions Your seat belt system also includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts Why Wear Seat Belts Seat belts are the single most effective safety device for adults and larger children Infants and smaller children mu
104. the MAP button cancels the audio control display 2011 RDX To Select Repeat Random or Scan Mode FOLDER 1 Folder 01 TRACK 1 Track 01 Time 02 35 Jaa SKIP A FOLDER LI 1_ Track 01 1 2 IE Track 02 3 3 Track 03 x V AUDIO MENU You can select any type of repeat random and scan modes on the audio menu screen Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display Push down the selector on the interface dial to display the audio menu items Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models with navigation system FOLDER REPEAT USB FOLDER 1 Folder 01 TRACK 1 Track 01 TE 02 35 m vo 9 SCAN P 1 Track01 FOLDER FOLDER 2 Track 02 __Fvaack Repeat S Track 03 RANDOM I TRACK REPEAT SOUND Turn the knob on the interface dial to select a play mode folder random track random folder repeat track repeat Press ENTER to set your selection To cancel the selected mode push down the selector to display the audio menu on the audio control display Turn the knob on the interface dial to select the highlighted play mode then press ENTER to turn off that selected mode FOLDER REPEAT This feature replays all the files in the selected folder in the order they are stored Pressing either side of the CATEGORY bar also turns off this feature TRACK REPEAT This feature continu
105. the screen returns to press and hold the INFO A V CUSTOMIZE ENTRY button for more than 3 seconds i If you want to set the default settings press the INFO A V button to select DEFAULT ALL then press the SEL RESET button CONTINUED 85 2011 RDX sjonuop pue syuoumysuj Multi Information Display DEFAULT ALL FAILED If DEFAULT ALL is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY Repeat the procedure to select DEFAULT ALL 86 CUSTOMIZE NA ISTOM DEFAULT ALL If you want to cancel DEFAULT ALL select EXIT then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY 2011 RDX Change Settings You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to your preference Here are the settings you can customize e METER SETUP e LIGHTING SETUP e DOOR SETUP While CHG SETTING in the CUSTOMIZE ENTRY is shown on the multi information display press the SEL RESET button The screen changes to METER SETUP in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP Each time you press the INFO A V button the screen changes as shown on the next page Press the INFO A V button until you see the setup you want to customize then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection Multi Information Display oe gt Press and hold the INFO 4 button 3 seconds gt Press the SEL RESET button or the select reset knob gt P
106. the selector on the interface dial to the right to skip forward to the beginning of the next track file Push the selector left to skip backward to the beginning of the current track file Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track file 2011 RDX Playing Discs Models with navigation system In MP3 WMA mode FOLDER SELECTION To select a different folder press and release the B side of the TUNE FOLDER bar to move to the beginning of the next folder Press and release the lt 4 side of the bar to move to the beginning of the previous folder Using a Track List You can also select a track file in MP3 WMaA directly from the track list on the audio control display Press the AUDIO button to view the display then rotate the interface dial to the current disc Press ENTER on the selector to view the track list on the display The current disc is highlighted 2011 RDX CURRENT TRACK Select a track 1 01 aaa 2 02 bbb 3 3 03 ccc 4 04 ddd s 05 eee 6 06 fff To select a track rotate the interface dial or push up and down the selector on the interface dial Then press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection CONTINUED 247 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models with navigation system CURRENT FOLDER S In MP3 WMA mode You will see a list of the folder s on the current disc To select a folder
107. the temperature gauge comes down to the midpoint then continue driving 4 If the temperature gauge reading stays at the H Hot mark turn off the engine CONTINUED 463 pepedxouy op jo Surely If the Engine Overheats 5 Look for any obvious coolant leaks such as a split radiator hose Everything is still extremely hot so use caution If you find a leak it must be repaired before you continue driving see Emergency Towing on page 475 6 If you do not find an obvious leak check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank Add coolant if the level is below the MIN mark If there was no coolant in the reserve tank you may need to add coolant to the radiator Let the engine cool down until the reading reaches the middle of the temperature gauge or lower before checking the radiator R 464 A WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out seriously scalding you Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap Using gloves or a large heavy cloth turn the radiator cap counterclockwise without pushing down to the first stop After the pressure releases push down on the cap and turn it until it comes off 2011 RDX 9 Start the engine and set the temperature to maximum heat climate control to AUTO at at Add coolant to the radiator up to the base of the filler neck If you do no
108. the wing bolt is hard to loosen Then take the spare tire out of the cargo area CONTINUED 455 pepedxouy op jo ole Surely Changing a Flat Tire WING BOLT for normal tire TOOLS JACK on Remove the tools wing bolt and the jack To remove the jack turn the jack s end bracket counterclockwise to loosen it 456 WHEEL NUTS y WHEEL NUT WRENCH 6 Loosen the five wheel nuts 1 2 turn with the wheel nut wrench 2011 RDX JACKING POINT Place the jack under the jacking point nearest the tire you need to change Turn the end bracket clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point Make sure the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch Changing a Flat Tire 11 Put on the spare tire Put the wheel nuts back on finger tight then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub Do not try to tighten the wheel nuts fully 12 Lower the vehicle to the ground and remove the jack A EXTENSION BRAKE HUB WHEEL NUT WRENCH 8 Use the extension and the wheel 10 Before mounting the spare tire nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with ground a clean cloth Wipe the hub 9 Remove the wheel nuts then carefully it may be hot from remove the flat tire Handle the driving wheel nuts carefully they may be hot
109. this driving position for later use you must store it in the driving position memory 150 Parking Brake Push PARKING BRAKE PEDAL To apply the parking brake push the pedal down with your foot To release it push on the pedal again The parking brake indicator on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released see page 67 2011 RDX NOTICE Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes and axles A beeper will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake on You will also see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the the multiinformation display see page 79 Interior Lights Ceiling Lights Front DOOR ACTIVATED Each front and rear ceiling light has a three position switch Front ceiling lights In the position both front and rear ceiling lights are on all the time except when the rear ceiling light switch is in the OFF position In the position both front and rear ceiling lights are off all the time With the front ceiling lights switch in this position the rear ceiling light does not work and both front and rear ceiling lights do not come on when you open any door 2011 RDX Rear DOOR ACTIVATED Rear ceiling light You can use the rear ceiling light independently In the OFF position the light does not come on even if the front ceiling light switch is in the
110. turn off the ignition switch You have to turn it on again when you restart the vehicle warning lights if you need to park in a dangerous area near heavy traffic or if your vehicle is disabled 121 2011 RDX sjonuop pue suoumysuj Steering Wheel Adjustments Keys and Locks Steering Wheel Adjustments Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving A WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped m Push the lever under the steering column all the way down N Move the steering wheel up or down and in or out so it points toward your chest not toward your face Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators 122 LEVER 3 Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in position 4 Make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up down in and out 2011 RDX Keys and Locks KEY MASTER KEYS VALET KEY NUMBER WITH REMOTE Light Gray TAG TRANSMITTER The master key fits all the locks on your vehicle The valet key works only in the ignition and the door locks You can keep the glove box and console compartment locked when you leave your vehicle and the valet key at a parking facility Keys and Locks You should have received a key number tag
111. two more times for a total of 90 seconds 10 Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 30 minutes 491 2011 RDX uoneULIOyUy ey 492 2011 RDX Warranty and Client Relations 2011 RDX Client Service Information 494 Warranty Coverages ccsceceee 495 Reporting Safety Defects U S Vehicles sires 496 Authorized Manuals 0006 497 493 SUONEOY JUAN pue uere Client Service Information Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals They should be able to answer all your questions If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction please discuss it with the dealership s management The service manager or general manager can help Almost all problems are solved in this way If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership s management contact Acura Client Services U S Owners American Honda Motor Co Inc Acura Client Services Mail Stop 500 2N 7E 1919 Torrance Blvd Torrance CA 90501 2746 Tel 800 382 2238 494 Canadian Owners Acura Client Services Honda Canada Inc Visit www acura ca for contact information Tel 1 888 9 ACURA 9 Fax 1 877 939 0909 In Puerto Rico and the U S Virgin Islands Vortex Motor Corp Bella International P O Box 190816 San Juan PR 00919 0816 Tel 787 620 7546 2011 RDX When you call or write please give us this information e V
112. weccececceseeseeees 10 24 Shift Lever Position Parking seseissessiesisresisreiieteriss 150 Air Conditioning System 164 ING Cat OLS sorres 376 System Design ccccceeseeees 387 SAGE oie teeta tetas e 165 Shift Lever Positions 377 System Indicator Amber 468 Air Pressure Tires o n 444 445 Shift Lock Release 06 319 System Indicator Red 467 Alcohol in Gasoline ccccceseeeees 352 Auxiliary Input Jack 0 291 Wear Indicators oc 387 Antifreeze cccsesscecesstseeseseeees 424 Braking System c cccceseseeeees 387 Anti lock Brakes ABS B Break in New Vehicle 352 Indicatif sensasine 66 388 Brightness Control Operation erorien 388 Battery Instruments siie iniiisiiteisosta 120 Anti theft Audio System 292 Charging System Anti theft Steering Column Indicator 65 465 E e E E E E E 125 a Jump Starting oc eeeeseceee 461 CONTINUED l 2011 RDX Index Bulb Replacement CD Care ss ssciecsssceteadiscteiontvicsones 257 Tether Anchorage Points 51 Back up Lights ccceeseeees 433 Ceiling Lights cccceessseeeees 151 Cleaning the Seat Belts 438 Brake Lights ccssccceesseees 433 Certification Label c000 478 Client Service Information 494 Fog Lights ccceccsssseeceerseees 435 Chains Tires cccsscceesseeeeees 449 Climate
113. with Pod 5th Ver 1 2 or more generation iPod nano Ver 1 2 or more iPod nano 2nd generation Ver 1 1 2 or more iPod nano 3rd generation Ver 1 0 or more oe ae Ver 1 0 2 or more generation iPod touch Ver 1 1 1 or more iPod touch Ver 2 1 1 or more 2nd generation iPhone Ver 2 1 0 or more iPhone 3G Ver 2 1 0 or more 2011 RDX Use only compatible iPods with the latest software iPods that are not compatible will not work in this audio unit NOTE Do not connect your iPod using a hub Do not keep the iPod in the vehicle Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector We recommend backing up your data before playing it Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter if this is the case use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device Playing an iPod Models with navigation system Connecting an iPod If the iPod indicator does not appear USB ADAPTER CABLE in the audio display check the z connections and try to reconnect the iPod a few times If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod the iPod may need to be reset Follow the instructions that came with your iPod or you can find reset instructions online at DOCK CONNECTOR www apple com ipod 2 Connect your dock connector to The current file numbe
114. without navigation system To Play the Radio The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY 1 or the ON dD position Turn the system on by pushing the PWR VOL knob or the AM or FM button Adjust the volume by turning the PWR VOL knob The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to is displayed To change bands press the AM or FM button On the FM band ST will be shown on the center display if the station is broadcasting in stereo Stereo reproduction on AM is not available XM Radio information is available on page 179 174 STEREO A SEL INDICATOR INDICATOR SCAN INDICATOR 753 mw te TEMP C FM BUTTON AM BUTTON A SEL RDM BUTTON SCAN BUTTON SEEK SKIP BAR TUNE FOLDER BAR SEEKISKIP CATEGORY OR SY PRESET BARS U S model is shown 2011 RDX Playing the FM AM Radio Models without navigation system To Select a Station You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band tune seek scan the preset bars and auto select TUNE Use the TUNE FOLDER bar to tune the radio to a desired frequency Press the B side of the bar to tune to a higher frequency and the lt a side of the bar to tune to a lower frequency If you press and hold the lt 4 or BR side of the bar the frequency will begin to change rapidly It will stop when you release it SEEK The SEEK function searches up and down
115. you using a properly coded e Do you have fuel Check the fuel In this case the starter motor s speed key An improperly coded key will gauge the low fuel indicator may sounds normal or even faster than cause the immobilizer system not be working normal when you turn the ignition indicator in the instrument panel A switch to the START IID position to blink rapidly see page 124 e There may be an electrical but the engine does not run s Are you using the proper starting procedure Refer to Starting the Engine on page 374 460 2011 RDX problem such as no power to the fuel pump Check all the fuses see page 470 If you find nothing wrong you will need a qualified technician to find the problem See Emergency Towing on page 475 Jump Starting Although this seems like a simple procedure you should take several precautions AWARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure seriously injuring anyone nearby Keep all sparks open flames and smoking materials away from the battery You cannot start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it To Jump Start Your Vehicle 1 Open the hood and check the physical condition of the battery In very cold weather check the condition of the electrolyte If it seems slushy or frozen do not try jump starting until it thaws NOTICE If a battery sits in extreme cold the electrolyte inside can freeze Attempting to jump sta
116. your vehicle checked by a qualified technician On models without navigation system When the audio system is disabled the clock setting in the audio system will be canceled You will need to reset the clock see page 293 2011 RDX On models with navigation system If the navigation system fuse is removed the navigation system will disable itself The next time you turn on the ignition switch the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used Refer to the navigation system manual Fuse Locations No Amps Circuits Protected 18 20A Headlight High Main 19 20A Small Lights Main 20 7 5A TPMS 21 30A Headlight Low Main 22 Not Used 23 75A Starter Diagnosis 24 20A Moonroof 25 20A Door Lock 26 20A Driver s Power Window 27 in Not Used 28 15A Accessory Socket Console Compartment 29 15A Accessory Socket Front 30 20A Passenger s Power Window 31 20A Radio Amplifier 32 20A Right Rear Power Window 33 20A Left Rear Power Window 34 Not Used 35 7 5A Radio 36 10A HAC 37 7 5A Daytime Running Light 38 30A FR Wiper 39 7 5A SIS INTERIOR FUSE BOX HEGKEHRO HEY No Amps Circuits Protected No Amps Circuits Protected 1 75A Power Window SH AWD 9 7 5 A OPDS 2 20A Fuel Pump 10 7 5 A Meter 3 15A ACG 11 10A SRS 4 7 5 A ABS VSA 12 10A Right Headlight High 5 15A Heated Seat 13 10A Lef
117. 2011 RDX Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties Please read the 2011 Acura warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages Your vehicle s original tires are covered by their manufacturer Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet Canadian Owners Please refer to the 2011 warranty manual that came with your vehicle 495 SUONESY JUST pue uere Reporting Safety Defects U S Vehicles If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co Inc 496 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or American Honda Motor Co Inc 2011 RDX To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 go to Attp www satercar gov
118. 348 CEILING CONSOLE USB ADAPTER CABLE ACCESSORY POWER P 199 207 263 274 SOCKET P 157 1 On models without navigation system 2 On models with navigation system 3 HomeLink buttons P 303 Moonroof Switch P 144 Front Ceiling Light Switch P 151 2011 RDX MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON P 146 PASSENGER S FRONT AIRBAG P 10 26 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM P 164 POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH P 126 POWER WINDOW SWITCH P 142 AUDIO SYSTEM P 216 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION P 376 CONTINUED 3 IIWJY L W AMPA MOA Your Vehicle at a Glance HAZARD WARNING BUTTON NAVIGATION SYSTEM HEADLIGHTS TURN PADDLE SHIFTERS WINDSHIELD UPPER DISPLAY SIGNAL FOG LIGHTS _ P 380 WIPERS WASHERS P 173 P 121 P 116 119 REAR WINDOW WIPER WASHER P 114 115 REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS P 289 VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST VSA OFF SWITC P 396 MIRROR CONTROLS P 146 VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK BUTTONS P 306 STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT HORN P 122 MULTI INFORMATION CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS P 74 BUTTONS P 300 Vehicle with navigation system is shown 1 To use the horn press the center pad of the steering wheel 2 On models without navigation system CENTER DISPLAY
119. 466 Flat Tire Changing a 455 Tighten Fuel Cap c000 354 Oil Life Indicator 606 411 Floor Mats uu eeeesssecesreeesees 438 Fuel Economy ccescceereeeeeees 358 Oil Pressure Indicator 65 465 Fluids Fuses Checking the 470 Overheating cccseecesseeeees 463 Automatic Transmission 427 Specifications sisses 480 Brake g scctsseitcnstenkinkenns 429 Speed Limiter sessesesseessseeese 378 Locat 62 ccsiescenscssessdesvereseesseses 419 SLANG oee e etter t eee sesee ete 374 Power Steering cssccceesseees 430 x 5 Engine Coolant c cccceeeeeeee 424 Windshield Washer 5 426 eee Improving s es pes Engine Number c sccee 479 FM AM Radio Reception 287 L w Fuel Indicat or E 68 Ethanol in Gasoline 008 352 Fog Lights ccecsssseecessseeeees 119 Octane Redute nt E 352 Evaporative Emissions Folding the Rear Seats Down 138 Tank Refislin MO fee 353 Conil S cc cisccstcens neessectistea bees 487 Four way Flashers c ceeee 121 Gas St Mion Pro dures ee 353 Exhaust Emissions Controls 488 Front Airbags cccccecceeeees 10 26 Gares Exhaust Fumes cccsceceeesees 57 Front Door Pockets 66 155 Pe 73 Expectant Mothers Use of Seat Front Seat Sjee dom eter E A 73 Belts Dy sirsisicssierirredisiiateras 18 Heaters eess
120. 467 time there isa problem in the brake the parking brake not fully system ae the sae vacuum pump is happens have your RE can damage the brakes vehicle checked by your dealer For more information see page 468 If you drive without releasing the parking brake a beeper will sound a a R aa and you will also see a RELEASE infi ton di a 79 PARKING BRAKE message on the information display see page 79 multiinformation display see page 79 CONTINUED 67 2011 RDX Instrument Panel Indicators Low Fuel Indicator A You will also see a FUEL LOW message on the multi information display see page 80 NOTICE Avoid driving with an extremely low C fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter U p LOW FUEL This indicator comes on as a reminder that you must refuel soon When the indicator comes on there are about 2 5 U S gal 9 5 L of fuel remaining in the tank When the needle reaches E there is avery small amount of fuel in the tank 68 2011 RDX VSA Vehicle Stability Assist VSA System Indicator This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position If it comes on and stays on at any other time or it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON II position there is a problem with the VSA system You will also see a CHEC
121. A driver s seat position sensor that monitors the distance of the seat from the front airbag If the seat is too far forward the airbag will inflate with less force see page 28 2011 RDX Weight sensors that monitor the weight on the front passenger s seat If the weight is about 65 Ibs 29 kg or less the weight of an infant or small child the passenger s front airbag will be turned off see page 28 A rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags see page 31 A sophisticated electronic system that continually monitors and records information about the sensors the control unit the airbag activators the seat belt tensioners and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in the ON ID position CONTINUED 25 Ayoyes Josuesse g pur PAIA Additional Information About Your Airbags e An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system components see page 32 How Your Front Airbags Work e An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the passenger s side airbag has been turned off see page 32 e An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the passenger s front airbag has been turned off see page 33 e Emergency backup power in case your vehicle s electrical system is disconnected in a crash If you ever have a mode
122. ASEL RDM button A SEL will flash on the center display and the system will go into scan mode for several seconds It stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset bars 1 6 You will see 0 displayed if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset bar 176 If you do not like the stations auto select has stored you can store other frequencies on the preset bars To turn off auto select press the A SEL RDM button This restores the presets you originally set 2011 RDX Radio Frequencies and Reception For information on AM FM radiofrequencies and reception see page 287 Adjusting the Sound For information see page 177 Playing the FM AM Radio Models without navigation system Adjusting the Sound Press the SOUND CLOCK button repeatedly to display the BASS TREBLE FADER BALANCE SUBWOOFER and SVC speed sensitive volume compensation settings Each mode is shown on the center display as it changes Turn the PWR VOL knob to adjust the setting to your liking When the level reaches the center you will see on the center display The System will automatically return the display to the selected audio mode about 10 seconds after you stop adjusting a mode ADJUSTMENT MODE U S model is shown Treble Bass Use the TREBLE BASS modes to adjust the tone to your liking You can adjust each mode in levels between 6 and 6 Bala
123. ATCH a LATCH compatible child seat can be installed using a seat belt 2011 RDX Whatever type of seat you choose to provide proper protection a child seat should meet three requirements 1 The child seat should meet Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box The child seat should be of the proper type and size to fit the child Rear facing for infants forward facing for small children The child seat should fit the vehicle seating position or positions where it will be used N po Before purchasing a conventional child seat or using a previously purchased one we recommend that you test the seat in the specific vehicle seating position or positions where the seat will be used Installing a Child Seat After selecting a proper child seat and a good place to install the seat there are three main steps in installing the seat 1 Properly secure the child seat to the vehicle All child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap shoulder belt or with the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system A child whose seat is not properly secured to the vehicle can be endangered in a crash 2 Make sure the child seat is firmly secured After installing a child seat push and pull the seat forward and from side to side to verify that it is secure A child seat secured with a seat bel
124. Annual Fuel Cost Represents a combination of city and Provides an estimated annual fuel highway driving The scale cost based on 15 000 miles 20 000 represents the range of combined km per year multiplied by the cost fuel economy for other vehicles in per gallon based on EPA fuel cost the class data divided by the combined fuel economy For more information on fuel economy ratings and factors that affect fuel economy visit www fueleconomy gov Canada Visit www vehicles gc ca 2011 RDX Fuel Economy Fuel Economy Factors The following factors can lower your vehicle s fuel economy e Aggressive driving hard acceleration and braking Excessive idling accelerating and braking in stop and go traffic Cold engine operation engines are more efficient when warmed up Driving with a heavy load or the air conditioner running Improperly inflated tires Improving Fuel Economy Vehicle Maintenance A properly maintained vehicle maximizes fuel economy Poor maintenance can significantly reduce fuel economy Always maintain your vehicle according to the maintenance messages displayed on the information display see Owner s Maintenance Checks on page 417 For example e Use the required engine oil see page 420 e Maintain proper tire inflation An underinflated tire increases rolling resistance which reduces fuel economy e Avoid carrying excess weight in your vehicle It puts a heavier
125. DER BAR H u a POW VOL KNOB U S model is shown 204 2011 RDX Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models without navigation system To Play a USB Flash Memory Device This audio system can operate the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the in dash disc changer To play a USB flash memory device connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment then press the CD AUX button The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY 1 or ON ID position The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3 WMA or AAC formats Depending on the format the display shows MP3 WMA or AAC when a USB flash memory device is playing The USB flash memory device limit is up to 700 folders or up to 65535 files x Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit 2011 RDX The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 MB or higher and formatted with the FAT file system Some digital audio players may be compatible as well Some USB flash memory devices such as devices with security lock out features etc will not work in this audio unit CONTINUED 205 soinjeoy Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models without navigation system NOTE e Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as the device or your files may be damaged Do not connect your USB flash memory device us
126. Impact Sensors 10 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator 11 Side Impact Sensors First 12 Occupant Position Detection System OPDS Sensors 13 Front Passenger s Weight Sensors OPDS Sensors Control Unit 14 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Indicator 15 Rollover Sensor 16 Side Impact Sensors Second 24 2011 RDX Additional Information About Your Airbags Your airbag system includes Two SRS supplemental restraint system front airbags The driver s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel the front passenger s airbag is stored in the dashboard Both are marked SRS AIRBAG see page 26 Two side airbags one for the driver and one for a front passenger The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat backs Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG see page 30 Two side curtain airbags one for each side of the vehicle The airbags are stored in the ceiling above the side windows The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG see page 31 Automatic front seat belt tensioners see page 22 Sensors that can detect a moderate to severe front impact side impact or rollover Sensors that can detect whether a child is in the passenger s side airbag path and signal the control unit to turn the airbag off see page 30 Sensors that can detect whether the driver s seat belt and the front passenger s seat belt are latched or unlatched see page 20
127. In this case select third second or first gear with the paddle shifter depending on the vehicle speeds and road condition Do not use fourth and fifth gears The recommended speed range for each gear position is shown in the table Gear position Speed range 1 0 38 mph 0 60 km h 2 3 19 62 mph 30 100 km h 2011 RDX Making Turns and Braking Make turns more slowly and wider than normal The trailer tracks a smaller arc than your vehicle and it can hit or run over something the vehicle misses Allow more time and distance for braking Do not brake or turn suddenly as this could cause the trailer to jackknife or turn over CONTINUED 403 Sunq Towing a Trailer Driving on Hills When climbing hills closely watch your temperature gauge see page 78 If it nears the H Hot mark turn the A C off reduce speed and if necessary pull to the side of the road to let the engine cool When driving down hills reduce your speed and shift down to S position or use the paddle shifters to the lower gear 8 2 or 1 in the S position When towing a trailer do not ride the brakes and remember it will take longer to slow down and stop when towing a trailer If you must stop when facing uphill use the foot brake or parking brake Do not try to hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator as this can cause the automatic transmission to overheat 404 Handli
128. Introduction Congratulations Your selection of a 2011 Acura RDX was a wise investment It will give you years of driving pleasure One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read this manual In it you will learn how to operate its driving controls and convenience items Afterwards keep this owner s manual in your vehicle so you can refer to it at any time Several warranties protect your new vehicle Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance Minder shown in the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble free while it preserves your investment When your vehicle needs maintenance keep in mind that your dealer s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns 2011 RDX As you read this manual you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle other property or the environment Introduction California Proposition 65 Warning WARNING This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with
129. K VSA SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 80 Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked Without VSA your vehicle still has normal driving ability but will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement For more information see page 395 Instrument Panel Indicators VSA Activation Indicator A This indicator has three functions 1 It comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the vehicle stability assist VSA system It flashes when VSA is active see page 395 It comes on along with the VSA system indicator if there is a problem with the VSA system You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 80 N Se This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position For more information see page 395 Cruise Main Indicator This indicator comes on when you turn on the cruise control system by pressing the CRUISE button see page 300 CRUISE CONTROL This indicator comes on when you set the cruise control See page 300 for information on operating the cruise control Cruise Control Indicator High Beam Indicator This indicator comes on with the high beam headlights For more information see page 117 This indicator also comes on with reduced brightness when the daytime running lights DRL are on see page 119 2011
130. N ID position If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer reset the Maintenance Minder as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON dD position 2 Press the SEL RESET button on the steering wheel until you see the engine oil life display 2011 RDX OIL LIFE RESET RESET SERVICE DIL LIFE 5 Qo Press and hold the SEL RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 10 seconds The remaining engine oil life reset mode will be shown on the multi information display CONTINUED 415 IIULUJQJUIE N Maintenance Minder INST MPG O 20 40 HTT OIL LIFE 100 4 Select RESET by pressing the INFO W A button then press the SEL RESET button to reset the engine oil life display The maintenance item code s will disappear and the engine oil life will reset to 100 If you want to cancel the oil life reset mode select CANCEL 416 Important Maintenance Precautions If you have the required service done but do not reset the display or reset the display without doing the service the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals This can lead to serious mechanical problems because you will no longer have an accurate record of when maintenance is needed 2011 RDX Your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best and can provide competent efficient service However service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in e
131. NG 2011 RDX If you want the settings as they were when the vehicle left the factory select DEFAULT ALL as described on page 85 If you want to change any vehicle control settings select CHG SETTING then press the SEL RESET button see page 86 Refer to the table on the following pages about the settings you want to customize Multi Information Display Customize Entry Customize Group Customize Menu Description Customize Setup Page CHG SETTING METER SETUP LANGUAGE SELECTION Changes the language used in the display ENGLISH P 86 88 FRENCH 89 SPANISH ADJUST OUTSIDE Changes the outside temperature reading P 20 F SF TEMP DISPLAY above or below its current reading 3 C 40 C 3 C 91 TRIP A amp AVG FUEL Causes trip meter A and the average fuel ON 93 RESET with REFUEL economy to reset when you refuel OFF ELAP TIME RESET Resets the elapsed time of your current trip IGN RESET CONDITION TRIP A RESET 95 TRIP B RESET LIGHTING SETUP INTERIOR LIGHT Changes how long in seconds the interior 15 sec P 97 DIMMING TIME lights stay on after you close the doors 30 sec 98 60 sec HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF Changes how long in seconds the exterior 0 sec TIMER lights stay on after you close the driver s 15 sec door 100 30 sec 60 sec DOOR SETUP AUTO DOOR LOCK Changes when the system automatically SHIFT FROM P P 102 loc
132. ON Ignition Key Position 125 Outside Mirrors ccscceeeees 146 Outside Temperature 0 76 Overheating Engine 463 Owner s Maintenance Checks 417 Oxygenated Fuels cccceees 392 P Panel Brightness Control 120 Park Gear Position 0000 377 Parking fc3 se cv ase cctasstes nis 386 Parking Brake ccssccceesseeeeees 150 Parking Brake and Brake System INGiCAtOrssieeieessseeasedecdevbeseeess 467 Parking Lights cccccessseeeeees 116 Parking Over Things that BU e eat 386 489 2011 RDX Passenger Airbag Off Indicator 33 PGM FI System cceeeseeeseeeees 488 Playing an iPod 197 260 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Fen eenn 204 270 Playing Disc siosesrisesicnssiinarsi inita 185 Playing the FM AM RAGIO er 174 217 Playing the XM Radio 179 228 Pollen Filter ccccssccceesseeeeees 439 Power Door Locks 0s000e 126 Power Seat Adjustments 134 Power Socket Locations 157 Power Steering Fluid 430 Power Windows ssccccsssseeeees 142 Pregnancy Using Seat Belts 18 Preparing to Drive cc ce 373 Proper Seat Belt Usage 04 15 Protecting Adults and Teens 12 Additional Safety Precautions 19 Advice for Pregnant Women 18 CONTINUED Vil Index Protecting Children
133. OR 7 Attach the tether strap hook to the tether anchor then tighten the strap as instructed by the child seat maker 8 Push and pull the child seat forward and from side to side to verify that it is secure 48 Using the Center LATCH CENTER LOWER ANCHORS ZY To install a LATCH compatible child seat in the rear center seating position use the center lower anchors as shown above Remove the head restraint see page 136 Make sure the removed head restraint is secured in the cargo area Reinstall the head restraint when the child seat is removed 2011 RDX Follow step 1 through 8 as described previously to secure the child seat When you install the child seat in the rear center seating position you cannot use the seat belt behind the driver s seat Installing a Child Seat Do not attach two child seat connectors to a single lower anchor at a time The LATCH system or the child seats might be damaged if you try to install three child seats in the rear seats If you want to install two child seats in the back seats place each child seat in the outer seat as shown in the above illustration 2011 RDX 49 Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAIA Installing a Child Seat Installing a Child Seat with a Lap Shoulder Belt When not using the LATCH system all child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap shoulder belt In addition the lap shoulder belts in all
134. OSITION SENSOR The driver s advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor under the seat If the seat is too far forward the airbag will inflate with less force regardless of the severity of the impact If there is a problem with the sensor the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag will inflate in the normal manner regardless of the driver s seating position Additional Information About Your Airbags PASSENGER S SEAT WEIGHT x SENSORS The passenger s advanced front airbag system has weight sensors under the seat Although Acura does not encourage carrying an infant or small child in front if the sensors detect the weight of an infant or small child up to about 65 Ibs or 29 kg the system will automatically turn the passenger s front airbag off Be aware that objects placed on the passenger s seat can also cause the airbag to be turned off When the passenger airbag gets turned off by the weight sensors a passenger airbag off indicator in the center of the dashboard comes on see page 33 If the weight sensors detect there is no passenger in the front seat the airbag is automatically turned off However the passenger airbag off indicator in this situation will not come on To ensure that the passenger s advanced front airbag system will work properly do not do anything that would increase or decrease the weight on the front passenger s seat This includes e Arear passenger
135. Playing Discs Models with navigation system RANDOM INDICATOR DIST FOLDER RANDOM Ti TRACK RANDOM ICON You will see RANDOM next to the TRACK FILE icon on the audio display To turn off this feature select TRACK RANDOM then press ENTER again 252 In MP3 WMA mode FOLDER RANDOM This feature plays the files within a folder in random order rather than in the order they are compressed in MP3 To activate folder random play press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display then push down the selector on the interface dial Rotate the interface dial to select the FOLDER RANDOM Press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection 2011 RDX FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR REPEAT FOLDER RANDOM ICON You will see FOLDER RANDOM on the audio control display To turn off this feature select FOLDER RANDOM then press ENTER again Playing Discs Models with navigation system Playing a DVD A Disc You can play a DVD A disc in the CD changer The disc controls are same as previously described To Pause a Disc To pause a disc press the preset button which corresponds to the current disc To play the disc again press the preset button again To Stop Playing a Disc If you turn the system off while a disc is playing either with the PWR VOL knob or by turning off the ignition
136. RDM button or SCAN button REPEAT This feature continuously plays a file To activate the repeat feature press the RPT button You will see RPT in the center display To turn it off press and hold the RPT button Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models without navigation system FOLDER REPEAT This feature replays all the files in the selected folder in the order they are stored To activate the folder repeat feature press the RPT button repeatedly You will see F RPT in the center display To turn it off press and hold the RPT button Each time you press and release the RPT button the mode changes from file repeat to folder repeat then to normal play FOLDER RANDOM This feature plays the files in the selected folder in random order To activate the folder random feature press the A SEL RDM button You will see F RDM in the center display To turn it off press and hold the A SEL RDM button RANDOM This feature plays all the files in random order To activate the track random feature press the A SEL RDM button repeatedly You will see RDM in the center display To turn it off press and hold the A SEL RDM button Each time you press and release the A SEL RDM button the mode changes folder random to random play then to normal play 2011 RDX SCAN This feature samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored To activate the scan feature press th
137. RDX le Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators The left or right turn signal indicator blinks when you signal a lane change or turn If an indicator does not blink or blinks rapidly it usually means one of the turn signal bulbs is burned out see pages 432 and 434 Replace the bulb as soon as possible since other drivers cannot see that you are signaling When you press the hazard warning button both turn signal indicators and all turn signals on the outside of the vehicle flash CONTINUED 69 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Instrument Panel Indicators Security System Indicator oe gt SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR P This indicator comes on when the security system is set For more information see page 294 70 Lights On Indicator This indicator reminds you that the exterior lights are on It comes on when the light switch is in either the 00 or ED position If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY M or the LOCK 0 position without turning off the light switch this indicator will remain on A reminder chime will also sound when you open the driver s door and remove the key from the ignition switch 40 Fog Light Indicator This indicator comes on when you turn on the fog lights For more information see page 119 2011 RDX i Super Handling All SH AWD Wheel Drive SH AWD Indicator On SH AWD models This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn
138. Rearview Camera Guide Line SCREEN DISPLAY lt t 1st line 2nd line 3rd line lt gt ____ 4th line 2011 RDX The camera display has parking guide lines that indicate distance from your vehicle 1st Line 24in 0 6m 2nd Line 39in 1m 3rd Line 79in 2m 4th Line 118in 8m NOTE e The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer than they actually are e The rearview camera display has a limited coverage and the size and position of objects may appear different than they actually are Make sure to check the surrounding area carefully To turn the guide line on and off hold the power button for more than 3 seconds when the shift is in reverse the on off setting will be kept when you change gear and return to reverse 349 soinjeoy 350 2011 RDX Before Driving Before you begin driving your vehicle you should know what gasoline to use and how to check the levels of important fluids You also need to know how to properly store luggage or packages The information in this section will help you If you plan to add any accessories to your vehicle please read the information in this section first 2011 RDX Break in Period ccccccccceeeeeee 352 Fuel Recommendation 352 Service Station Procedures 353 Refueling cecccsssscesceseeeees 353 Tighten Fuel Cap Message 354 Opening and Closin
139. TER again while the highlighted mode is selected on the audio control display anmist Artist 1 E aeu Album 1 Track AAAA mvo 9 A RANDOM Q aE 2 BBBB TRACK 3 CCGC RANDOM REPEAT SOUND E 1 AAAA ALBUM REPEAT This feature continuously plays a file To turn it off press ENTER again Pressing either side of the SKIP bar changes the file while keeping the repeat feature 266 2011 RDX TRACK RANDOM This feature plays all available files from the selected items in the iPod menu list playlists artists albums or songs in random order You will see TRACK RANDOM on the screen To turn it off have this mode highlighted and press ENTER again Playing an iPod Models with navigation system To turn it off have this mode highlighted and press ENTER again aE You can also select another list from esse raat 1 the iPod menu while keeping the TRACK AAAA wid random function A A 1 1 AAAA EEA NOTE i E EA Available operating function varies T Fan on models or versions Some functions may not be available on the vehicle s audio system REPEAT ALBUM RANDOM This feature plays all available albums from the selected items in the iPod menu list playlists artists albums or songs in random order The files in each album are played in the recorded order You will see ALBUM RANDOM on the scree
140. TINUED 445 IDULUJQJUIE IN Tires INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS LEE TREAD WEAR INDICATORS Your tires have wear indicators molded into the tread When the tread wears down you will see a 1 2 inch 12 7 mm wide band across the tread This shows there is less than 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread left on the tire A tire this worn gives very little traction on wet roads You should replace the tire if you can see three or more tread wear indicators 446 Tire Service Life The service life of your tires is dependent on many factors including but not limited to driving habits road conditions vehicle loading inflation pressure maintenance history speed and environmental conditions even when the tires are not in use In addition to your regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old It is also recommended that all tires including the spare be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture regardless of their condition or state of wear The last four digits of the TIN tire identification number are found on the sidewall of the tire and indicate the date of manufacture See Tire Labeling on page 484 2011 RDX Tire Maintenance In addition to proper inflation correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear If you find a tire is worn unevenly have your dealer check the whe
141. The See Tire And Loading Information stability and cause a crash in combined weight of occupants and label attached to the driver s which you can be hurt or killed cargo should never exceed XXX kg doorjamb or XXX lbs on your vehicle s Label Example Follow all load limits and other plagar loading guidelines in this 2 Determine the combined weight of FE AND CORD NG WEGRIRTON manual the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle SEATING CAPACITY i TOTAL X FRONT X REAR x weight occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXXIbs 3 Subtract the combined weight of CLT TE TST SEE OWNER S the driver and passengers from TERR OORO BERK ARRAS ADDITION XXX kg or XXX lbs SPARE XXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXKPA XXPS1 NOMAT ION 4 The resulting figure equals the ilabl tof d This figure includes the total weight U epr e ia of all occupants cargo and example if the XXX amount accessories and the tongue load if equals 1 400 lbs and there will be you are towing a trailer five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1 400 750 5 X 150 650 Ibs CONTINUED 365 2011 RDX SUIALI 0g Carrying Cargo 5 Determine the combined weight of Max Load Passenger Weight Cargo Weight luggage and cargo being loaded on p a wa the vehicle That weight may not aT AS s ca safely exceed the available cargo Example 1 O
142. The following shift points are recommended Shift up Normal acceleration 1st to 2nd 15 mph 24 km h 2nd to 3rd 25mph 40 km h 3rd to 4th 40 mph 64 km h 4th to 5th 47 mph 76 km h 384 Super Handling All Wheel Drive SH AWD System If equipped The super handling all wheel drive SH AWD system is a full time all wheel drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amounts of engine torque to all wheels independently according to the driving conditions While the SH AWD system helps to enhance the vehicle s driving stability in all situations it is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety 2011 RDX SH AWD Torque Distribution Monitor TORQUE INDICATOR a omy LF maa r i ne IRF HAW LRI 11 m Hk n IRR f l TORQUE INDICATOR The SH AWD torque distribution monitor on the multi information display shows you the amount of torque being sent to the wheels Each wheel right front RF left front LF right rear RR and left rear LR has its own torque indicator Super Handling All Wheel Drive SH AWD System Each torque indicator is displayed as a bar graph divided into 5 segments The number of segments represents the amount of torque distributed to each wheel When there is only a slight change in torque distribution while driving such as cruising on level roa
143. X 2 Razr_v3 Oct 25 2006 mm ow 5 f 3660 May 22 2006 6 J My Phone June 5 2006 3 K700i Juan 24 2006 4 Lisa s Cell Jan 12 2006 o IMPORTED IMPORTED DATE PHONEBOOK Select Search Imported Phonebook and a list of imported phonebooks will be displayed Select a phonebook from the list 324 Enter PIN If the phonebook is PIN protected you will need to enter the 4 digit PIN 2011 RDX Push up the interface selector to show a list Enter keyword for a name A ust 1234567890 1 8 lt gt 0 To search for a specific name in the phonebook enter the keyword for either the first or last name To display all names in the phonebook select the List option Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Select a person from the list Up to three category icons are displayed in the left side of the list aff a Preference Home Cell phone Ea es H fed E 2011 Work Pager Fax Voice Other RDX These category icons indicate how many numbers are stored for the name If a name has more than three category icons is displayed Select the person s number you want to call and press the HFL Talk button CONTINUED 325 soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Delete Imported Phonebook You can delete any imported phonebook Select Delete Imported P
144. Y rf and luggage load capacity 870 Ibs 150 Ibs x 2 300 Ibs 570 Ibs calculated in Step 4 395 kg 68 kg x 2 136 kg 259 kg 6 If your vehicle will be towing a Max Load Passenger Weight Cargo Weight trailer load from your trailer will LLION F a be transferred to your vehicle 2 ene ca Consult this manual to determine Example 2 ae ii 2 150 Ib al fa s iibs 270 Ibs how this reduces the available gt SATT s cargo and luggage load capacity of 395 kg 68 kg x 4 272 kg 123 kg your vehicle Max Load Passenger Weight Cargo Weight LA gt an Example 3 i a 870 Ibs 150 Ibs x 5 750 Ibs 120 Ibs 395 kg 68 kg x 5 340 kg 55 kg 366 In addition the total weight of the vehicle all occupants accessories cargo and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Both are on a label on the driver s doorjamb 2011 RDX Carrying Cargo Carrying Cargo in the Passenger Compartment e Store or secure all items that could be thrown around and hurt someone during a crash e Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll underneath and interfere with the proper operation of the seats the sensors under the seats or the driver s ability to operate the pedals e If you fold the rear seats down tie down items that could be thrown about the vehicle during a crash or sudden stop Also ke
145. a channel 1 Press the xm button Either XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the center display 2 Use the tune seek or scan function to tune to a desired channel In category mode only channels within that category can be selected In channel mode all channels can be selected 2011 RDX 3 Pick a preset number for the channel you want to store Press and hold the appropriate side of the preset bar until you hear a beep 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels 5 Press the xm button again The other XM band will be shown Store the next six channels by repeating steps 2 and 3 Once a channel is stored press and release the proper side of the preset bar to tune to it Adjusting the Sound For information see page 177 XM Radio Reception For information see page 183 CONTINUED 181 soinjeoy Playing the XM Radio Models without navigation system XM Radio Display Messages LOADING XM is loading the audio or program information OFF AIR The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting 182 UPDATING The encryption code is being updated Wait until the encryption code is fully updated Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally NO SIGNAL The signal is currently too weak Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon 2011 RDX c The sele
146. ad restraint so the center of the back of your head rests against the center of the restraint Have passengers adjust their head restraints properly as well Taller persons should adjust their restraint as high as possible AWARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and you can be seriously injured in a crash Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving Properly adjusted head restraints will help protect occupants from whiplash and other crash injuries See page 135 for how to adjust the head restraints and how the driver s and front passenger s active head restraints work 2011 RDX 5 Fasten and Position the Seat Belts Insert the latch plate into the buckle then tug on the belt to make sure the belt is securely latched Check that the belt is not twisted because a twisted belt can cause serious injuries in a crash CONTINUED 15 Jes Josuesseg pur PAA Protecting Adults and Teens N Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries If necessary pull up on the belt again to remove any slack then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder 16 This spreads the forces of a crash
147. ake your vehicle for an emissions test until the readiness codes are set Refer to Emissions Testing for more information see page 490 Brake System Indicator Brake System Indicator Red Canada U S The brake system indicator red normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position and as a reminder to check the parking brake It will stay on if you do not fully release the parking brake If the brake system indicator red comes on while driving the brake fluid level is probably low Press lightly on the brake pedal to see if it feels normal If it does check the brake fluid level the next time you stop at a service station see page 429 You will also see a BRAKE FLUID LOW message on the multi information display see page 79 If the fluid level is low take your vehicle to a dealer and have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads However if the brake pedal does not feel normal you should take immediate action A problem in one part of the system s dual circuit design will still give you braking at two wheels You will feel the brake pedal go down much farther before the vehicle begins to slow down and you will have to press harder on the pedal You will also see a CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 79 2011 RDX Slow down by shifting to a lower gear and pull to the side of the road when it is safe Be
148. an it does on pavement So be sure to read this owner s manual pay special attention to the precautions and tips in this section and get acquainted with your vehicle before you leave the pavement AWARNING Improperly operating this vehicle on or off pavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed e Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner s manual e Keep your speed low and don t drive faster than conditions permit 2011 RDX Important Safety Precautions To avoid loss of control or rollover be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your vehicle cargo load limits see pages 365 and 397 e Wherever you drive make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts Keep your speed low and never go faster than the conditions allow It s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits CONTINUED 405 SUIALIG Off Highway Driving Guidelines Check Out Your Vehicle Before you leave the pavement be sure to do all scheduled maintenance and service and inspect your vehicle for any problems Pay special attention to the condition of the tires and check the tire pressures After you return to the pavement carefully inspect your vehicle to make sure there is no damage that could make driving it unsafe Recheck the condit
149. an transfer a call from HFL to your phone or from your phone to HFL Press and release the HFL Talk button and say Transfer 2011 RDX Muting a Call You can mute your voice to the person you are talking to during a call To mute your voice during a call press and release the HFL Talk button and say Mute To unmute your voice press and release the HFL Talk button and say Mute again Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Send Numbers or Names During a Call HFL allows you to send numbers or names during a call This is useful when you call a menu driven phone system To send a name or number during a call Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Send 2 Follow the HFL prompts and say the name or number you want to send 3 Follow the HFL prompts to send the tones and continue the call NOTE To send a pound say pound To send a star say star Phonebook You can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers on HFL The numbers you store can be not only phone numbers but other types such as account numbers or passwords which can be sent during a menu driven call To store a phonebook entry Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phonebook 2 Say Store after the prompts 3 Say a name you want to list as your phonebook entry 4 Say the number you want to store for the name entry 5 F
150. anical noises come from the engine compartment This is normal Check Starter System Message U S CHECK STARTER SYSTEM STARTER SYSTEM If there is a problem with the starter system you will see a CHECK STARTER SYSTEM message on the multi information display when the ignition switch is turned to the ON qI position You will also see this message when the auto control mode of the starter system has a problem 2011 RDX Canada CHECK STARTER SYSTEM If this message is on the ignition switch has to be held in the START ID position manually until the engine starts The ignition switch can be held in that position up to 15 seconds Even though you may be able to start the engine manually without the auto control mode of the starter system have your dealer inspect your vehicle 375 SUIALIG Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicators These indicators on the instrument panel show which position the shift lever is in 376 The D indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position If it flashes while driving in any shift position it indicates a possible problem in the transmission If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on along with the D indicator there is a problem with the automatic transmission control system Avoid rapid acceleration and have the transmission checked by your dealer as soon as possib
151. ant to make together For example you can say acommand After the beep speak Call 123 456 7890 or Dial Peter in a clear natural tone When HFT is in use navigation e Try to reduce all background voice commands cannot be noise If the microphone picks up recognized voices other than yours commands may be misinterpreted To change the volume level of HFL use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls MICROPHONE e Air or wind noise from the dashboard and side vents and all windows may interfere with the microphone Adjust or close them as necessary CONTINUED 307 2011 RDX soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Help Features Information Display Some phones may send battery e To hear general HFL information As an incoming call notification you signal strength and roaming status including help on pairing a phone will see the following display information to HFL or setting up the system say Tutorial For help at any time including a list of available commands say Hands free help SIGNAL HFL MODE BATTERY STRENGTH MESSAGE 0123456888 ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING 308 2011 RDX Bluetooth HandsFreeLink BLUETOOTH INDICATOR BLUETOOTH INDICATOR Searels L CLOCK we ow HandsFreeLink Pick up of Talk i gt Hang up L4 mm Back On models with navigation system On models without navigation system A notificat
152. applied lightly builds up heat and reduces their effectiveness and reduces brake pad life In addition fuel economy can be reduced It also keeps your brake lights on all the time confusing drivers behind you Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effectiveness Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear Check your brakes after driving through deep water Apply the brakes moderately to see if they feel normal If not apply them gently and frequently until they do Be extra cautious and alert in your driving 2011 RDX Braking System Design The hydraulic system that operates the brakes has two separate circuits Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle the left front brake is connected with the right rear brake etc If one circuit should develop a problem you will still have braking at two wheels Brake Pad Wear Indicators All four brakes have audible brake wear indicators If the brake pads need replacing you will hear a distinctive metallic screeching sound when you apply the brake pedal If you do not have the brake pads replaced they will screech all the time It is normal for the brakes to occasionally squeal or squeak when you apply them 387 SUIALIG Anti lock Brakes ABS The anti lock brake system ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking up and helps you
153. as far back from the dashboard as possible 2011 RDX The rest of this section gives more detailed information about how you can maximize your safety Remember however that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy 11 Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAIA Protecting Adults and Teens Introduction The following pages provide instructions on how to properly protect the driver adult passengers and teenage children who are large enough and mature enough to drive or ride in the front See pages 36 56 for important guidelines on how to properly protect infants small children and larger children who ride in your vehicle 1 Close and Lock the Doors After everyone has entered the vehicle be sure the doors and the tailgate are closed and locked 12 Your vehicle has a door and tailgate open indicator on the multi information display to indicate when a specific door or the tailgate is not tightly closed You will see the appropriate indicator and the message for each condition i TAIL GATE OPEN When one or more doors are not tightly closed the DOOR OPEN message will come on When the tailgate is not tightly closed the TAILGATE OPEN message will come on 2011 RDX DOOR amp i TAILGATE ZA OPEN When both tailgate and one or more doors are not tightly closed the
154. as instructed on page 467 If the brakes feel normal drive slowly and have your vehicle repaired by your dealer as soon as possible Avoid sudden hard braking which could cause the rear wheels to lock up and possibly lead to a loss of control Important Safety Reminders ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle It only helps with the steering control during braking ABS will not prevent a skid that results from changing direction abruptly such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability Always steer moderately when you are braking hard Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road 2011 RDX A vehicle with ABS may require a longer distance to stop on loose or uneven surfaces such as gravel or snow than a vehicle without anti lock 389 SUIALIG Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that turns on every time you start the engine and monitors the pressure in your tires while driving Each tire has its own pressure sensor If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on
155. ate this CD changer with the same controls used for the radio To load CDs or operate the CD changer the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY 1 or ON M position The disc changer can play these disc formats e CD CD DA e CD R RW The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks COMPACT COMPACT MSE DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO COMPACT COMPACT MISE ol IS COMPACT COMPACT wise Mise Recordable ReWritable The changer can also play MP3 or WMA format see page 189 2011 RDX For best results when using CD R or CD RW discs use only high quality discs labeled for audio use When recording a CD R or CD RW the recording must be closed in order for the disc to be played by the CD player NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit You cannot load and play 3 inch 8 cm discs in this system Video CDs and DVDs will not work in this unit CONTINUED 187 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models without navigation system Loading CDs in the Changer To load multiple discs in one operation 1 Press and hold the LOAD button on the changer unit until you hear a beep You will see BUSY on the center display and disc load indicator turns red and starts blinking 2 Insert the disc into the disc slot when the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears on the center display at the sam
156. ation see page 258 If the disc cannot be pulled out or the error message does not disappear after the disc is ejected see your dealer 2011 RDX CONTINUED 195 soinjeoy Disc Changer Error Messages Models without navigation system The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc press the eject button After ejecting the disc check it for damage or deformation If there is no damage insert the disc again For the additional information on damaged discs see page 258 The audio system will try to play the disc If there is still a problem the error message will reappear Press the eject button and pull out the disc Insert a different disc If the new disc plays there is a problem with the first disc If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it take your vehicle to a dealer 196 Error Cause Solution Message FORMAT Track File format not Current track will be skipped The next supported supported track or file plays automatically BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc s OWNER S Mechanical error Check the disc for serious damage signs of MANUAL deformation excessive scratches and or dirt PUSH EJECT see page 258 Insert the disc again If the code does not BAD DISC disappear or the disc s cannot be removed sco
157. ave your vehicle checked by your dealer 2011 RDX You will also see a CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 79 Fuses INTERIOR The vehicle s fuses are contained in three fuse boxes The interior fuse box is on the driver s lower left side UNDER HOOD PRIMARY UNDER HOOD SECONDARY The primary under hood fuse box is The secondary under hood fuse box in the engine compartment on the is next to the battery To open it driver s side To open it push the push the tabs as shown tabs as shown CONTINUED 469 2011 RDX pepedxouy op jo area Surely Fuses Checking and Replacing Fuses If something electrical in your vehicle stops working the first thing you should check for is a blown fuse Determine from the chart on pages 473 and 474 or the diagram on the fuse box lid which fuse or fuses control that device Check those fuses first but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is the cause Replace any blown fuses and check if the device works 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK 0 position Make sure the headlights and all other accessories are off 2 Under hood fuse boxes Remove the cover from the fuse box 470 FUSE BLOWN Qo Check each of the large fuses in the under hood fuse box by looking through the side window at the wire inside Remove the screws with a Phillips head screwdriver 2011 RDX
158. aying the XM Radio Models with navigation system U S model is shown PASSENGER AIRBAG meam AUDIO BUTTON INTERFACE DIAL XM BUTTON DISP MODE BUTTON SCAN BUTTON gt semn I oo TUNE FOLDER BAR SEEK SKIP BEG CATEGORY BAR S Jl G PRESET BUTTONS CONTINUED 229 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing the XM Radio Models with navigation system Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Radio anywhere in the United States and Canada except Hawaii Alaska and Puerto Rico XM is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc and XM CANADA is a registered business name of Canadian Satellite Radio Inc XM Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear high quality digital reception It offers many channels in several categories Along with a large selection of different types of music XM Radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the upper display and the audio control display 230 Operating the XM Radio To listen to the XM Radio turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY M or ON ID position Push the PWR VOL knob to turn on the audio system and press the xm button To view the audio control display press the AUDIO button Adjust the volume turning the PWR VOL knob The last channel you listened to will show on the upper display
159. been properly e The lights and brakes on your serviced and is in good condition vehicle and the trailer are working properly e Your vehicle tires and spare are properly inflated and the trailer tires and spare are inflated as recommended by the trailer maker e All weights and loads are within limits e The hitch safety chains and any other attachments are secure e All items in or on the trailer are properly secured and cannot shift while you drive 402 2011 RDX Driving Safely With a Trailer The added weight length and height of a trailer will affect your vehicle s handling and performance so driving with a trailer requires some special driving skills and techniques For your safety and the safety of others take time to practice driving maneuvers before heading for the open road and follow the guidelines in this section Towing a Trailer Towing Speeds and Gears Drive slower than normal in all driving situations and obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers Use the D position when towing a trailer on level roads See Driving on Hills in the next column for additional gear information Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h At higher speeds the trailer may sway or affect vehicle handling When driving uphill and downhill use the S position without using the paddle shifters to provide the proper engine power and engine braking on each gear You can also use the paddle shifters
160. ber blinking on the upper display and the disc load indicator turns red again and blinks as the CD is loaded Do not try to insert a disc until LOAD appears You could damage the audio unit 3 You will see DISC READ on the upper display then the system begins to play the CD EMPTY POSITION You can load a CD into an empty position while a CD is playing Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display Select the empty position No Disc is shown on the audio control display by rotating the interface dial Then press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection The current CD stops playing and starts the loading sequence The CD just loaded will play 2011 RDX You can also select the empty position by pressing the appropriate preset button You can load a disc s in any mode AM FM XM or AUX if you do not select an empty position You cannot select the empty position if there is no disc in the changer CONTINUED 243 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models with navigation system To Play a Disc When playing a CD CD DA the audio control display shows disc number album name track number and elapsed time When playing a CD without this information the number of the disc and track playing and the elapsed time are shown on the audio control display When the system reaches the end of the disc it will advance to t
161. c again If the code does not BAD DISC disappear or the disc s cannot be removed PLEASE CHECK Servo error consult your dealer Do not try to force the disc OWNER S out of the player MANUAL 2011 RDX Protecting Your Discs General Information e When using CD R CD RW discs use only high quality CDs labeled for audio use e When recording a CD R CD RW the recording must be closed for it to be used by the system e Play only standard round CDs Odd shaped CDs may jam in the drive or cause other problems e Handle your CDs properly to prevent damage and skipping Protecting CDs When a CD is not being played store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination To prevent warpage keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat To clean a CD use a clean soft cloth Wipe across the CD from the center to the outside edge Anew CD may be rough on the inner and outer edges The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the CD causing skipping or other problems Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen Never try to insert foreign objects in the disc changer 2011 RDX Handle a CD by its edges never touch either surface Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD These along with contamination from fingerprints liquids and felt tip pens can cause the CD to not pla
162. canning all the tracks files on the current disc the system returns to the track file it first started scanning with scan is canceled and the system begins to play that track file normally 2011 RDX In MP3 WMA mode FOLDER SCAN The folder scan function samples the first file of each folder on the current disc in the order they are compressed in MP3 To activate this feature press the SCAN button twice The first file of each folder plays for about 10 seconds You will see F SCAN and the folder number flashing on the center display To hear the rest of the file in the folder currently scanning press and hold the SCAN button for more than 2 seconds When the system finishes scanning all the folders on the current disc the system returns to the folder it started scanning with folder scan is canceled and the system begins to play that folder normally Playing Discs Models without navigation system DISC SCAN The disc scan function samples the first track file in MP3 WMA mode on each disc within the changer in numerical order To activate this feature press the SCAN button twice In MP3 WMA mode press the SCAN button three times The first track file on each disc plays for about 10 seconds You will see D SCAN and disc number flashing on the center display To hear the rest of the track file on the disc currently scanning press and hold the SCAN button for more than 2 seconds When the system fi
163. care when accelerating steering and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle See page 405 for off highway driving guidelines Preparing to Drive You should do these checks and adjustments before you drive your vehicle 1 Make sure all windows mirrors and outside lights are clean and unobstructed Remove frost snow or ice Check that the hood is fully closed 3 Visually check the tires If a tire looks low use a gauge to check its pressure bo 4 Check that any items you may be carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely 5 Check the seat adjustment see page 134 6 Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors see page 146 7 Check the steering wheel adjustment see page 122 8 Make sure the doors and the tailgate are securely closed and locked 9 Fasten your seat belt Check that your passengers have fastened their seat belts see page 15 2011 RDX 10 When you start the engine check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel and the messages on the multi information display see pages 63 73 and 74 373 Sunna Starting the Engine Your vehicle s starting system has an auto control mode When you turn the ignition switch to the START ID position this feature keeps the engine s starter motor running until the engine starts Follow these instructions to start the engine 1 Apply the parking brake 2 In cold weather
164. cause of the long distance needed to stop it is hazardous to drive the vehicle You should have it towed and repaired as soon as possible see Emergency Towing on page 475 If you must drive the vehicle a short distance in this condition drive slowly and carefully If the ABS indicator and the VSA system indicator come on with the brake system indicator have your vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately 467 pop dx un ot Jo SULL Brake System Indicator Brake System Indicator Amber U S Canada BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle has an electric vacuum pump located in the engine compartment It enhances the effectiveness of your vehicle s brake system more frequently when you drive in cold weather or thinner air at high altitude after the engine is started When the electric vacuum pump is in operation it makes some mechanical noises come from the engine compartment This is normal 468 The brake system indicator amber on the instrument panel normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position and goes off after the engine starts If it comes on at any other time press on the brake pedal with your foot several times until the indicator turns off If the indicator is still on or comes on again after this procedure there is a problem in the brake system including the electric vacuum pump If this happens the brake pedal might feel heavy when you press it H
165. ce to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely When the USB device is connected and the USB mode is selected on the audio system the USB indicator is shown in the upper display Pressing the AUDIO button to displays the folder and file names and the elapsed time in the audio control display 2011 RDX To Change or Select Files Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files SKIP Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current file Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file To move rapidly within a file press and hold either side gt gt I or 44 of the SKIP bar Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models with navigation system FOLDER SELECTION To select a different folder press and release the B side of the TUNE FOLDER bar to move to the beginning of the FOLDER 1 Fold 01 7 TEE Track 01 next folder Press and release the Gwe 35 ae eS lt 4 side of the bar to move to the 1 Track 01 1 J 4 O i wreck Ot J beginning of the previous folder 3 3 Track 03 TV VW AUDO MENU SKIP SKIP DIRECTION DIRECTION You can also change files with the interface dial Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display Push th
166. ceesseeeees 387 if you are planning to tow a trailer or Anti lock Brakes ABS 388 drive off highway Tire Pressure Monitoring System CPM S riara dt iaedt lt d 390 2011 RDX Vehicle Stability Assist VSA aka Electronic Stability Control ESC System 395 Towing a Trailer ccccccceseees 397 Off Highway Driving Guidelines cccceseceesseeeeees 405 371 SUIALIG Driving Guidelines Your vehicle has higher ground clearance that allows you to travel over bumps obstacles and rough terrain It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier Because your vehicle rides higher off the ground it has a high center of gravity that can cause it to roll over if you make abrupt turns Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles 372 To prevent rollovers or loss of control e Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible e Do not modify your vehicle in any way that would raise the center of gravity e Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof 2011 RDX Your vehicle is equipped with a super handling all wheel drive GH AWD system When the system senses a loss of one or more wheel traction it automatically transfers some power to the other wheels This gives you better traction and mobility You still need to exercise the same
167. ces and vehicle storage ccccseeesseceseseeessseeeceeecesseeeeceeeeenes 409 Taking Care of the Unexpected flat tire jump starting overheating and fuses cccceesssccecesseceecesseeeessaneeseses 453 Technical Information vehicle specifications tires and emissions controls cccccecesessssseeceeeeceseeseeecesesesseeees A477 Warranty and Client Relations U S and Canada only warranty and contact information cceseeeeeeees 493 Ti Ler sso Sicvsceess cs cusses a A SiseratessitessesaePuseve cesneuien sees snes soiusteosdescteesstcunsusnsstesestesteth snaveavsens I Service Information Summary fluid capacities and tire pressures 00X31 STK 6400 2010 American Honda Motor Co Inc All Rights Reserved 1 2011 RDX Overview of Contents Contents A convenient reference to the sections in this manual Your Vehicle at a Glance A quick reference to the main controls in your vehicle Driver and Passenger Safety Important information about the proper use and care of your vehicle s seat belts an overview of the supplemental restraint system and valuable information on how to protect children with child restraints Instruments and Controls Explains the purpose of each instrument panel indicator and gauge and how to use the controls on the dashboard and steering column Features How to operate the climate control system the audio system and other convenience features Before Dri
168. ceseees 433 R ae eee alee A 23 Additional Information 20 Rear Seat Folding Down 138 R oti y Saf peti Defect ia S seret Advice for Pregnant Women 18 Rearview Mirror sccccceeeees 146 ep o T ety Defects U S 496 Automatic Seat Belt Rearview Mirror with Rearview Re ony d Enoi o O il ee ao 420 TeNSIONELS ceeeeesssreeeeeeees 22 Camera Display ccscccee 348 eas T Ae Ey Ee SEENON Cleaning sensisse rnes 438 Rear Window Defogger 121 Coals a eae a 357 494 Lap Shoulder Belt 15 21 Rear Window Wiper and R ne nant Child pres a ys 36 Maintenance ccccssseeeeeeeees 23 Washer sis cciessiistscieaanchesh 115 Ra TA O E E Reminder Indicator and everse Gear Position 66 oti ee 20 64 Reverse Tilt Door Mirror 147 Per iseset renik i VIII 2011 RDX System Components Use During Pregnancy Wearing a Lap Shoulder Position Memory Seats Adjusting the Security System Security System Indicator Driver s Seat Position Sensor 28 Front Passenger s Weight ere ae EPAI SEEN Service Intervals Service Manual U S only Service Station Procedures Setting the Clock Torque Distribution Monitor Shifting the Automatic Transmission csscceceeeeeeees 376 Shift Lever Position Indicators 376 Shift Lock Release c cccee 379 Side Airbag essorer 30 How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works c00006 32
169. ck pressing the DISC AUX button also changes a mode Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone CONTINUED 285 soinjeoy Bluetooth Audio System Models with navigation system As required by the FCC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 286 2011 RDX FM AM Radio Reception FM AM Radio Frequencies The radio can receive the complete AM and FM bands Those bands cover these frequencies AM band 530 to 1 710 kHz FM band 87 7 to 107 9 MHz Radio stations on the AM band are assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz apart 530 540 550 Stations on the FM band are assigned frequencies at least 0 2 MHz apart 87 9 88 1 88 3 Stations must use these exact frequencies It is fairly common for stations to round off the frequency in their advertising
170. cted channel number does not exist or is not part of your subscription or this channel has no artist or title information at this time ANTENNA There is a problem with the XM antenna Please consult your dealer Playing the XM Radio Models without navigation system Satellite Radio Signals Satellite radio receives signals from Signal may be Signal is weaker in two satellites to produce clear high blocked by these areas quality digital reception It offers mountains or s large obstacles many channels in several categories to the south a gt Along with a large selection of different types of music satellite radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator therefore objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions To help compensate for this ground based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas SATELLIT Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator GROUND REPEATER CONTINUED 183 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing the XM Radio Models without navigation system Depending on where you drive you may experience reception problems Interference can be caused by any of these conditions e Driving on the north side of an east west mountain road Driving on the north side of a large commerc
171. curely and all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the rear seat backs Seat Heaters Passenger s Seat HEATERS Driver s Seat SEAT HEATER SWITCHES Both front seats are equipped with The ignition switch must be in the seat heaters The passenger seat is ON ID position to use seat heaters only heated in the seat bottom Push the top of the switch HI to because of the side airbag cutoff rapidly heat up the seat After the system seat reaches a comfortable temperature select LO by pushing the bottom of the switch This will keep the seat warm 2011 RDX In the HI setting the heater turns off when the seat gets warm and turns back on after the seat s temperature drops In the LO setting the heater runs continuously It does not cycle with temperature changes Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters e Use the HI setting only to heat the seats quickly because it draws large amounts of current from the battery e If the engine is left idling for an extended period do not use the seat heaters even on the LO setting It can weaken the battery causing hard starting 141 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Power Windows DRIVER S WINDOW SWITCH MAIN SWITCH Turn the ignition switch to the ON I position to raise or lower any window To open the window push the switch down and hold it Release the switch when you want to stop the window To close the window pull back on
172. d the lock tab until it releases NOTICE from the wiper arm Do not open the hood when the wiper When replacing a wiper blade arms are raised or you will damage the make sure not to drop the wiper hood and the wiper arms blade or wiper arm down on the windshield 440 2011 RDX Table of Contents Wiper Blades 3 Remove the blade from the blade 4 Examine the new wiper blades If 5 Install the new blade onto the assembly they have no plastic or metal blade assembly e Find two tabs with a SET and reinforcement along the back e Find two tabs with a SET and mark on the wiper blade edge remove the metal lt mark on the wiper blade reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade and install them in the slots along the edge of the new assembly This is the direction assembly The opposite side of you install the mark is the direction you pull out the wiper blade blade e Slide the blade onto the e Pull out the blade by grabbing assembly until it is locked by the the end of it as shown in the tabs above illustration CONTINUED 441 2011 RDX aoueUuD UIP Table of Contents Wiper Blades 6 Slide the wiper blade assembly WIPER ARM onto the wiper arm Make sure it locks in place 7 Make sure the blade is completely installed and that its edge is not bunched up 8 Lower the wiper arm down against the windshield the pass
173. d and maintained and that it meets federal state provincial territorial and local regulations 2011 RDX Hitches Any hitch used on your vehicle must be properly bolted to the underbody Safety Chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer Make sure the chains are secured to the trailer and hitch and that they cross under the tongue and can catch the trailer if it becomes unhitched Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily but do not let the chains drag on the ground CONTINUED 399 SUIALIG Towing a Trailer Trailer Brakes Acura recommends that any trailer with a total trailer weight of 1 000 lbs 450 kg or more has its own brakes There are two common types of trailer brakes surge and electric Surge brakes are common for boat trailers since the brakes will get wet If you choose electric brakes be sure they are electronically actuated Do not attempt to tap into your vehicle s hydraulic system No matter how successful it may seem any attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic system will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard See your trailer dealer or rental agency for more information on installing electric brakes 400 Trailer Lights Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal provincial territorial and local regulations Check with your local trailer sales or rental agencies for the requirements in the ar
174. d result in damage to the transmission Damage resulting from the use of transmission fluid other than Acura ATF Z1 is not covered by the Acura new vehicle warranty 6 Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration If you are not sure how to add fluid contact your dealer Brake Fluid Check the fluid level in the brake Always use Honda Heavy Duty fluid reservoir monthly Brake Fluid DOT 3 If it is not ilable you should use only DOT 3 Independent of the maintenance aval YOU y minder display replace the brake or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary fluid every 3 years replacement Using any non Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle s braking system and can cause extensive damage 2011 RDX MIN The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir If the level is at or below the MIN mark your brake system needs attention Have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads 429 aoueUD UIP Power Steering Fluid UPPER LEVEL Always use Acura Power Steering Fluid You may use another power steering fluid as an emergency replacement but have the power steering system flushed a
175. d the tailgate replace the battery as soon as possible Battery type CR1616 2011 RDX SCREW To replace the battery 1 Remove the screw at the base of the transmitter with a small Phillips head screwdriver NOTE Be careful when removing this screw as the head of the screw can strip out 2 Separate the keypad from the transmitter by pushing any button from outside CONTINUED 131 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Remote Transmitter Llo BATTERY gt y A Za Gide 7 Q Se Place a cloth on the edge of the keypad to prevent scratches and remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a small flat tip screwdriver 132 4 Remove the old battery and note the polarity Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same side facing up then insert it in the keypad An improperly disposed of battery can hurt the environment Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal on then install the parts in reverse order 2011 RDX Snap the two halves of the keypad As required by the FCC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
176. d track name CD TEXT or the folder and file name MP3 WMA under these conditions e When you insert a disc and the system begins to play e Each time a new track file or folder plays Playing Discs Models without navigation system To Change or Select Tracks Files While a disc is playing you can use the SEEK SKIP bar to select passages and change tracks files in MP3 WMA mode In MP3 WMA mode use the TUNE FOLDER bar to select folders on the disc and use the SEEK SKIP bar to change files SEEK SKIP Each time you press and release the gt I side of the SEEK SKIP bar the system skips forward to the beginning of the next track file in MP3 WMA mode Press and release the I lt side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track file Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track file To move rapidly within a track file press and hold the gt or lt lt side of the SEEK SKIP bar 2011 RDX In MP3 WMA mode FOLDER SELECTION To select a different folder press and release the B side of the TUNE FOLDER bar to move to the beginning of the next folder Press and release the lt d side of the bar to move to the beginning of the previous folder REPEAT This feature when activated continuously replays the current track file in MP3 WMA mode To activate it press and release the RPT button You will see RPT on the center display To turn off thi
177. depending on the severity of the crash whether or not the seat belts are latched and or other factors After a crash you may see what looks like smoke This is actually powder from the airbag s surface Although the powder is not harmful people with respiratory problems re safer If this occ rir f Front airbags are designed to After inflating the front airbags ISCOMTOL M EUS OCCUTS SE OUTO supplement the seat belts to help n EA so they sah oe aneno aS WAS palet reduce the likelihood of head and interfere with the driver s visibility chest injuries in frontal crashes or the ability to steer or operate other controls CONTINUED 27 2011 RDX Ayoyes Josuesseg PUL PAA Additional Information About Your Airbags Advanced Airbags Your front airbags are also advanced airbags The main purpose of this feature is to help prevent airbag caused injuries to children or small statured adults who ride in front 28 For both advanced airbags to work properly e Occupants must sit upright and wear their seat belts properly Do not spill any liquids on or under the seats cover the sensors or put any cargo or metal objects under the front seats Objects placed or pushed under the front passenger s seat may cause the sensor to malfunction increasing the risk of injury in a crash Failure to follow these instructions could damage the sensors or prevent them from working properly 2011 RDX DRIVER S SEAT lt P
178. der certain conditions Snow Tires If you mount snow tires on your vehicle make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires Mount snow tires on all four wheels The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may be lower than your original tires Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations Tires Tire Chains Mount tire chains on your tires when required by driving conditions or local laws Install them only on the front tires Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance Acura strongly recommends using the chains listed below made by Security Chain Company SCC Cable type Shur Grip Z Z343 When installing cables follow the manufacturer s instructions and mount them as tight as you can Make sure they are not contacting the brake lines or suspension Drive slowly with them installed If you hear them coming into contact with the body or chassis stop and investigate Remove them as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle s brake lines suspension body and wheels Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle 2011 RDX Using the wrong chains or not properly installing chains can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed Follow all instructions in this owner s
179. der indicator in the instrument panel you will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message This remains displayed if you ignore it and do not fasten the seat belt while driving When no one is sitting in the front passenger s seat or a child or small adult is riding there the indicator should not come on and the beeper should not sound Additional Information About Your Seat Belts If the indicator comes on or the beeper sounds when the driver s seat belt is latched and there is no front seat passenger and no items on the front seat something may be interfering with the monitoring system Look for and remove e Any items under the front passenger s seat e Any object s hanging on the seat or in the seat back pocket e Any object s touching the rear of the seat back If no obstructions are found have your vehicle checked by a dealer Lap Shoulder Belt The lap shoulder belt goes over your shoulder across your chest and across your hips To fasten the belt insert the latch plate into the buckle then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is latched see page 15 for how to properly position the belt To unlock the belt press the red PRESS button on the buckle Guide the belt across your body so that it retracts completely After exiting the vehicle be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get closed in the door 2011 RDX All seat belts have an emerge
180. dicator alerts you to a problem Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible If you ignore this indication your airbags may not operate properly 2011 RDX e Ifyour vehicle has a moderate to severe impact Even if your airbags do not inflate your dealer should inspect the driver s seat position sensor the front passenger s weight sensors the front seat belt tensioners and all seat belts and their anchor worn during a crash to make sure they are operating properly Additional Information About Your Airbags Additional Safety Precautions e Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags Together airbags and seat belts provide the best protection e Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring for any reason Tampering could cause the airbags to deploy possibly causing very serious injury e Do not expose the front Do not remove or modify a front passenger s seat back to liquid If seat without consulting your water or another liquid soaks into dealer This could make the a seat back it can prevent the side driver s seat position sensor or the airbag cutoff system from working front passenger s weight sensors properly ineffective If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities first contact Acura Client Services at 800 382 2238 35 2011 RDX Ayoyes Josuosseg pur PAA Protecting Children General Guidelines Children depend on adu
181. dings are NOT accurate measures of fuel economy Fuel economy may improve over the first several thousand miles Checking Your Fuel Economy Miles per Gallon s Gallons of fuel Miles driven e x Liter 1 Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off 2 Reset trip counter to zero 3 Record the total gallons liters needed to refill 4 Follow one of the simple calculations above 2011 RDX L per 100 km 361 SUIALI 0g Accessories and Modifications Modifying your vehicle or installing some non Acura accessories can make your vehicle unsafe Before you make any modifications or add any accessories be sure to read the following information Accessories Your dealer has Acura accessories that allow you to personalize your vehicle These accessories have been designed and approved for your vehicle and are covered by warranty Although non Acura accessories may fit on your vehicle they may not meet factory specifications and could adversely affect your vehicle s handling stability and reliability 362 AWARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle s handling stability and performance and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed Follow all instructions in this owner s manual regarding accessories and modifications When properly installed cellular phones alarms two way radios and low powered audio systems should not int
182. disconnect the USB flash memory device while it is playing the center display shows USB NO DATA If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device the system will begin playing where it left off USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages For information see page 211 USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages Models without navigation system If you see an error message in the center display while playing a USB flash memory device find the solution in the chart to the right If you cannot clear the error message take your vehicle to your dealer Error Message Cause Solution USB ERROR USB ROM error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit BAD USB DEVICE PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL Abnormal power source Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected Disconnect the device Then turn the audio system off and turn it on again Do not reconnect the device that caused the error UNPLAYABLE Use of unsupported FILE files Appears when the files in the USB flash memory device are DRM or an unsupported format This error message appears for a few seconds then plays the next song No files in USB flash NO SONG memory device Appears when the USB flash memory device is empty or there are no MP3 WMA or AAC files in the USB flash memory device Save some MP3 WMA or AAC files in the USB flas
183. don t get your vehicle fixed you will also receive a reminder message through AcuraLink You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer 344 2011 RDX AcuraLink U S models only Diagnostic Info When an indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the Multi Information Display MID AcuraLink can provide information about the cause of the indicator or message and the recommended action to address it This helps you handle the problem as it occurs preventing or limiting costly repairs The AcuraLink system cannot determine some mechanical problems such as squeaks or rattles that are not triggered by the diagnostic indicator monitors A diagnostic message is generated if any of the instrument panel indicators stay on when they should go off For more information on the instrument panel indicators see page 63 Emissions System P0117 An indicator is on AcuraLink can help you decide what to do Check Now Check Later When an instrument panel indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the MID AcuraLink immediately notifies you with the message Check more information If you do not want the information right away select the Check Later option If you want the information now select the Check Now option If the navigation screen is not active you must select OK from the navigation disclaimer
184. ds at the same speed the torque distribution monitor may stop displaying the amount of torque This is not a system problem The monitor will show the amount if the system senses any change in torque distribution If the SH AWD indicator blinks while driving it indicates the differential temperature is too high You will also see an SH AWD DIFF TEMP HIGH message on the multi information display If this happens pull to the side of the road when it is safe shift to Park and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out If the indicator does not go out take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked 2011 RDX CHECK OND Sato SYSTEM If the SH AWD indicator on the instrument panel stays on and the CHECK SH AWD SYSTEM message also appears on the multi information display there is a problem with the SH AWD system Your vehicle still has normal front wheel drive with vehicle stability assist VSA but does not have the advantages of SH AWD Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible 385 Sunna Parking Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle Make sure the parking brake is set firmly or your vehicle may roll if it is parked on an incline Set the parking brake before you put the transmission in Park This keeps the vehicle from moving and putting pressure on the parking mechanism in the transmission 386 Parking Tips e Make sure the moonroof
185. e 23 Additional Information About Your Airbag S e022 Acs esses ctesdeld 24 Airbag System Components 24 How Your Front Airbags Work 26 How Your Side Airbags Work 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Wok isssescscs totes sceceseteeensatecces 31 How the SRS Indicator Works 32 How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works e00008 32 How the Passenger Airbag Off Indicator Works seeeeeees 33 Airbag ServiCe ssesssseseesosessoeeo 34 Additional Safety Precautions 35 Protecting Children General Guidelines ccccseescceeeeees 36 All Children Must Be Restrained cccccccssceeseeeeeees 36 All Children Should Sit in a Back S ats csicscsscvcasiveaesvecesseascsesscves Bf The Passenger s Front Airbag Can Pose Serious Risks Bt 2011 RDX If You Must Drive with Several Children sissisccvecsesssssessssceeseseee 39 If a Child Requires Close Attention sc 0seceseseessses 39 Additional Safety Precautions 40 Protecting Infants and Small Childretys sisseccdscccciesesdeceetesssies 41 Protecting Infants cccceceeees 41 Protecting Small Children 42 Selecting a Child Seat eee 44 Installing a Child Seat eeees 45 Installing a Child Seat with LAT CH eee e 46 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap Shoulder Belt 0 50 Installing a Child Seat with a Tether ssssseccescciesecseosetedsvscsaese
186. e 2 Follow the HFL prompts to change the language to English or French If you have not named your paired phone in the language you just selected HFL will ask you to name it in the current language When French is your currently selected language you can give voice commands in French Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth name and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co Ltd is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt Bluetooth Audio when it is playing Audio will resume when the call is ended U S models only In addition you cannot use HFL while using AcuraLink 2011 RDX As required by the FCC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference that may cause
187. e SOUND CLOCK button until you hear a beep then pressing the R preset 6 side of the preset bar sets the clock back to the previous hour If the displayed time is after the half hour the clock sets forward to the beginning of the next hour U S model is shown When you are finished press the SOUND CLOCK button again to set the time 2011 RDX ACURA r es m Lelei an E ve CES cmn Eaa i 3 4 6 PRESET 6 R SOUND CLOCK BUTTON On models with navigation system The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system GPS and the displayed time is updated automatically by the GPS Refer to the navigation system manual for how to adjust the time 293 soinjeoy Security System The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft The horn sounds and a combination of headlights parking lights side marker lights and taillights flashes if someone attempts to break into your vehicle or remove the radio This alarm continues for 2 minutes then the system resets To reset an alarming system before the 2 minutes have elapsed unlock the driver s door with the key or the remote transmitter The security system automatically sets 15 seconds after you lock the doors hood and the tailgate For the system to activate you must lock the doors and the tailgate from the outside with the key driver s lock tab
188. e Data Connection button to be active you need a Bluetooth compatible and enabled cell phone paired to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink HFL To complete the data connection setup the paired phone must have a compatible data service To find more information on Bluetooth compatible and enabled cell phones visit www acura com handstreelink or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1 888 528 7876 338 Connect to the Acura Server The default setting is prompt When a diagnostic info message appears and you select the Check Now option the system will prompt you before connecting to the Acura server If you do not wish to connect at that time select No at the prompt and you will see the information from the onboard database The Auto setting will remove the prompt when you select the Check Now option and will automatically connect to the Acura server This setting only applies when you have a Bluetooth enabled phone that is paired with HFL and you have completed the Phone Data Connection setup 2011 RDX Message Categories There are six message categories in AcuraLink Quick Tips Feature Guides Maintenance Minders Recalls Campaigns Diagnostic Info and Scheduled Dealer Appointment The system can store up to 255 messages Message categories can be added revised or deleted through broadcast messages from Acura AcuraLink U S models only Quick Tips Your Acura dealers Your
189. e SCAN button You will see SCAN in the center display You will get a 10 second sampling of each file in the folder Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the scan mode and play the last file sampled FOLDER SCAN This feature samples the first file in each folder in the order they are stored To activate the folder scan feature press the SCAN button repeatedly You will see F SCAN in the center display You will get a 10 second sampling of the first file in each folder Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled CONTINUED 209 soinjeoy Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models without navigation system Each time you press and release the SCAN button the mode changes from file scan to folder scan then to normal play 210 To Stop Playing a USB Flash Memory Device To play the radio press the FM AM or xm button Press the CD AUX button to switch between disc ifa disc is loaded and Bluetooth Audio You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device the system will begin playing where it left off 2011 RDX Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Device You can disconnect the USB flash memory device at any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system Always follow the USB flash memory device s instructions when you remove it When you
190. e airbags to In addition your vehicle has side help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the an iia ener driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver front passenger airbags to help protect the heads and during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear cheats of the driver and a front seat impact see page 30 for more seating positions during a moderate passenger during a moderate to information on how your side airbags to severe side impact or rollover see work page 31 for more information on how severe frontal collision see page 26 for more information on how your front airbags work your side curtain airbags work 10 2011 RDX Your Vehicle s Safety Features The most important things you need to know about your airbags are e Airbags do not replace seat belts They are designed to supplement the seat belts e Airbags offer no protection in rear impacts or minor frontal or side collisions e Airbags can pose serious hazards To do their job airbags must inflate with tremendous force So while airbags help save lives they can cause minor injuries or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly What you should do Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle A front passenger should move their seat
191. e illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure CONTINUED 485 woneULIOyUy ey Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Required Federal Explanation Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale 486 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended 2011 RDX TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prev
192. e indicator on may cause serious damage to the transmission 2011 RDX Supplemental Restraint ry System SRS Indicator This indicator comes on for several seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position If it comes on at any other time it indicates a potential problem with your front airbags This indicator will also alert you to a potential problem with your airbag system components You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 80 For more information see page 32 CONTINUED 65 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Instrument Panel Indicators U S Canada SIDE 7 aikBac AW OFF a Side Airbag Off Indicator This indicator comes on for several seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position If it comes on at any other time it indicates that the passenger s side airbag has automatically shut off You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi information display see page 80 For more information see page 32 66 A Anti lock Brake System ABS Indicator This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position and when the ignition switch is turned to the START II position If this indicator comes on at any other time there is a problem in the ABS If this happens take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked With this
193. e must be paired to your vehicle s HandsFreeLink system have its power on and be inside the vehicle see page 313 336 Find Nearest Acura Dealer Select this option to find the nearest Acura dealer using the navigation system Call Your Acura Dealer Select this button to call the Acura dealer you purchased your vehicle from AcuraLink also directs you to this dealer so you can schedule a maintenance appointment or receive information about a message If you visit another dealer for service two times within a 14 month period AcuraLink will reset to call that dealer Diagnostic Info Select this button to get more information about the current diagnostic message To use this option your cell phone must be linked to the HFL and have a compatible data service available Access the Owner Link website to find out which data services are currently compatible with AcuraLink 2011 RDX Message Preferences To set your AcuraLink preferences the types of messages you want to receive if any visit the My Acura website at www owners acura com If you do not have internet access call Acura Client Services at 800 382 2238 they can set your message preferences for you AcuraLink U S models only AcuraLink Message Screen SETUP Main Setup JA Other 1 Basic Settings K 2 Routing amp Guidance 5 f Color 3 Clock Adjustment SZ a Vehicle
194. e page 393 2011 RDX INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS gt TREAD WEAR INDICATOR Replace the tire when you can see the tread wear indicator bars The replacement should be the same size and design tire mounted on the same wheel The spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular wheel and the spare wheel is not designed for mounting a regular tire Changing a Flat Tire 1 Park the vehicle on firm level and non slippery ground Put the transmission in Park Apply the If you have a flat tire while driving stop in a safe place to change it Drive slowly along the shoulder until WING BOLT you get to an exit or an area that is far away from the traffic lanes AWARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack seriously injuring anyone underneath Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack parking brake If you are towing a trailer unhitch it 2 Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK 0 position Have all passengers get out of the vehicle while you change the tire 2011 RDX JACK SPARE TIRE 3 Open the tailgate Raise the cargo area floor lid by lifting it up with the strap then remove the lid The spare tire jack and tools are under the cargo area floor 4 Unscrew the wing bolt Use the hooked end of the wheel nut wrench extension as a wrench if
195. e selector knob to the right side to skip to the beginning of the next file and to the left side to skip to the beginning of the current file Pushing it to the left again skips to the beginning of the previous file 2011 RDX To Select a File from Folder and File Lists FOLDER 1 Folder 01 TRACK 1 Track 01 TIME Fea SKIP A FOLDER LI 1r rako IE Track 02 __3 ff 3 Track 03 V AUDIO MENU You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the interface dial Press the AUDIO button to show the audio control display CONTINUED 275 soinjeoy Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models with navigation system Choose a track Gu Folder 1 2 C Folder 2 3 3 Folder 3 4 CH Folder 4 ow 5 C Folder 5 6 J 1 Folder 6 Push up the selector on the interface dial to switch the display to the folder list then turn the knob on the interface dial to select a folder 276 Choose a track 1 1 Track 01 2 2 Track 02 O 3 3 Track 03 O a 4 Track 04 van 5 6 Press ENTER to change the display to the file list then turn the knob on the interface dial to select a file Press ENTER to set your selection To go back to the normal play display press the AUDIO button Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen and pressing
196. e the top of the button the system goes to the next preset station on the band you are listening to Press and release the bottom to go back to the previous station To activate the seek function press and hold the top or bottom of the CH button until you hear a beep The system searches up or down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal CONTINUED 289 soinjeoy Remote Audio Controls If you are playing a disc the system skips to the beginning of the next track file in MP3 or WMA format each time you press the top of the CH button Press the bottom to return to the beginning of the current track file Press it twice to return to the previous track file To select a different disc folder in MP3 WMA mode press and hold the top or bottom of the CH button until you hear a beep 290 If you are listening to XM Radio use the CH button to change channels Each time you press the top of the button the system goes to the next preset channel Press the bottom to go back to the previous preset channel To go to the next channel of the category you are listening to press and hold the top or bottom of the CH button until you hear a beep 2011 RDX If you are playing a USB flash memory device or iPod with the USB adapter cable press and release the top of the CH button to skip forward to the beginning of the next file Pre
197. e the VSA system inspected by your dealer NOTE The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control ESC The system also includes a traction control function 2011 RDX If the indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON II position there may be a problem with the VSA system Have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi information display if there is a problem with the VSA system If the low tire pressure TPMS indicator comes on see page 390 or the multi information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message with the indicator flashing see page 393 the VSA system automatically turns on even if the VSA system is turned off with the VSA OFF switch In this case you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again CONTINUED 395 Sunna Vehicle Stability Assist VSA aka Electronic Stability Control ESC System Without VSA your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement VSA OFF Switch In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off When the VSA system is off the traction control system is also off You should only attempt to free
198. e time Insert it only halfway the drive will pull it in the rest of the way You will see BUSY on the center display and the disc load indicator turns red again and blinks as the CD is loaded 188 3 When the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears on the center display again insert the next CD in the slot Do not try to insert a disc until LOAD appears You could damage the audio unit iN Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all six positions are loaded If you are not loading all six positions press the LOAD button again after the last CD has loaded DISC READ appears on the center display then the system begins playing the last CD loaded If you stop loading discs before all six positions are filled the system will wait for 10 seconds stop the load operation and begin playing the last disc loaded 2011 RDX To load a single disc 1 Press and release the LOAD button on the changer unit You will see BUSY on the center display and the disc load indicator turns red and starts blinking bo Insert a disc into the disc slot when the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears on the center display at the same time Insert the disc only about halfway the drive will pull it in the rest of the way You will see the disc indicator blinking on the center display Do not try to insert a disc until LOAD appears You could damage the audio unit Pla
199. ea where you plan to tow and use only equipment designed for your vehicle 2011 RDX GROUND HAZARD LEFT TURN BLACK LIGHT SIGNAL ORANGE YELLOW Aa a E eee i l RIGHT TURN BRAKE TAILLIGHT SIGNAL LIGHT RED BROWN LIGHT GREEN Your vehicle has a trailer lighting connector located under the right side tool case in the cargo area Refer to the drawing above for the wiring color code and purpose of each pin Towing a Trailer Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type and brand you should have a qualified technician install a suitable connector between the vehicle and the trailer Improper equipment or installation can cause damage to your vehicle s electrical system and affect your vehicle warranty Additional Towing Equipment Many states Canadian provinces and territories require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer Even if they don t you should install special mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind you or if the trailer creates a blind spot Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation 2011 RDX Pre Tow Checklist When preparing to tow and before driving away be sure to check the following e The vehicle has been properly serviced and the suspension cooling system and lights are in good operating condition CONTINUED 401 SUIALIG Towing a Trailer e The trailer has
200. ealer emissions system Select VOICE for details at your next stop e Press the SET UP button to view Call Your lm e Stop Reading C the setup screen Dealer Find Acura Dir SY Diagnostic Info Select MORE by pushing the interface selector to the right Use the interface knob to scroll to the AcuraLink Messages option Wh and select it by pressing ENTER en you open a MESSage YOU Can on the interface selector read a summary of it and then choose one of several options If an Scroll to the Delete Messages option is not available for a message option and select it by pressing that option will not be highlighted ENTER on the interface selector Scroll to the category with the messages you want to delete and select the category by pressing ENTER on the interface selector CONTINUED 335 2011 RDX soinjeoy AcuraLink U S models only Delete Select this option to delete the current message Voice Select this option to hear a voice read the entire message This gives you more information than the screen can display at one time When you select the Voice option it changes to a Stop Reading option Select the option again to stop the voice Call Select this button to call a phone number embedded in the message When you select Call the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink HFL dials the number for you To make a call your Bluetooth compatible phon
201. eaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats If you use a non Acura floor mat make sure it fits properly and that it OPENING can be used with the floormat anchors Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats If your seat belts get dirty use a soft The driver s and front passenger s FLOOR MAT ANCHORS brush with a mixture of mild soap floor mats that came with your and warm water to clean them Do vehicle hook over the floor mat not use bleach dye or cleaning anchors To lock each anchor turn solvents Let the belts air dry before the knob clockwise This keeps the you use the vehicle floor mats from sliding forward possibly interfering with the pedals or backwards making the front passenger s weight sensors ineffective If you remove a floor mat make sure to re anchor it when you put it back in your vehicle Dirt build up the openings of the seat belt anchors can cause the belts to retract slowly Wipe the openings with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm water or isopropyl alcohol 438 2011 RDX Audio Antenna Intercooler Dust and Pollen Filter Audio Antenna ay NOTICE Your vehicle is equipped with an antenna at the rear of the roof Before using a drive through car wash remove the antenna by unscrewing it by hand This prevents the antenna from being damaged by the car wash brushes Intercooler
202. ecceessreeceseeceees 141 T chomeler cc ce 73 a pa las 134 Turbo Boost Meter 006 73 a CLUS renen se an Gearshift Lever Positions eae ipl HeOnON Ny eet cei coe Peas Te IMteLiOr cceeeeeeseceeseeceeeees Pil Door and Caps ac 353 7 Transmission s u FPGALUPES E 163 ET S 73 Glove BOK seis sev ctedessiscessssvecteiensts 155 IV 2011 RDX Index Gross Axle Weight Rating High Low Beam Switch 117 Fog Lights cccsecccsssseecesseneees 70 GAWR ssscssessscasscecessassveseoeases 398 HomeLink Universal High Beam ccsessseseeeeeeees 69 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating TYaMSCeIVer ccssesseceeeeeeesens 303 Key Immobilizer System 66 GVWR sic sisscdssecccessdectcssszeaess 398 Hood Opening and Closing Lights OD sssrini 70 MING E E ese sesesaseceeessees 355 Low Fuel siorse 68 H TOP eeen a 4 113 Low Oil Pressure 65 465 Low Tire Pressure HandsFreeLink ccccceeeeee 306 ees TPMS oe Rae iy tie 71 390 Hazard Warning Flashers 121 TAE iea ER 411 Headlights Identification Number la or 65 466 AiMINg atest ates tect ter 431 Vehide sssssssssssssssssssssssssrsssssss 478 pa corer eo a Automatic Lighting Off 118 Ignition Seat B it Remi ER 50 6d Automatic Lighting On 117 CA A EE E 122 Sec S te GE ipia 3 70 Daytime Running Lights 119 Switch gs es sstsdadselncraeinencdiances 125 are EM aaeai
203. ection by pressing ENTER CURRENT SETTING SUBWOOFER 0000000000000 Dolby PLII EIB SVC orr Low mo Ea aa Dolby PLII SVC a el baal LL _ CONTINUED 225 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system FADER BALANCE These modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker Fader adjusts the front to back strength while balance adjusts the side to side strength To adjust fader and balance select FADER or BALANCE then press ENTER on the interface selector The current setting is shown on the audio control display Turn the interface dial to the desired level fader F9 to R9 balance L9 to R9 and enter your selection by pressing ENTER To equalize the fader or balance turn the interface dial until the readings on the sound grid come to the center of the adjustment bar 226 CENTER SUBWOOFER To adjust the strength of the sound from the center or subwoofer speaker select it and press ENTER on the interface selector Turn the interface dial to the desired level 6 to 6 and enter your selection by pressing ENTER The current setting is shown on the audio control display Even if the adjustment level reaches 6 the sub woofer is not turned off 2011 RDX Dolby PL Prologic II Dolby PL Prologic II signal processing creates multi channel surround sound from the audio signal recorded with 2 channel stere
204. eed sensitive volume compensation SVC To adjust each mode press the e 007 EEEE AUDIO button to view the audio susan FFEE N iS Af Qelby PLT control display push the interface mE HHHH TREBLE z no BASS FADER RR OOODOOO00Q000000000 FR selector down and turn the interface A o2zccc a3 4 o23DDD dial to SOUND Then press ENTER LE Me e oa ha on the selector moo SAAAA 16 025 FFF FE Select the mode you want to adjust by pushing the interface selector up or down or by turning the interface BALANCE LO000000000000000000 R SOUND ICON dial smo I Bl Dolby PLI B CF a hiy SVC 224 2011 RDX Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system CURRENT SETTING The current setting is also shown on the upper display The system will automatically return I a pe the display to the selected audio i g Ed mode about 10 seconds after you stop adjusting a mode BASS TREBLE To adjust bass pa Pe E e TREBLE Ononooo000000 FADER RR OOOOOOOO0O000000000 FR BALANCE LOOD0000000000000000 R eas and treble select BASS or TREBLE Dolby PLII SVC and press ENTER on the interface selector The current setting is shown on the audio control display Turn the interface dial to the desired level 6 to 6 and enter your sel
205. eering wheel 2 On models without navigation system 3 Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system Refer to the navigation system manual 113 2011 RDX sjonuop pue suoumysuj Windshield Wipers and Washers Windshield Wiper ADJUSTMENT RING 1 MIST 2 OFF 3 INT Intermittent 4 LO Low speed 5 HI High speed 6 Windshield washers Push the right lever up or down to select a position 114 MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever OFF The wipers are not activated INT The length of the wiper interval is varied automatically according to the vehicle s speed Vary the delay by turning the adjustment ring If you turn it to the shortest delay 44 position the wipers change to low speed operation when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph 20 km h While the vehicle is stopped and in gear the wipers sweep the windshield whenever you remove your foot from the brake pedal 2011 RDX LO The wipers run at low speed HI The wipers run at high speed Windshield Washers Pull the wiper control lever toward you and hold it The washers spray until you release the lever The wipers run at low speed then complete one more sweep after you release the lever Windshield Wipers and Washers Rear Window Wiper and Washer 1 ON 2 OFF 3 Rear Window Washer with Wiper 4 Rear Window Washer Only ON Rotate the switch clockwise to
206. ehicle Identification Number see page 478 e Name and address of the dealer who services your vehicle e Date of purchase e Odometer reading of your vehicle e Your name address and telephone number e A detailed description of the problem e Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you Warranty Coverages U S Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle except for emissions control systems and accessories against defects in materials and workmanship Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicle s emissions control systems Time mileage and coverage are conditional Please read your warranty booklet for exact information Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty Please read your warranty booklet for details Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered for rust through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit Accessory Limited Warranty Acura accessories are covered under this warranty Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors Please read your warranty manual for details Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Acura replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship
207. el alignment Have your dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving A tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel When you have new tires installed make sure they are balanced This increases riding comfort and tire life For best results have the installer perform a dynamic balance NOTICE Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle s aluminum wheels Use only Acura wheel weights for balancing Tires Tire Rotation Front yi ll LI da For Non directional For Directional Tires and Wheels Tires and Wheels Front To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly rotate the tires according to the maintenance messages displayed on the multi information display Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated If you purchase directional tires rotate only front to back Replacing Tires and Wheels Replace your tires with radial tires of the same size load range speed rating and maximum cold tire pressure rating as shown on the tire s sidewall Mixing radial and bias ply tires on your vehicle can reduce braking ability traction and steering accuracy Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist system VSA to work inconsistently The ABS and VSA system work by comparing the speed of the wheels When replacing tires use the same size
208. ely placed so it will not move while you are driving Make sure the coat hook is pulled up when you are not using it This hook is not designed for large or heavy Reverse this procedure to install the items cargo area cover 2011 RDX 161 sjonuop pue s usUIn QsU 162 2011 RDX Features The climate control system in your vehicle Disc Changer Error Messages Protecting Your Discs ccsscsseseees 257 provides a comfortable driving Models without navigation Playing an iPod Models with environment in all weather conditions System arser 195 navigation system ssseesescssesseso 260 The standard audio system has many Playing an iPod Models without iPod Error Messages Models with features This section describes those navigation system sssesssssessese 197 navigation system s ssesssssessese 269 features and how to use them iPod Error Messages Models Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Your vehicle has an anti theft audio system without navigation system 203 Models with navigation that requires a code number to enable it The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your vehicle On models with navigation system The climate control system and the audio system have a voice control feature Refer to the navigation system manual for more information Climate Control System eee 164 Dual Temperature Control 169 Climate Control Sensors
209. end that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger s seat move the seat as far forward as needed and leave it unoccupied Or you may wish to get a smaller rear facing child seat A WARNING Placing a rear facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash Always place a rear facing child seat in the back seat not the front 42 Protecting Small Children 2011 RDX Child Seat Type Many states Canadian provinces and territories allow a child one year of age or older who also meets the minimum size and weight requirements to transition from a rear facing child seat to a forward facing seat Know the requirements where you are driving and follow the child seat instructions Many experts recommend use of a rear facing seat up to age two if the child s height and weight are appropriate for a rear facing seat Of the different seats available we recommend those that have a five point harness system as shown We also recommend that a small child use the child seat until the child reaches the weight or height limit for the seat Protecting Infants and Small Children Child Seat Placement We strongly recommend placing a forward facing child seat in a back seat not the front Placing a forward facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger s airbag can be hazardous If the vehicle seat is too far forward or
210. enger s side first then the driver s side To replace the rear wiper blade 2 Slide the blade out of the wiper 1 Raise the wiper arm off the rear aro window 442 2011 RDX Wiper Blades Wheels Se BLADE REINFORCEMENT Examine the new wiper blades If 4 Slide the new blade into the wiper they have no plastic or metal arm Make sure it is engaged in reinforcement along the back the slot along its full length edge remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade 5 Lower the wiper arm 2011 RDX Wheels Clean the wheels as you would the rest of the exterior Wash them with the same solution and rinse them thoroughly Aluminum alloy wheels have a protective clear coat that keeps the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing Cleaning the wheels with harsh chemicals including some commercial wheel cleaners or a stiff brush can damage the clear coat To clean the wheels use a mild detergent and a soft brush or sponge 443 aoueUD UIP Tires To safely operate your vehicle your tires must be the proper type and size in good condition with adequate tread and correctly inflated The following pages give more detailed information on how to take care of your tires and what to do when they need to be replaced A WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in whic
211. enss 358 Driving Guidelines 606 372 Driving Position Memory SYStOM sessssciessetisseateecdetineesees 148 Driving with the Paddle Shifters ss 5555806 sees sgsseciasescees 380 Dust and Pollen Filter 439 Economy Fuel ccsscceeseeeees 358 Emergencies on the Road 453 Battery Jump Starting 461 Brake System Indicator 467 468 Changing a Flat Tire 455 Charging System Indicator ccccccccseeeeees 65 465 2011 RDX Index Checking the Fuses 470 Driving with a Flat Tire 454 Hazard Warning Flashers 121 Jump Starting cc eeeeceseceees 461 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ceeeeeeeeeeeee 65 465 Malfunction Indicator LAMP sininu 65 466 Overheated Engine 463 TOWNS serorei 475 Emergency Brake cccsceee 150 Emergency Flashers 0 121 Emergency Towing c00000 475 Emissions Controls 0000 487 Emissions Testing ccccecccees 490 CONTINUED Hl Index Engine Filters Low Fuel Indicator 0 0 68 Adding Engine Coolant 424 Dust and Pollen ceeee 439 Octane Requirement 352 If it Won t Start ween 459 Oee EEN 422 Reserve Indicator 006 68 Malfunction Indicator Flashers Hazard Warning 121 Tank Filling the cceeeee 353 LAMP seeccissidicansccsissteesssee 65
212. ent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Emissions Controls The burning of gasoline in your vehicle s engine produces several by products Some of these are carbon monoxide CO oxides of nitrogen NOx and hydrocarbons HC Gasoline evaporating from the tank also produces hydrocarbons Controlling the production of NOx CO and HC is important to the environment Under certain conditions of sunlight and climate NOx and HC react to form photochemical smog Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation but it is a poisonous gas The Clean Air Act The United States Clean Air Act sets standards for automobile emissions It also requires that automobile manufacturers explain to owners how their emissions controls work and what to do to maintain them This section summarizes how the emissions controls work Scheduled maintenance is on page 418 In Canada Acura vehicles comply with the Canadian emission requirements as specified in an agreement with Environment Canada at the time they are manufactured 2011 RDX Crankcase Emissions Control System Your vehicle has a positive crankcase ventilation system This keeps gasses that build up in the engine s crankcase from going into the a
213. ep all cargo below the bottom of the windows If it is higher it could interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags Keep the glove box closed while driving If it is open a passenger could injure their knees during a crash or sudden stop Do not put any items on top of the cargo area cover They can block your view and be thrown around the vehicle during a crash 2011 RDX Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area or on a Roof Rack Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the cargo area placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible Tie down items that could be thrown about the vehicle during a crash or sudden stop If you fold the rear seats down tie down items that could be thrown about the vehicle during a crash or sudden stop Keep all cargo below the bottom of the windows If it is higher it could interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags CONTINUED 367 3umuq 20g Table of Contents Carrying Cargo e If you carry large items that Cargo Hooks Hanger Bars The hanger bars can be used to hang prevent you from closing the items The hanger bar is designed to tailgate exhaust gas can enter the hang light items maximum load 11 passenger area To avoid the Ibs or 5 kg on each side Heavy possibility of carbon monoxide items may damage the bars poisoning follow the instructions on page 57 If you carry any items on a roof rack be sure the total we
214. er unit BAD USB DEVICE PLEASE CHECK Abnormal power Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected Disconnect the Sai a Source device Then turn the audio system off and turn it on again Do not reconnect the device that caused the error iPod NO SONG No files in iPod Appears when the iPod is empty Store some files in the iPod Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected See page 262 for specification AT RTED n unsupported information on iPods If it appears when a supported iPod is connected update the iPod software to the newer version Recognition failure of Appears when the system does not CONNECT RETRY iPod acknowledge the iPod Reconnect the iPod 2011 RDX 269 soinjeoy Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models with navigation system si T Ua pa eT 1 IL ceo USB INDICATOR FOLDER TRACK TIME Haa SKIP 1 Folder 01 1 Track 01 02 35 FOLDER LIST 1 1 _Track 01 2 2 Track 02 3 3 Track 03 V AUDIO MENU U S model is shown 270 2011 RDX FILE TYPE Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models with navigation system U S model is shown AUDIO BUTTON DISC AUX BUTTON INTERFACE DIAL PWR VOL KNOB Rey eae VP _21sP vov _21sP vov SCAN BUTTON
215. er s seat Although Acura does not encourage children to ride in front if the position sensors detect a child has leaned into the side airbag s deployment path the airbag will shut off The side airbag may also shut off if a short adult leans sideways or a larger adult slouches and leans sideways into the airbag s deployment path Objects placed on the front passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off Additional Information About Your Airbags If the side airbag off indicator comes on see page 32 have the passenger sit upright Once the passenger is out of the airbag s deployment path the system will turn the airbag back on and the indicator will go out How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work There will be some delay between the moment the passenger moves into or out of the airbag deployment path and when the indicator comes on or goes off A front seat passenger should not use a cushion or other object as a backrest It may prevent the cutoff system from working properly SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG In a Side Impact In a moderate to severe side impact sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate the side curtain airbag 2011 RDX If the impact is on the passenger s side the passenger s side curtain airbag will inflate even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle In a Rollover If the rollover sensor detects your veh
216. erfere with your vehicle s computer controlled systems such as your airbags anti lock brakes and tire pressure monitoring system 2011 RDX Before installing any accessory e Make sure the accessory does not obscure any lights or interfere with proper vehicle operation or performance Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits see page 469 or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle Before installing any electronic accessory have the installer contact your dealer for assistance If possible have your dealer inspect the final installation Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the rear windows Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags Accessories and Modifications Modifying Your Vehicle Removing parts from your vehicle or replacing components with non Acura components could seriously affect your vehicle s handling stability and reliability Here are some examples e Lowering the vehicle with a non Acura suspension kit that significantly reduces ground clearance can allow the undercarriage to hit speed bumps or other raised objects which could cause the airbags to deploy e Raising your vehicle with a non Acura suspension kit can affect the handling stability and reliability e Non Acura wheels because they are a universal design can cause excessive stress on suspension compone
217. est quip e de coussins gonflables lat raux dans Y les sieges avant ainsi que de coussins gonflables LA lat raux de type rideau eas Ne vous appuyez pas sur la porte Consultez le Manuel du propriataire pour en savoir plus CD Oo FRC G g A RADIATOR CAP gt NEVER OPEN WHEN HOT Hot coolant will scald you gt N OUVREZ PAS QUAND CHAUD D NICHT BEI HEISSEM MOTOR OFFNEN DP RUST aL gt Sian Wot 59 2011 RDX Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAA 60 2011 RDX Instruments and Controls This section gives information about the controls and displays that contribute to the daily operation of your vehicle All the essential controls are within easy reach Control Locations sscceeeseeees 62 Instrument Panel ccceeeeees 63 Instrument Panel Indicators 64 GAUGES rn isea 73 Turbo Boost Meter 0006 T3 Fuel Gauge esseeesssessssssreessecssee 73 Multi Information Display 74 System Messages ccceseeeseees 79 Customized Settings 0 82 Controls Near the Steering WEE icossscis ios scncseseeseiccesevessiats 113 Windshield Wipers and WaASHNETLS scsccecesseeeessseeees 114 Rear Window Wiper and Washer ccsccccssssreecesereess 115 Turn Signals and Headlights 116 Instrument Panel Brightness 120 Rear Window Defogger 121 Hazard Warning Button
218. etected during closing increasing the risk of injury Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features Units manufactured between April 1 1982 and January 1 1993 may be equipped with safety stop and reverse features If your unit does not have an external entrapment protection system an easy test to confirm the function and performance of the safety stop and reverse feature is to lay a2 X 4 under the closing door The door should stop and reverse upon contacting the piece of wood As an additional safety feature garage door openers manufactured after January 1 1993 are required to have external entrapment protection systems such as an electronic eye which detect an object obstructing the door 2011 RDX Important Safety Precautions Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly If you do not have this information contact the manufacturer of the equipment Before programming HomeLink to a garage door or gate opener make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential injury or damage When programming a garage door opener park just outside the garage Training HomeLink Before you begin If you just received your vehicle and have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before you should erase any previously learned codes before training the first but
219. f delay cancels as soon as you direction and then stop To close the injury open either front door You must moonroof remove the obstacle then Make sure all hands and fingers then turn the ignition switch to the use the moonroof switch again are clear of the moonroof oe position for the moonroof to Auto reverse stops sensing when the before opening or closing it moonroof is almost closed You should always check that all NOTICE passengers and objects are away from the moonroof before closing it If you try to open the moonroof in below freezing temperatures or when it is covered with snow or ice you can damage the moonroof panel or motor 145 2011 RDX sjonuop pue syuoumysuj Mirrors AUTO BUTTON Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving 146 The inside mirror can automatically darken to reduce glare To turn on this feature press the button on the bottom of the mirror The AUTO indicator comes on as a reminder When it is on the mirror darkens when it senses the headlights of a vehicle behind you then returns to normal visibility when the lights are gone Press the button again to turn off this feature NOTICE There is also a sensor on the back of the mirror Items hung on the mirror may block this sensor and affect its performance On models without navigation system
220. ference It can also be affected by accessories such as antennas and roof racks that are mounted by magnets COMPASS 7 de ESE 7 AIC ON E ru A SM ae La ACURA Loom TP wom TT eu E a peee CN CLOCK eee Oz ove i RPT BUTTON cene CLAE SOUND CLOCK x BUTTON L efs fs PRESET BARS U S model is shown CONTINUED 295 2011 RDX s mM e y Compass Compass Calibration The compass may need to be manually calibrated after exposure to a strong magnetic field If the compass seems to be continually i showing the wrong direction and is oahl not self calibrating do the following NOTE Do this procedure in an open area away from buildings power lines and other vehicles 1 Press and hold the SOUND If the compass direction is blinking T T S arene ni and the CAL indicator is shown the Vou will hear a beep then th f compass is self calibrating p display will change to the compass setting mode as shown above 296 2011 RDX Compass 2 Select CAL by pressing preset 1 Compass Zone Selection to enter the calibration mode If In most areas there is a variation you want to cancel this mode between magnetic north and true north Zone selection is required so the compass can compensate for this variation To check and select the zone set into the compass do the procedure on the following pages select R by pressi
221. ffect Maintenance may be done by any qualified service facility or person who is skilled in this type of automotive service Keep all receipts as proof of completion and have the person who does the work fill out your Maintenance Journal or Canadian Maintenance Log Check your warranty booklet for more information We recommend using Acura parts and fluids whenever you have maintenance done These are manufactured to the same high quality standards as the original components so you can be confident of their performance and durability Maintenance Minder U S Vehicles According to state and federal regulations failure to perform maintenance on the items marked with will not void your emissions warranties However Acura recommends that all maintenance services be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the multi information display Owner s Maintenance Checks You should check the following items at the specified intervals If you are unsure of how to perform any check turn to the appropriate page listed e Engine oil level Check every time you fill the fuel tank See page 356 e Engine coolant level Check the radiator reserve tank every time you fill the fuel tank See page 357 e Automatic transmission Check the fluid level monthly See page 427 2011 RDX e Brakes Check the fluid level monthly See page 429 e Tires Check the tire pressur e monthly Exa
222. for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operating of the device Remote Transmitter Recalling a Memorized Driving Position When you unlock the driver s door with your remote each remote activates the keyless memory settings related to that remote The driver s ID MEMORY 1 or MEMORY 2 is shown on the back of each remote Here is the setting activated with the remote e Driving position memory see page 148 When you unlock and open the driver s door with the remote transmitter the driver s seat except the power lumbar feature and outside mirrors start to move to the positions stored in memory The indicator in the related memory button to the remote comes on 2011 RDX To turn off this feature press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time Once the remote LED blinks twice release the buttons Keyless memory settings for that remote are canceled To turn the keyless memory settings back on repeat this procedure The LED will blink once to indicate the feature has been turned on 133 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Seats Front Seat Power Adjustments See pages 13 14 for important safety information and warnings about h
223. for information on adding the proper coolant 2011 RDX Refer to Owner s Maintenance Checks on page 417 for information about checking other items on your vehicle 357 SUIALI 0g Fuel Economy Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel Economy Estimates Comparison Fuel economy is not a fixed number It varies based on driving conditions driving habits and vehicle condition Therefore it is not possible for one set of estimates to predict fuel economy precisely for all drivers in all environments The EPA fuel economy estimates shown in the example to the right are a useful tool for comparison when buying a vehicle EPA estimates include City MPG Represents urban driving in a vehicle in light traffic A range of miles per gallon achieved is also provided Highway MPG Represents a mixture of rural and interstate driving in a warmed up vehicle typical of longer trips in free flowing traffic A range of miles per gallon achieved is also provided 358 based on 15 000 miles at 2 80 per gallon City MPG EPA Fuel Economy Estimates Highway MPG These estimates reflect new EPA methods beginning with 2008 models CITY MPG HIGHWAY MPG d 8 Estimated 2 5 Annual Fuel Cost 2 039 Expected rang spected range range tor most drivers 15 to 21 MPG Combined Fuel Economy This Vehicle 21 Combined Fuel Estimated Annual Economy Fuel Cost Sample U S EPA label shown Combined Fuel Economy Estimated
224. from driving Place the flat tire on the ground with the outside surface facing up CONTINUED 457 2011 RDX pepedxouy op jo 31 Surely Changing a Flat Tire Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants Store the wheel jack and tools securely before driving For spare For normal tire tire 18 Reinstall the cargo area floor and close the tailgate 19 Your vehicle s original tire has a 13 Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 15 Remove the center cap from the ras tire pressure monitoring system the same crisscross pattern Have flat tire and store it in the cargo T l f the wheel nut torque checked at area Changing aren a a e e automotive service 16 Place the flat tire face up in the page 394 cargo area Tighten the wheel nuts to 80 Ibf ft 108 N m 11 kgf m 14 Store the jack in its holder Turn the jack s end bracket to lock it in place Store the tools 17 Secure the flat tire by screwing the wing bolt back into its hole 458 2011 RDX If the Engine Won t Start Diagnosing why the engine won t start falls into two areas depending on what you hear when you turn the ignition switch to the START ID position e You hear nothing or almost nothing The engine s starter motor does not operate at all or operates very slowly e You can hear the starter motor operating normally or the starter motor sounds like it is sp
225. ft Mode When you are driving in the D position pulling either paddle shifter switches from the ordinary automatic transmission drive mode D to the D paddle shift mode You can shift the transmission up or down manually with the paddle shifters Downshifting gives you more power when climbing and provides engine braking when going down a steep hill 380 To shift up or down use the right or left paddle shifter on either side of the steering wheel 2011 RDX Ne ly GEAR POSITION INDICATOR Each time you pull right the transmission shifts to a higher gear Pull eft to downshift You will see the selected gear number on the instrument panel When you pull either paddle shifter the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number Driving with the Paddle Shifters The transmission control system monitors the accelerator pedal use and your driving conditions When you press the accelerator pedal as in normal driving the system judges that you are driving at a constant cruising speed without using the paddle shifters Under these conditions D paddle shift mode is canceled and the transmission automatically returns to drive mode D When the transmission returns to drive mode D the displayed gear number disappears The transmission remains in the selected gear if you do not accelerate Each time you pull either paddle shifter the transmission s
226. g the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals For more information see page 20 You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message on the multi information display Instrument Panel Indicators Malfunction Indicator Lamp You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi information display For more information see page 466 ay Low Oil Pressure Indicator The engine can be severely damaged if this indicator flashes or stays on when the engine is running For more information see page 465 You will also see a OIL PRESSURE LOW message on the multi information display see page 79 C4 If this indicator comes on when the engine is running the battery is not being charged and you will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi information display For more information see page 465 Charging System Indicator A T Temperature Indicator This indicator monitors the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid If it comes on while driving it means the transmission fluid temperature is too high Pull to the side of the road when it is safe shift to Park and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out You will also see a CHECK TRANSMISSION message on the multi information display see page 80 NOTICE Continuing to drive with the A T temperatur
227. g a USB Flash Memory Device Models with navigation system NOTE Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as the device or your files may be damaged Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a hub Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle Do not keep a USB flash memory device in the vehicle Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device Depending on the type and number of files it may take some time before they begin to play Depending on the software the files were made with it may not be possible to play some files or display some text data Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter if this is the case use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device Depending on the type of encoding and writing software used there may be cases where character information does not display properly 2011 RDX Voice Control System You can select the AUX mode by using the navigation system voice control buttons but cannot operate the play mode functions CONTINUED 273 soinjeoy Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models with navigation system Connecting a USB Flash Memory Device USB ADAPTER CABLE 1 Push the release button to release the USB adapter cable 274 USB ADAPTER CABLE 2 Connect the USB flash memory devi
228. g the HOO ses cssccssssessussestssesssssventes 355 OU Chetk isirssessicsensssn 356 Engine Coolant Check 357 Fuel Economy ccsccesseeeeseeeees 358 Accessories and Modifications cccceeeeeeeees 362 Carrying Cargo ccscsccesssseceessees 364 351 SUIALI ag Break in Period Fuel Recommendation Break in Period Help assure your vehicle s future reliability and performance by paying extra attention to how you drive during the first 600 miles 1 000 km During this period e Avoid full throttle starts and rapid acceleration e Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles 300 km e Do not change the oil until the scheduled maintenance time e Do not tow atrailer You should also follow these recommendations with an overhauled or exchanged engine or when the brakes are replaced 352 Fuel Recommendation Your vehicle is designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 91 or higher If this octane grade is unavailable regular unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 87 or higher may be used temporarily The use of regular unleaded gasoline can cause metallic knocking noises in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance The long term use of regular grade gasoline can lead to engine damage NOTICE Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter
229. g this button also turns the rear window defogger on and off CONTINUED 147 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Mirrors Driving Position Memory System This heated mirror function has a timer see page 121 148 Driving Position Memory System Your vehicle has a memory feature for the driver s seat and outside mirror positions Seat except for power lumbar and outside mirror positions can be stored in separate memories You select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate button or using the appropriate remote transmitter Memory 1 or Memory 2 2011 RDX Storing a Driving Position in Memory Store a driving position only when the vehicle is parked 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON qI position You cannot add a new driving position to the memory unless the ignition switch is in the ON ID position You can recall a memorized position with the ignition switch in any position Adjust the seat to a comfortable position see page 134 Adjust the outside mirrors for best visibility see page 146 bo Driving Position Memory System Se SET BUTTON MEMORY BUTTONS Press and release the SET button on the driver s door You will hear a beep Immediately press and hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2 until you hear two beeps The indicator in the memory button will come on The current positions of the driver s seat and outside mirrors are now stored To cancel the storing procedure
230. ghlight menu items When you make a selection push the center of the selector ENTER to go to that selection You can operate the audio system with the control buttons on the CD changer unit without displaying the audio control display on the navigation display The audio setting will be shown on the upper display 2011 RDX Voice Control System The audio system for your vehicle can also be operated by voice control See the navigation system manual for complete details Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system RADIO BAND PRESET NUMBER UPPER DISPLAY TEMP SCAN J L 1I toot 1 SCAN INDICATOR STEREO A SEL INDICATOR INDICATOR STEREO niini m VOL 11 Faa SEEK A FM2 SEEK gt 90 5 92 9 96 1 94 5 34 1 6 96 9 V AUDIO MENU AUDIO CONTROL DISPLAY U S model is shown CONTINUED 217 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system U S model is shown PASSENGER AIRBAG meam AUDIO BUTTON INTERFACE DIAL Rey adu 2 SCAN a M awry hen vane fe ANT THEFT 6 DISC C HANGER AM FM BUTTON SEEK SKIP BAR TUNE FOLDER BAR PRESET BUTTONS 218 2011 RDX Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system To Play the Radio The ignition switch must be
231. greatest risk Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual Don t Drink and Drive Alcohol and driving don t mix Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink So don t drink and drive and don t let your friends drink and drive either Important Safety Precautions Pay Appropriate Attention to the Task of Driving Safely Engaging in mobile phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road other vehicles and pedestrians could lead to a crash Remember situations can change quickly and only you can decide when it is safe to divert attention away from driving Control Your Speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths Generally the higher the speed the greater the risk but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions regardless of the maximum speed posted 2011 RDX Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous To reduce the possibility of such problems check your tire pressures and condition frequently and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance see page 444 Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAA Your Vehicle s Safety Features Your vehicle is equipped with many 8 9 6 12 4 3 9 4 6 features
232. gs Those you should be aware of are described below TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE 4 3 2 1 Tire Size 2 Tire Identification Number TIN 3 Maximum Tire Pressure 4 Maximum Tire Load 484 Tire Size Whenever tires are replaced they should be replaced with tires of the same size Below is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means P235 55R18 99V P Vehicle type P indicates passenger vehicle 235 Tire width in millimeters 55 Aspect ratio the tire s section height as a percentage of its width R Tire construction code R indicates radial 18 Rim diameter in inches 99 Load index a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry V Speed symbol an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating 2011 RDX Tire Identification Number TIN The tire identification number TIN is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire DOT B97R FW6X 2202 DOT This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U S Department of Transportation B97R Manufacturer s identification mark FW6X Tire type code 2202 Date of manufacture year week Tire Labeling Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Required Federal Explanation Glossary of Tire Terminology Cold Tire Pressure The tire air press
233. h Audio Files Thott A Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to the HFL Press the CD AUX button with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY M or ON ID position When the phone is recognized you will see the Bluetooth Audio message and indicator on the center display and the system begins to play 2011 RDX If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system there will be delay before the system begins to play To begin to play the audio files you may need to operate your phone If so follow the phone maker s operating instructions x If an iPod USB flash memory device or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode you will see iPod USB or AUX in the center display Push the CD AUX button again to play audio files from your Bluetooth Audio phone CONTINUED 213 soinjeoy Bluetooth Audio System Models without navigation system In the following conditions If you cannot see the Bluetooth indicator on the center display e The phone is not linked to HFL e The phone is not turned on e The phone is not in the vehicle e Another HFL compatible phone which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio is already connected If your Bluetooth Audio compatible phone does not operate as described make sure it is an Acura approved phone To find out if your phone is approved go to www acura com handstreelink in Canada www acura ca or cal
234. h front door comes on when the door is opened and goes out when the door is closed Your vehicle also has a courtesy light in the ignition switch This light comes on when you e Open any door e Unlock the driver s door e Remove the key from the ignition switch After all doors are closed tightly the light fades out in about 30 seconds To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME setting see page 98 2011 RDX Cargo Area Light The cargo area light has a two position switch In the OFF right position the light does not come on In the ON left position the light comes on when you open the tailgate 153 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Interior Convenience Items COAT HOOK DOOR LINING FRONT DOOR BEVERAGE SUN VISOR POCKETS POCKET HOLDERS VANITY MIRROR CENTER CARGO AREA COVER SS POCKET AUXILIARY INPUT JACK BEVERAGE HOLDERS in GLOVE BOX REAR SEAT ARMREST CENTER CONSOLE USB ADAPTER CABLE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS 154 2011 RDX Interior Convenience Items Glove Box AWARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in acrash even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt Always keep the glove box closed while driving The glove box light comes on when the parking lights are on Open the glove box by pulling the handle to the left Close it with a firm push Lock or unlock the glove box with the master key 2011
235. h memory device Use of unsupported USB flash memory device UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported device is connected See page 205 for information on USB flash memory devices If it appears when the supported device is connected reconnect the device 2011 RDX 211 soinjeoy Bluetooth Audio System Models without navigation system BLUETOOTH INDICATOR b pur AN th TEMP PASSENGER RBAG acm ACURA teed a Ia P CD AUX BUTTON SEEK SKIP BAR GEE N ER PWR VOL KNOB 3 PRESET 1 BUTTON eee j U S model is shown 212 2011 RDX Bluetooth Audio System Models without navigation system Your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth Audio system which allows you to listen to streaming audio from your Bluetooth Audio compatible phone This function is only available on Bluetooth Audio Compatible phones that are paired and linked to the vehicle s Bluetooth HandsFreeLink HFL system see page 313 Not all Bluetooth enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system You can find an approved phone by visiting www acura com handstreelink or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1 888 528 7876 In Canada visit www acura ca or call 1 888 9 ACURA 9 NOTE In some states it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving To Play Bluetoot
236. h you can be seriously hurt or killed Follow all instructions in this owner s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance 444 Inflation Guidelines Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best combination of handling tread life and riding comfort e Underinflated tires wear unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated e Overinflated tires can make your vehicle ride more harshly are more prone to damage from road hazards and wear unevenly The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS will warn you when a tire pressure is low See page 390 for information on the TPMS 2011 RDX Even though your vehicle is equipped with TPMS we recommend that you visually check your tires every day If you think a tire might be low check it immediately with a tire gauge Use a gauge to measure the air pressure in each tire at least once a month Even tires that are in good condition may lose 1 to 2 psi 10 to 20 kPa 0 1 to 0 2 kgf cm per month Remember to check the spare tire at the same time Check the air pressures when the tires are cold This means the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km Add or release air if needed to match the recommended cold tire pressures Tires If you check air pressures when the tires are hot driven for several miles kilometers you will see readings 4 to
237. he beginning of the first track file Gn MP3 WMA mode on the next disc then play that track file CURRENT DISC Select the changer by pressing the DISC AUX button You will see the CD on the upper display The system will begin playing the last selected CD in the CD changer If you want to see the list of the discs in the CD changer press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display You will see the current disc position highlighted 244 2011 RDX EMPTY POSITION To select a disc press an appropriate preset button 1 6 or select an appropriate preset icon by rotating the interface dial then press ENTER on the interface selector If you select an empty position No Disc is shown in the CD changer the system will load a CD into the empty slot see page 243 Playing Discs Models with navigation system Playing an MP3 WMA Disc The CD changer can also play CD Rs and CD RWs compressed in MP3 and WMA format When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA you will see MP3 or WMA on the upper display A disc can support more than 99 folders and each folder can hold up to 255 playable files When there are more than 99 folders on a disc the upper display only shows two digits NOTE If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is protected by digital rights management DRM the audio unit displays FORMAT and then skips to the next file When playing
238. her strap is too long and cannot be tightened firmly find a route where the strap can be tightened securely Protecting Larger Children When a child reaches the recommended weight or height limit for a forward facing child seat the child should sit in a back seat on a booster seat and wear a lap shoulder belt The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed and important precautions for a child who must sit in front AWARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger s front airbag inflates If a child must ride in front move the vehicle seat as far back as possible use a booster seat if needed have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly 2011 RDX Checking Seat Belt Fit To determine if a lap shoulder belt properly fits a child have the child put on the seat belt then ask yourself 1 Does the child sit all the way back against the seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat CONTINUED 53 Ayoyes Josuesse q pur TAA Protecting Larger Children 3 Does the shoulder belt cross between the child s neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs 5 Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip If you answer yes to all these quest
239. hicle 455 Fuel Fill Door anen 353 Lamp aerer 65 466 Jack Dire c2 dscssscevesdesavecseivebovsess 455 Glove BOX ceccccccccccccceeecccceseececee 155 Memory Driving Position 148 Jump Starting 00 eeeceeeeees 461 Lockout Prevention oec 127 Meters Gauges ccccceeseeceeeeee T3 Power Door cccecessessesseeseeees 126 Methanol in Gasoline 352 VI 2011 RDX Index Mirrors Adjusting cscccee 146 Modifications cccceeeceeeeeeeee 363 Modifying Your Vehicle 363 MOonrof cccccsessssereceeeseeseees 144 Multi Information Display 74 Neutral Gear Position 377 New Vehicle Breakin 352 NOTICE Explanation of i Numbers Identification 478 pe EC Octane Requirement Gasoline woe eeecceeessseeceesseeeeees 352 Odometer ssesseesesesessereesseseeseessssse 76 Odometer Trip seesseeessessssesseerssee 76 Off Highway Driving Guidelines soosoeeeeeeesesseeeeeese 405 Off Road Precautions 5 405 Oil Change How to cccessseees 422 Change When to ccsceeee 411 Checking Engine 08 356 Life Engine cccesesssseeeeeees 411 Pressure Indicator 65 465 Selecting Proper Viscosity CHALE moser orr cece sterce ec 420 Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery cses veisscesdesdsinnessecasties 488
240. hicle axle is 4WD 2 546 Ibs 1 155 kg on the front axle 2 381 Ibs 1 080 kg on the rear axle 2WD 2 447 Ibs 1 110 kg on the front axle 2 271 Ibs 1 030 kg on the rear axle Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR The maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle and trailer is 4WD 6 394 Ibs 2 900 kg 2WD 4 718 Ibs 2 140 kg Towing a Trailer Checking Loads The best way to confirm that all loads are within limits is to check them at a public scale For public scales in your area check your local phone book or contact your trailer dealer or rental agency for assistance If you cannot get to a public scale you can estimate the total trailer weight by adding the weight of your trailer as quoted by the manufacturer with everything in or on the trailer If you normally pull the same load each time you tow a trailer you can use a suitable scale or a special tongue load gauge to check the tongue load the first time you set up a towing combination a fully loaded vehicle and trailer then recheck the tongue load whenever the conditions change Towing Equipment and Accessories Towing can require a variety of equipment depending on the size of your trailer how it will be used how much load you are towing and where you tow Discuss your needs with your trailer sales or rental agency and follow the guidelines in this section Also make sure that all equipment is properly installe
241. hifts one gear up or down If you want to shift up or down more than two gears pull the paddle shifter twice pause and then pull it again The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if e You downshift before the engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower gear If you try to do this the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times then return to a higher gear e You upshift before the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher gear You pull both paddle shifters at the same time e You pull one of the two paddle shifters while continuously pulling on the other one 2011 RDX The transmission downshifts to first gear and returns to drive mode D when the vehicle comes to a complete stop or the vehicle speed is about 6 mph 10 km h If there is a problem in the transmission while you are driving with the paddle shifters the D indicator flashes the D paddle shift mode is canceled and the transmission returns to drive mode D CONTINUED 381 Sunna Driving with the Paddle Shifters Using the Paddle Shifters in the S position Sequential Shift Mode With the shift lever in the S position you can select the sequential shift mode to shift gears much like a manual transmission using the paddle shifters but without a clutch pedal To enter the sequential shift mode press the release button on the front of the shif
242. his happens pull to the side of the road when it is safe check which tire has lost pressure on the multi information display and determine the cause If it is because of a flat tire have the flat tire repaired as soon as possible If two or more tires are underinflated call a professional towing service For more information see page 475 CONTINUED 71 sjonuop pue syuoumysuj Instrument Panel Indicators 2 If this indicator begins to flash System Message there is a problem with the tire Indicator pressure monitoring system TPMS You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi information display The indicator continues to flash for a while approximately 1 This indicator comes on when there is a system message on the multi information display Press the INFO button on the steering wheel see page 74 to see the message see minute then stays on If this page 81 happens have your dealer check Most of the time this indicator the system as soon as possible comes on along with other indicators For more information see page in the instrument panel such as the 393 seat belt reminder indicator SRS indicator VSA system indicator etc 72 2011 RDX Gauges Turbo Boost Meter When the turbo charger is activated this meter shows the boost pressure U S model is shown SPEEDOMETER Fuel Gauge This shows how much fuel you have It may show slightly more or less than the actua
243. honebook and a list of imported phonebooks will be displayed Select a phonebook you want to delete If the phonebook is PIN protected you will need to enter the 4 digit PIN number 326 After making a selection the following screen will appear This will delete the imported phonebook for the currently linked phone Would you like to continue Yes No Select Yes then OK to complete the deletion 2011 RDX PIN Number You can add change or remove a PIN number from any phonebook Enter your new PIN B 9 es V DO NOT USE PIN To add a PIN If you have selected a phonebook without a PIN you will see the above display Enter the new 4 digit PIN You will have to re enter the PIN for confirmation Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To change the PIN to a new number Enter your current PIN Select the phonebook you want The display will change as shown above Enter the current PIN for this phonebook To remove a PIN Select PIN number then select Do not use PIN after you enter Enter your new PIN the current PIN aX 97 ae Vo NOT USE PIN The display will change as shown above Enter the new 4 digit PIN number You will be asked to re enter the PIN for verification CONTINUED 327 2011 RDX soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink System Setup This command group allows y
244. ial truck on an east west road Driving in tunnels Driving on a road beside a vertical wall steep cliff or hill to the south of you Driving on the lower level of a multi tiered road Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft 15 m to the south of you There may also be other geographic situations or structures that could affect satellite radio reception 184 As required by the FCC Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Receiving XM Radio Service If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM radio With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY 1 or the ON II position push the PWR VOL knob to turn on the audio system and press the xm button A variety of music types and styles will play If you decide to purchase XM Radio service contact XM Radio at www xmradio com or at 1 800 852 9696 In Canada contact XM CANADA at www xmradio ca or at 1 877 209 0079 Youwill need to give them your radio I D number and your credit card number To get your radio I D number turn the TUNE knob until 0 appears in the display Your I D will appear in the display 2011 RDX After you ve registered with XM Radio keep your audio system in the satellite radio mode
245. ical short If the Engine Overheats The reading of the vehicle s temperature gauge on the multi information display should stay in the midrange If it climbs to the H Hot mark you should determine the reason hot day driving up a steep hill etc If the coolant temperature rises to 224 F 118 C or more the temperature gauge will appear on the display and blink for several times At the same time the beeper will sound once If your vehicle overheats you should take immediate action The only indication may be the temperature gauge climbing to the H Hot mark Or you may see steam or spray coming from under the hood NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge reading at the H Hot mark can cause serious damage to the engine Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you Do not open the hood if steam is coming out Safely pull to the side of the road Put the transmission in Park and set the parking brake Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights 2011 RDX 2 If you see steam and or spray coming from under the hood turn off the engine Wait until you see no more signs of steam or spray then open the hood oo If you do not see steam or spray leave the engine running and watch the temperature gauge If the high heat is due to overloading the engine should start to cool down almost immediately If it does wait until
246. ications cccssceeesseees 481 Wheel isisisi 122 Tools Tire Changing 455 Tachometer s sseesesrsseeeesrereeesonee 3 time Setting the 293 To Play the Radio 174 DAU ALC oreren een ey 128 Tire Chai 449 Towi Goethe ne 128 ire CHAINS ssseesersrssseosrsnsees owing Tire How to Change a Flat 455 A Trailen proininnin 397 Open Monitor esesesssseesesessseee 12 a Tire Information cccceeeeeeees 484 Emergency Wrecker 006 475 Taillights Changing Bulbs in 433 x Tire Labeling cccsssceseseees 484 Equipment and Accessories 399 Taking Care of the z ae Tire Pressure Monitoring System Trailer Towing Tips 04 401 Unexpected ccccesssssseceeeees 453 rate ARE IPMS asise susters 390 485 Weight Limit disssicoecsrsets ossei 397 Technical Descriptions 3 a es gt Low Tire Pressure Indicator 71 TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring DOT Tire Quality Grading U S Tire P Moni 78 301 S 390 Vehicles o an 482 ae He ressure Monitor vr Peed ee E Emissions Control Systems 487 A pressure gas Explanation sun 485 CAINS E EEE 449 2011 RDX Index Transmission Vehicle Capacity Load 365 Windows Checking Fluid Level 427 Vehicle Dimensions 480 Auto Reverse scccccssseseeseeee 143 Fluid Selection cceceeees 427
247. ice control buttons but cannot operate the play mode functions CONTINUED 283 soinjeoy Bluetooth Audio System Models with navigation system To skip a file Press the gt gt I side of the SKIP bar to skip forward to the next file and press the I4 side to skip backward to the beginning of the current file Push the 4 side again to skip to the previous file You can also operate the skip function with the interface dial on the audio control display of the navigation screen Push the AUDIO button Each time you push the selector on the interface dial to the right the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file Push it to the left to skip backward to the beginning of the current file Push the selector to the left again to skip to the previous file 284 To pause or resume a file P902iS Bluetooth AUDIO For more information on this function go to www acura com handsfreel ink RESUME PAUSE 7 The resume pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily Push down the selector on the interface dial to display the audio menu 2011 RDX Turn the knob on the interface dial to switch the setting between the resume pause mode and the sound mode Select RESUME PAUSE then press ENTER to set your selection Each time you press ENTER the system switches between the resume mode and pause mode NOTE The pause function may not be available on some phone devices Bl
248. icle is about to roll over it signals the control unit which immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners The airbag on the passenger s side will deploy and the seat belt tensioner will activate even if there are no passengers on that side of the vehicle To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats 31 Ayoyes Jesuesseg pur PAA Additional Information About Your Airbags How the SRS Indicator Works e The SRS indicator alerts ry you to a potential problem with your airbag system components When you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position this indicator comes on for several seconds then goes off This tells you the system is working properly If the indicator comes on at any other time or does not come on at all you should have the system checked by your dealer For example e Ifthe SRS indicator does not come on after you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position e If the indicator stays on after the engine starts e If the indicator comes on or flashes on and off while you drive 32 You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 80 If you see any of these indications the airbag system components may not work properly when you need them A WARNING Ignoring the SRS i
249. ide curtain airbag inflates a cup holder or other hard object attached on or near the door could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone Do not cover or replace front seat back covers without consulting your dealer Improperly replacing or covering front seat back covers can prevent your side airbags from inflating during a side impact 19 Jes Josuesse q pur PAA Additional Information About Your Seat Belts Seat Belt System Components Your seat belt system includes lap shoulder belts in all seating positions The front seat belts are also equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners 20 kK The seat belt system m _ includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts This system monitors the front seat belts If you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position before your seat belt is fastened the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash If your seat belt is not fastened before the beeper stops the indicator will stop flashing but remain on If a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt the indicator will come on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON dD position 2011 RDX If either the driver or a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt while driving the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals In addition to the seat belt remin
250. ife is shown on the display according to this table Calculated Engine Displayed Oil Life Engine Oil Life 100 91 90 81 100 80 71 70 61 60 51 50 41 40 31 30 21 20 16 15 11 10 6 10 5 1 5 0 0 CONTINUED 411 IDULUJQJUIE IN Maintenance Minder SERVICE DUE SOON Al MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE S When the remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent the multi information display shows a SERVICE DUE SOON message along with the maintenance schedule code indicating the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change Refer to page 418 for a complete list of the maintenance main items and sub items 412 SERVICE A DUE NOW Al When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1 percent the multi information display shows a SERVICE DUE NOW message with the same maintenance items SERVICE DUE SOON was displayed with When you see this message have the indicated maintenance performed as soon as possible 2011 RDX INST MPG 20 40 TT OIL LIFE 5 SERVICE Press the SEL RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life The message SERVICE along with 5 and the maintenance item code are displayed on the lower part of the multi information display when the calculated engine oil life i
251. ight of the rack and the items does not exceed 110 Ibs 50 kg To secure the cargo you can use the four cargo hooks in the cargo area The illustration shows the location of each cargo hook The cargo hooks on the floor can be used to install the cargo net for securing items 368 2011 RDX Carrying Cargo Optional Cargo Net The cargo net can be used to help hold down light items in the cargo area The cargo net may not prevent heavy items from being thrown forward in a crash or a sudden stop Heavy items should be secured to the cargo area floor with the hooks or cinch straps attached to the cargo hooks 2011 RDX 369 SUIALI ag 370 2011 RDX Driving This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines c606 372 starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive cc ce 373 conditions and how to operate the Starting the Engine 00 374 automatic transmission It also Automatic Transmission 376 includes important information on Driving with the Paddle parking your vehicle the braking SHIMErS secs ssessedsesedsessecesesdeeeaess 380 system the Super Handling All Super Handling All Wheel Wheel Drive SH AWD system Drive SH AWD the vehicle stability assist VSA SYSTEM c5cdceseeescaeeseteceesces 384 system the tire pressure monitoring Parkini rsrsr osexeenseasteetisesse 386 system TPMS and facts you need Braking System ccs
252. ild seat in the rear center seating position use the center LATCH as shown in the illustration To install a child seat in the outer seating position use either LATCH You can install up to two child seat at a time with outer LATCH 46 2011 RDX Using the Outer LATCH OUTER LOWER ANCHORS To install a LATCH compatible child seat in either of the rear outer seats 1 Move the seat belt buckle or tongue away from the lower anchors bo Make sure there are no objects near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors Installing a Child Seat Rigid type 3 Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the child seat maker s instructions Some LATCH compatible seats have a rigid type connector as shown above Flexible type Other LATCH compatible seats have a flexible type connector as shown above 4 Whatever type you have follow the child seat maker s instructions for adjusting or tightening the fit 5 Remove the cargo area cover and place it on the cargo area floor See page 160 2011 RDX TETHER STRAP 6 Lift the head restraint see page 135 then route the tether strap through the legs of the head restraint and over the seat back making sure the strap is not twisted CONTINUED 47 Ayoyes Jesuesseg pur PAA Installing a Child Seat TETHER STRAP HOOK ANCH
253. ile it first started scanning with scan is canceled and the system begins to play that track file normally CONTINUED 249 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models with navigation system SCAN INDICATOR TRACK SCAN ICON To activate the scan feature on the audio control display press the AUDIO button to view the display Push down the selector on the interface dial then push the selector to the left You will see SCAN next to the TRACK icon on the audio control display To turn off this feature push the selector to the left again within 10 seconds 250 In MP3 WMA mode FOLDER SCAN The folder scan function samples the first file of each folder on the current disc in the order they are compressed in MP3 To activate this feature press the SCAN button twice The first file of each folder plays for about 10 seconds You will see FOLDER SCAN next to disc number on the audio control display You will also see SCAN and the folder number blinking on the upper display To hear the rest of the file in the folder currently scanning press and hold the SCAN button for more than 2 seconds 2011 RDX SCAN INDICATOR TRACK SCAN waits See AX poo 5 Ono Disc Eee DISC SCAN P If you don t the system advances to the next folder plays about 10 seconds of it and continues through the rest of the f
254. in the ACCESSORY D or the ON dD position Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display Turn the system on by pressing the PWR VOL knob or the AM FM button Adjust the volume by turning the PWR VOL knob The band and frequency the radio was last tuned to are shown on the upper display To change bands press the AM FM button You can also change bands with the interface dial Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display and the band changes to FM1 FM2 or AM each time you push the selector up On the FM bands STEREO will be shown on the audio control display ST will also appear on the upper display if the station is broadcasting in stereo Stereo reproduction on AM is not available XM Radio information is available on page 228 2011 RDX To Select a Station You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band TUNE SEEK SCAN the preset buttons or icons and AUTO SELECT TUNE Use the TUNE FOLDER bar to tune the radio to a desired frequency Press the B side of the bar to tune to a higher frequency and the lt 4 side of the bar to tune to a lower frequency If you press and hold the lt 4 or BR side of the bar the frequency will begin to change rapidly It will stop when you release it CONTINUED 219 soinjeoy Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system LS 98 1 Is 161
255. ing a hub Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle Do not keep a USB flash memory device in the vehicle Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it 206 e We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device e Depending on the type and number of files it may take some time before they begin to play e Depending on the software the files were made with it may not be possible to play some files or display some text data e Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter if this is the case use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device 2011 RDX Depending on the type of encoding and writing software used there may be cases where character information does not display properly Even if recorded in MP3 WMA or AAC format unsupported files cannot be played If the system finds an unsupported file the screen displays UNPLAYABLE and then skips to the next file Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models without navigation system Connecting a USB Flash Memory Device USB ADAPTER CABL 1 Push the release button to release the USB adapter cable USB ADAPTER CABLE 2 Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely When the USB flash memory device is connected the USB indicator is shown in the center display 2011 RDX Text Data Display Function Each time yo
256. ing into the engine It then controls how much fuel to inject under all operating conditions Ignition Timing Control System This system constantly adjusts the ignition timing reducing the amount of HC CO and NOx produced Three Way Catalytic Converter The three way catalytic converter is in the exhaust system Through chemical reactions it converts HC CO and NOx in the engine s exhaust to carbon dioxide CO2 nitrogen N2 and water vapor 2011 RDX Replacement Parts The emissions control systems are designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to levels that comply with the Clean Air Act To make sure the emissions remain low you should use only new Acura replacement parts or their equivalent for repairs Using lower quality parts may increase the emissions from your vehicle The emissions control systems are covered by warranties separate from the rest of your vehicle Read your warranty manual for more information Three Way Catalytic Converter The three way catalytic converters contain precious metals that serve as catalysts promoting chemical reactions to convert the exhaust gasses without affecting the metals The catalytic converters are referred to as three way catalysts since they act on HC CO and NOx Replacement units must be original Acura parts or their equivalent The three way catalytic converter must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take
257. ing the XM Radio Models with navigation system Note Function If equipped This function stores the sound content played on the selected XM radio station with the channel category name and title information To activate this function press and hold the xm button for about 2 seconds while a song or passage which you want to store is playing The function records for about 10 seconds enough for you to identify the selection when you play it back Once you store the recorded sound file you can replay it and confirm the information The system can store up to 30 sound files If you continue to store more information the oldest one will be deleted each time you add new information NOTE ICON 007 EEEE FFFF GGGG 022 CCC al 007EEEE 2 To replay and see the stored information press the AUDIO button to select the audio control display Push down the selector knob to display the audio menu Turn the selector knob to select NOTE then press ENTER 2011 RDX AUDIO MENU SOUND FILE RECORDED DATE Turn the selector knob to select a sound file then press ENTER The audio control display shows the category name and title information of the selected file CONTINUED 237 soinjeoy Playing the XM Radio Models with navigation system Select an option Delete Selected Ite
258. inning faster than normal but the engine does not start up and run Nothing Happens or the Starter Motor Operates Very Slowly When you turn the ignition switch to the START III position you do not hear the normal noise of the engine trying to start You may hear a clicking sound a series of clicks or nothing at all Check these things e Check the transmission interlock The transmission must be in Park or neutral or the starter will not operate e Turn the ignition switch to the ON dI position Turn on the headlights and check their brightness If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all the battery is discharged See Jump Starting on page 461 2011 RDX e Turn the ignition switch to the START ID position If the headlights do not dim check the condition of the fuses If the fuses are OK there is probably something wrong with the electrical circuit for the ignition switch or starter motor You will need a qualified mechanic to determine the problem see Emergency Towing on page 475 If the headlights dim noticeably or go out when you try to start the engine either the battery is discharged or the connections are corroded Check the condition of the battery and terminal connections see page 450 You can then try jump starting the vehicle from a booster battery see page 461 pop dx un et Jo SULL CONTINUED 459 If the Engine Won t Start The Starter Operates Normally e Are
259. intaining your vehicle You must use your own good judgement You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms including e Safety Labels on the vehicle e Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol N and one of three signal words DANGER WARNING or CAUTION These signal words mean A You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY A DANGER HURT if you don t follow instructions You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY AWATNNS HURT if you don t follow instructions A CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don t follow instructions e Safety Headings such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions e Safety Section such as Driver and Passenger Safety e Instructions how to use this vehicle correctly and safely This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it carefully 2011 RDX Important Handling Information Your RDX has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off highway driving It allows you to travel over bumps obstacles and rough terrain It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier These advantages come at some cost Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground it has a high center of gravity This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollo
260. ion of the tires and the tire pressures Remember The route presents limits too steep or bumpy roads You have limits driving skill and comfort And your vehicle has limits traction stability and power Driving off highway can be hazardous if you fail to recognize limits and take the proper precautions 406 Accelerating and Braking For better traction on all surfaces accelerate slowly and gradually build up speed If you try to start too fast on wet soil mud snow or ice you might not have enough traction to get underway and you may dig yourself a hole Starting with the shift lever in the D position will help you have a smoother start on snow or ice Keep in mind that you will usually need more time and distance to brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces Avoid hard braking Do not pump the brakes let the anti lock braking system pump them for you 2011 RDX Avoiding Obstacles Debris in the road can damage your suspension or other components Because your vehicle has a high center of gravity driving over a large obstacle or allowing a wheel to drop into a deep hole can cause your vehicle to tip or roll over Driving on Slopes If you can t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope walk the slope before you drive on it If you have any doubt whether or not you can safely drive on the slope don t do it Find another route If you are driving up a hill and find that you cannot continue
261. ion that there is an When there is an incoming call or incoming call or HFL is in use will HFL is in use HANDSFREELINK appear on the navigation screen will appear on the audio display When the gudio egoten ia i The Bluetooth indicator amp will also appear on the audio display when a phone is linked CONTINUED 309 2011 RDX s mM e y Bluetooth HandsFreeLink How to Use HFL The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY I or ON ID position Press HFL _ Talk button Pair Edit 46 Phone Setup Delete List Status Next Phone Set Pairing Code Pair a phone to the system See page 313 Edit the name of a paired phone See page 314 Delete a paired phone from the system See page 314 Hear a list of all phones paired to the system See page 314 Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system See page 315 Search for another previously paired phone to link to See page 315 Set the pairing code to a Fixed or Random number See page 315 Call or Dial 123 555 Enter desired phone number See page 316 Jim Smith Once a phonebook entry is stored you can say a name here See page 316 S Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command 310
262. ioned Supervise the child Even mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly 56 Additional Safety Precautions Do not let a child wear a seat belt across the neck This could result in serious neck injuries during a crash Do not let a child put the shoulder part ofa seat belt behind the back or under the arm This could cause very serious injuries during a crash It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a crash and be injured Two children should never use the same seat belt If they do they could be very seriously injured in a crash 2011 RDX e Do not put any accessories on a seat belt Devices intended to improve a child s comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can make the belt less effective and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash Carbon Monoxide Hazard Your vehicle s exhaust contains carbon monoxide gas Carbon monoxide should not enter the vehicle in normal driving if you maintain your vehicle properly and follow the information on this page Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever e The vehicle is raised for an oil change e You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust e The vehicle was in a collision that may have damaged the underside AWARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you Avoid an
263. ions the child is ready to wear the lap shoulder belt correctly If you answer no to any question the child needs to ride on a booster seat 54 Using a Booster Seat A child who has outgrown a forward facing child seat should ride in a back seat and use a booster seat until the lap shoulder belt fits them properly without the booster 2011 RDX Some states Canadian provinces and territories also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight e g 6 years or 60 Ibs Be sure to check current laws in the states provinces and territories where you intend to drive Booster seats can be high back or low back Whichever style you select make sure the booster seat meets federal safety standards see page 44 and that you follow the booster seat maker s instructions Protecting Larger Children If a child who uses a booster seat must ride in front move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and be sure the child is wearing the seat belt properly Achild may continue using a booster seat until the tops of their ears are even with the top of the vehicle s or booster s seat back A child of this height should be tall enough to use the lap shoulder belt without a booster seat When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children aged 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat If the pa
264. ire cc0000 454 Changing a Flat Tire 004 455 If the Engine Won t Start 459 Jump Starnice 461 If the Engine Overheats 463 Low Oil Pressure Indicator 465 Charging System Indicator 465 Malfunction Indicator Lamp 466 Brake System Indicator 467 PUSGS E EAE tices A E EA 469 Fuse Locations c sscccceeeeees 473 Emergency Towing ccceeee 475 453 pepedxouy op jo oe Sunjel Compact Spare Tire Use the compact spare tire as a temporary replacement only Get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put it back on your vehicle as soon as you can Check the inflation pressure of the compact spare tire every time you check the other tires It should be inflated to 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 kgf cm 454 Follow these precautions e Never exceed 50 mph 80 km h e This tire gives a harsher ride and less traction on some road surfaces Use greater caution while driving e Do not mount snow chains on the compact spare tire e Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle unless it is the same make and model e After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire the low tire pressure TPMS indicator stays on After several miles kilometers driving with the spare this indicator begins to flash then stays on again You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi information display se
265. isplay Tighten the cap until it clicks at least once Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator off immediately it can take several days of normal driving If the indicator comes on repeatedly even though it may turn off as you continue driving have your vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible 466 NOTICE If you keep driving with the malfunction indicator lamp on you can damage your vehicle s emissions controls and engine Those repairs may not be covered by your vehicle s warranties The indicator may also come on with the D indicator You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 79 Readiness Codes Your vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions systems In some states part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set If they are not set the test cannot be completed 2011 RDX If the battery in your vehicle has been disconnected or gone dead these codes may be erased It can take several days of driving under various conditions to set the codes again To check if they are set turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position without starting the engine The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 20 seconds If it then goes off the readiness codes are set If it blinks five times the readiness codes are not set If possible do not t
266. just for height You need both hands to adjust the restraint Do not attempt to adjust it while driving To raise it pull upward To lower the restraint push the release button and push the restraint down CONTINUED 135 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Seats Rear CUSHION LEGS SEAT BACK RELEASE BUTTON Removing the Head Restraint To remove a head restraint for cleaning or repair pull it up as far as it will go Push the release button then pull the restraint out of the seat back 136 When reinstalling a head restraint put the legs back in place Then adjust it to the appropriate height while pressing the release button Make sure the removed head restraints are securely stored 2011 RDX Failure to reinstall the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash Always replace the head restraints before driving Seats Active Head Restraints The driver s and front passenger s seats have active head restraints If the vehicle is struck severely from the rear the occupant properly secured with the seat belt will be pushed against the seat back and the head restraint will automatically move forward This reduces the distance between the restraint and the occupant s head It also helps protect the occupants against the likelihood of whiplash and injuries to the neck and upper spine After a collision the activated restraint should return to its normal position If the
267. ke Fluid Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 preferred or a DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary replacement see page 429 Tire Pressure measured cold Front Rear 32 psi 220 kPa 2 2 kgf cm Spare Tire Pressure 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 kgf cm Owner s Identification OWNER ADDRESS STREET CITY STATE PROVINCE TERRITORY ZIP CODE POSTAL CODE V I N DELIVERY DATE Date sold to original retail purchaser DEALER NAME DEALER NO ADDRESS STREET CITY STATE PROVINCE TERRITORY ZIP CODE POSTAL CODE OWNER S SIGNATURE DEALER S SIGNATURE 2011 RDX This owner s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold This owner s manual covers all models of the Acura RDX You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular vehicle Images throughout this owner s manual including the front cover represent features and equipment that are available on some but not all models Your particular model may not have some of these features The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing Honda Motor Co Ltd reserves the right however to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN AVIS IMPORTANT Si vous avez besoin
268. ks the doors WITH VEH SPEED 103 OFF X Default setting CONTINUED 83 2011 RDX sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display Default setting 84 2011 RDX Customize Entry Customize Group Customize Menu Description Customize Setup Page CHG SETTING DOOR SETUP DOOR LOCK MODE Changes which doors unlock with the remote DRIVER DOOR P 86 P 102 transmitter on a first push ALL DOORS 105 KEYLESS LOCK The exterior lights flash each time you press ON ACKNOWLEDGEMENT the LOCK or UNLOCK button A beeper will OFF 107 also sound when you press the LOCK button twice SECURITY RELOCK Changes how long it takes in seconds for 30 sec TIMER the doors to relock and the security system to 60 sec 109 set after you unlock but do not open the door 90 sec AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Changes when the system automatically DRIVER DOOR WITH unlock the driver s all of the doors SHIFT TO P ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TOP DRIVER S DOOR WITH 111 IGN OFF ALL DOORS WITH IGN OFF OFF DEFAULT ALL Returns all settings to the factory default SET 85 EXIT Multi Information Display DEFAULT ALL CUSTOMIZE h i i h Ahha DEFAULT ALL DEFAULT ALL CUSTOMIZE ENTRY COMPLETED To set the default settings press the When DEFAULT ALL is set you will INFO A V button to select SET see the above display for several To enter the customizing mode then press the SEL RESET button seconds then
269. l Adjustments ccscccesceeseeeees 122 Anti theft Column Lock 125 Buttons iscsi cciiscetisesissasievs 289 300 Stereo Sound System 172 216 CONTINUED IX Index Storing Your Vehicle 451 Three Way Catalytic Checking Wear ccceceeeeeee 445 SUM VISOF ssssz cecss esses cssseeseeszeussssee 157 CONVENE Sorrisi isni 489 Compact Spare ccssccceeseeeees 454 Super Handling All Wheel Drive Tire Labeling cceeeesseeeeees 484 DOT Tire Quality Grading U S SH AWD System 006 384 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Vehicles ceccsesssseceeeseees 482 Supplemental Restraint TPMS Required Federal Inao creiere eass 444 SYSTEM shteron 10 24 Explanation ccee 485 INSPECHOMN porsseista renas 445 SOLrVICING ccccsercceessereesesreseees 34 Temperature Outside 76 Labeling ccsscccesssreeceseeeeees 484 SRS Indicator ccceeeeeeees 32 65 Tensioners Seat Belts 00 22 Maintenance ccccceeeseeeeeees 446 System Components 0 24 Tether Anchorage Points 51 Pressure Monitoring System 390 System Messages ccccsseceeseees 79 Theft Protection Radio 292 Replacing cccsssceesssseceessseees 447 Three Way Catalytic Rofan so issecceessevecvexizecesncccees 447 Converter seacecteisstevssteuistieeseese 489 a E A E T A 448 Tilt Telescopic Steering Specif
270. l amount The needle returns to the bottom after you turn off the ignition TACHOMETER NOTICE Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter SELECT RESET KNOB MULTI INFORMATION DISPLAY TURBO BOOST METER FUEL GAUGE 73 2011 RDX sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display The multi information display in the instrument panel displays various information and messages when the ignition switch is in the ON ID position Some of the messages help you operate your vehicle more comfortably Others help to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued trouble free driving When you open the driver s door a Welcome message is shown on the multi information display When you turn the ignition switch from the ON I position to the ACCESSORY I position a Goodbye message is shown on the display 74 INFO BUTTONS When you turn the ignition switch to the ON II position your last selection is displayed In the multi information display the system message is also displayed see page 79 and you can customize your vehicle control settings see page 82 ae BUTTON To change the display press the SEL RESET button or INFO A V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the desired information appears see page 75 You can also change the
271. l first see a system warning message CHECK TPMS SYSTEM on the multi information display TPMS System Failure If the low tire pressure TPMS indicator comes on or the multi information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off CHECK by pressing the VSA OFF switch T gt ul S TPMS see page 396 If this happens you cannot turn the VSA system off by SYSTEM pressing the VSA OFF switch again When you restart the vehicle with the compact spare tire the TPMS system message will also be If there is a problem with the TPMS displayed on the multi information you will see the above message on display after several miles the multi information display kilometers driving If you see this message the system is off and is not monitoring the tire pressures Have the system checked by your dealer as soon as possible Also the low tire pressure TPMS indicator begins to flash see page page 71 CONTINUED 393 2011 RDX Sunna Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Changing a Tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire the low tire pressure TPMS and tire monitor indicators will come on Replace the indicated flat tire with the compact spare tire see page 454 After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire the low tire pressure TPMS indicator stays on while driving After several miles kilometers driving this indicator
272. l the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 888 528 7876 214 To skip a file Press the PPI side of the SEEK SKIP bar to skip forward and press the lt 4 side to skip backward to the beginning of the current file Push the 4 side again to skip to the previous file To pause or resume a file The resume pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily Press the preset 1 button to pause and press it again to resume a file NOTE The pause function may not be available on some phone devices 2011 RDX To switch to HFL mode If you receive a call when the Bluetooth Audio is playing press the Talk button on the steering wheel The display switches to the HFL mode see page 309 After ending the call press the HFL Back button to go back to the Bluetooth Audio mode If you receive a call while the system is in the pause mode the mode will be canceled and Bluetooth Audio will continue to play Bluetooth Audio System Models without navigation system To turn off the Bluetooth Audio As required by the FCC mode This device complies with Part 15 of the Select any other audio mode by FCC rules Operation is subject to the pressing a button FM AM xm or following two conditions 1 This device CD AUX if a disc is loaded on the may not cause harmful interference and audio control panel or press the 2 this device must accept any mode button on the steering wheel interference received including re
273. ld be performed by Pressure Front Rear 32 psi 220 kPa 2 2 kgf cm your dealer Spare 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 kgf cm 2011 RDX uoneULioyuy erya L DOT Tire Quality Grading U S Vehicles The tires on your vehicle meet all USS Federal Safety Requirements All tires are also graded for treadwear traction and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation DOT standards The following explains these gradings Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades 482 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate 2011 RDX Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on we
274. le When the D indicator warns of a possible problem with the transmission you will see a CHECK TRANSMISSION message on the multi information display see page 80 2011 RDX Shifting SHIFT LEVER RELEASE BUTTON To shift from Park to any position press firmly on the brake pedal and press the release button on the front of the shift lever then pull the lever You cannot shift out of Park when the ignition switch is in the LOCK 0 or the ACCESSORY I position Automatic Transmission To shift from Do this Press the brake pedal and PtoR press the shift lever release button Rw P Press the shift lever release NtoR button DtoS J StoD X 1 X Move the shift lever RtoN Park P This position mechanically locks the transmission Use Park whenever you are turning off or starting the engine To shift out of Park you must press on the brake pedal and have your foot off the accelerator pedal Press the release button on the front of the shift lever to move it If you have done all of the above and still cannot move the lever out of Park see Shift Lock Release on page 379 To avoid transmission damage come to a complete stop before shifting into Park You must also press the release button to shift into Park The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch 2011 RDX Reverse R Press the brake pedal and press the
275. le Storage If your vehicle s battery is The navigation system will also If you need to park your vehicle for disconnected or goes dead the time disable itself The next time you turn an extended period more than 1 setting will be reset to 1 00 To set on the ignition switch the system month there are several things you the time again follow the setting will require you to enter a PIN before should do to prepare it for storage procedure see page 293 it can be used Refer to the Proper preparation helps prevent If your vehicle s battery is navigation system manual deterioration and makes it easier to get your vehicle back on the road If disconnected or goes dead the audio possible store your vehicle indoors system will disable itself The next time you turn on the radio you will e Fill the fuel tank see exter 222 in the frequency display Use the preset bars or preset z a dry the exterior buttons depending on models to Com p Ere enter the five digit code see page e Clean the interior Make sure the 292 carpeting floor mats etc are completely dry e Leave the parking brake off Put the transmission in Park CONTINUED 451 2011 RDX IIULUJQJUIE IN Vehicle Storage Interior Care e Block the rear wheels e Ifthe vehicle is to be stored for a longer period it should be supported on jackstands so the tires are off the ground Leave one window open slightly if the vehicle is being sto
276. lease the iPod correctly and securely the USB adapter cable 3 Install the dock connector to the USB adapter cable securely CONTINUED 199 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing an iPod Models without navigation system Text Data Display Function Each time you press the DISP MODE button the display mode switches between the album name the song name the artist name or name off which turns off the text display The center display shows up to about 16 characters of the selected data If the text data has more than 16 characters you will see the first 16 characters and the gt indicator in the center display Press and hold the DISP MODE button until the next 16 characters are shown 200 To Change or Select Files Use the SEEK SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files SKIP Each time you press and release the PP side of the SEEK SKIP bar the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file Press and release the I side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current file Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file To move rapidly within a file press and hold either side PPI or K4 of the SEEK SKIP bar 2011 RDX To Select a File from iPod Menu EER 67556 p m PLAY Press and release the SOUND CLOCK button You can also select a file from any list on the iPod menu playlists artists albums and songs by using the
277. ll turn off automatically when you remove the key and open the driver s door To turn them on again either turn the ignition switch to the ON dD position or turn the light switch to the ED position CONTINUED 117 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Turn Signals and Headlights Even with the automatic lighting feature turned on we recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night or in a dense fog or when you enter dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities 118 The automatic lighting feature is controlled by a sensor located on top of the dashboard Do not cover this sensor or spill liquids on it 2011 RDX Automatic Lighting Off Feature This feature turns off the headlights fog lights parking lights taillights side marker lights license plate lights and instrument panel lights within 15 seconds of removing the key from the ignition switch and closing the driver s door This feature activates if you leave the headlight switch in the 2002 or ED position remove the key then open and close the driver s door Turn Signals and Headlights If you remove the key from the ignition switch with the headlight switch on but do not open the door the lights will turn off after 10 minutes The lights will turn on again when you unlock or open the driver s door If you unlock the door but do not open it within 15 seconds the lights will go off With the driver s door open you will
278. lping you to avoid unnecessary maintenance costs CONTINUED 339 soinjeoy AcuraLink U S models only You can use the following message options e Make an appointment from the schedule at the dealer e Reschedule the appointment with the dealer e Call your dealer for an appointment e Find the nearest dealer 340 Automated Appointment You can make an appointment with your dealer through the AcuraLink when you receive a maintenance minder message To use the automated appointment function you should visit the Owner Link website at www owners acura com register some required settings and complete the Phone Data Connection set up see page 337 Your Bluetooth compatible phone should also be paired and linked to your vehicle s Bluetooth HFL see page 313 2011 RDX Select a message 1 T Appt Dec 22 at 8 00am 2 E7 Electric Power Steering 22 3 E Emissions System P0420 QO 4 E 1Tire Pressure Monitor 83 own 5 AcuraLink Messages 6 EA Vehicle Stability Assist 31 When you see the maintenance minder message on the multi information display you will also receive a message in the navigation screen To open the message press ENTER Select New Messages then press ENTER You will see the list of all messages The most recent message is listed at the top AcuraLink U S
279. lts to protect them However despite their best intentions many adults do not know how to properly protect child passengers If you have children or ever need to drive with a child in your vehicle be sure to read this section It begins with important general guidelines then presents special information for infants small children and larger children 36 All Children Must Be Restrained Each year many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained In fact traffic collisions are the number one cause of the death of children aged 12 and under To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries every state Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle Infants and small children must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle see pages 41 52 2011 RDX Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt and use a booster seat if necessary Larger children must be restrained with a lap shoulder belt and ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits them properly see pages 53 56 Protecting Children General Guidelines
280. ly can increase the chance of injury during a crash For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased 2011 RDX In addition an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright well back in the seat with your feet on the floor 17 Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAA Protecting Adults and Teens Advice for Pregnant Women If you are pregnant the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips 18 When driving remember to sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle When riding as a front passenger adjust the seat as far back as possible 2011 RDX This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an inflating front airbag Each time you have a checkup ask your doctor if it s okay for you to drive Protecting Adults and Teens Additional Safety Precautions Do not pu
281. m Delete All To delete a file select it by turning the selector knob then push it to the right Select Delete All or Delete Selected Item then press ENTER 238 Receiving Radio Service If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM radio With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY 1 or the ON II position push the PWR VOL knob to turn on the audio system and press the xm button A variety of music types and styles will play If you decide to purchase XM Radio service contact XM Radio at www xmradio com or at 1 800 852 9696 In Canada contact XM CANADA at www xmradio ca or at 1 877 209 0079 You will need to give them your radio I D number and your credit card number To get your radio I D number turn the TUNE knob until 0 appears in the display Your I D will appear in the display 2011 RDX After you ve registered with XM Radio keep your audio system in the satellite radio mode while you wait for activation This should take about 30 minutes While waiting for activation make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception Once your audio system is activated CAT or CH will appear in the upper display and you ll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at
282. m The back seat is the safest place for children m Never put a rear facing child seat In the front m Alvays use seat belts and child restraints m See owner s manual for more information about air bags To be removed by owner only Canadian Models SUN VISORS CAUTION PRECAUTION TO AVOID SERIOUS INJURY POUR EVITER DES BLESSURES GRAVES FOR MAXIMUM SAFETY PROTECTION IN POUR PROFITER D UNE PROTECTION ALL TYPES OF CRASHES YOU MUST MAXIMALE LORS D UNE COLLISION BOUCLEZ ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SAFETY BELT TOUJOURS VOTRE CEINTURE DE SECURITE DO NOT INSTALL REARWARD FACING e NINSTALLEZ JAMAIS UN SIEGE POUR CHILD SEATS IN ANY FRONT ENFANTS FAISANT FACE A L ARRIERE SUR PASSENGER SEAT POSITION LE SIEGE DU PASSAGER AVANT DO NOT SIT OR LEAN UNNECESSARILY e NE VOUS APPUYEZ PAS ET NE VOUS ASSOYEZ CLOSE TO THE AIR BAG PAS PRES DU COUSSIN GONFLABLE DO NOT PLACE ANY OBJECTS OVER THE e NE DEPOSEZ AUCUN OBJET SUR LE COUSSIN AIR BAG OR BETWEEN THE AIR BAG GONFLABLE OU ENTRE LE COUSSIN AND YOURSELF GONFLABLE ET VOUS SEE THE OWNER S MANUAL FOR FURTHER LISEZ LE GUIDE UTILISATEUR POUR DE INFORMATION AND EXPLANATIONS PLUS AMPLES RENSEIGNEMENTS 2011 RDX Protecting Children General Guidelines If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact Your vehicle has a back seat where children can be properly restrained If
283. m s serial number 292 NOTE If you have a My Acura account you can retrieve the anti theft code online If your vehicle s battery is disconnected or goes dead the audio system will disable itself If ee happens you will see s the center or upper display depending on models the next time you turn on the system Use the preset bars or buttons depending on models to enter the five digit code The code is located on the radio code card included in your owner s manual kit When itis entered correctly the radio will start playing 2011 RDX If you make a mistake entering the code do not start over complete the five digit sequence then enter the correct code You have ten tries to enter the correct code If you are unsuccessful in ten attempts you must then leave the system on for 1 hour before trying again The system will retain your AM and FM presets even if power is disconnected Setting the Clock On models without navigation system To set the time press the SOUND CLOCK button until you hear a beep then release the button The displayed time begins to blink Change the hour by pressing the H preset 4 side of the preset bar until the numbers advance to the desired time Change the minute by pressing the M preset 5 side of the bar until the numbers advance to the desired time You can quickly set the time to the nearest hour If the displayed time is before the half hour pressing th
284. manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains 449 aoueUD UIP Checking the Battery TEST INDICATOR WINDOW Check the condition of the battery monthly by looking at the test indicator window The label on the battery explains the test indicator s colors 450 Check the terminals for corrosion a white or yellowish powder To remove it cover the terminals with a solution of baking soda and water It will bubble up and turn brown When this stops wash it off with plain water Dry off the battery with a cloth or paper towel Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion If additional battery maintenance is needed see your dealer or a qualified technician WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash your hands after handling If you need to connect the battery to a charger disconnect both cables to prevent damaging your vehicle s electrical system Always disconnect the negative cable first and reconnect it last 2011 RDX The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you Wear protective clothing anda face shield or have a skilled technician do the battery maintenance Checking the Battery Vehicle Storage On models without navigation system On models with navigation system Vehic
285. mine the tread for wear and foreign objects See p 445 age e Lights Check the operation of the headlights parking lights taillights high mount brake light and license plate lights monthly See page 431 417 aoueUD UIP Maintenance Minder Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items A Replace engine oil 1 Rotate tires B Replace engine oil and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions replace every 15 000 Check parking brake adjustment miles 24 000 km Inspect these items Replace dust and pollen filter Tie rod ends steering gear box and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high Suspension components concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from p p diesel powered vehicles replace every 15 000 miles aS Driveshaft boots 24 000 km Brake hoses and lines including ABS VSA Inspect drive belt All fluid levels and condition of fluids 3 Replace transmission and transfer fluid e Exhaust system Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds o e Fuel lines and connections or trailer towing results in higher transmission and O transfer temperatures This requires transmission and x1 Ifthe message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after transfer fluid changes more frequently than oO the dis
286. mpliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 305 2011 RDX soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Bluetooth HandsFreeLink HFL Using HFL allows you to place and receive HEL buttons phone calls using voice commands without handling your cell phone To use HFL you need a Bluetooth compatible cell phone For a list of compatible phones pairing procedures and special feature capabilities In the U S visit www acura com handstreelink or call 888 528 7876 In Canada visit www acura ca On models without navigation system or call 888 9 ACURAS HFL Talk button Press and release to give a command or answer acall HFL Back button Press and release to end a call go back to the previous command or cancel the command 306 2011 RDX VOICE CON ROL BUTTONS On models with navigation system Below the HFL buttons is another set of voice control buttons for the navigation climate control and audio systems To use the voice control system refer to the navigation system manual Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Voice Control Tips e Press and release the HFL Talk e Many commands can be spoken button each time you w
287. mproperly coded key or other device is used the engine s fuel system is disabled When you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly then go off If the indicator starts to blink it means the system does not recognize the coding of the key Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK 0 position remove the key reinsert it and turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position again 124 The system may not recognize your key s coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object e key chain is near the ignition switch when you insert the key If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of your key contact your dealer Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable If you have lost your key and cannot start the engine contact your dealer NOTICE Always take the ignition key with you whenever you leave the vehicle alone 2011 RDX As required by the FCC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s a
288. n 2011 RDX To Stop Playing Your iPod To play the radio press the AM FM or xm button Press the DISC AUX button to switch between disc if a disc is loaded Bluetooth Audio and the iPod CONTINUED 267 soinjeoy Playing an iPod Models with navigation system Disconnecting an iPod You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display Always make sure you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display before you disconnect it Make sure to follow the iPod s instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable x The displayed message may vary on models or versions On some models there is no message to disconnect When you disconnect the iPod while it is playing the upper display and the audio control display if selected show NO DATA 268 If you reconnect the same iPod the system may begin playing where it left off depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected iPod Error Messages For information see page 269 2011 RDX iPod Error Messages Models with navigation system If you see an error message on the upper display while playing an iPod find the solution in the chart to the right If you cannot clear the error message take your vehicle to your dealer Error Message Cause Solution USB ERROR USB ROM error There is a problem with the USB adapt
289. n advance about that appointment through AcuraLink If you need to reschedule or cancel the appointment see page 342 Turning the Automated Appointment preference off will disable appointment notifications in the vehicle based on appointments created or changed at My Acura s online scheduling website Appointments can still be created rescheduled and canceled from the vehicle however the appointment information stored in the vehicle will not be updated Any changes to those appointments should be made from the My Acura website 2011 RDX As required by the FCC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 347 soinjeoy Rearview Mirror with Rearview Camera Display On models with navigation system Refer to the navigation system manual for operation of the rearview camera On model
290. n again the remotely controlled device should operate 2011 RDX Retraining a Button Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to flash slowly gt 4 gt 4 Indicator remains Indicator flashes rapidly on for about 25 for 2 seconds then seconds standard remains on for about 23 transmitter seconds rolling code transmitter When the indicator begins to flash slowly continue to hold the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 3 under Training a Button Erasing Codes To erase codes stored in all buttons press and hold the two outer buttons until the HomelLink indicator begins to flash about 10 to 20 seconds then release the buttons You should erase all three codes before selling the vehicle If you have any problems programming HomeLink see the owner s manual included with the device you are trying to program or call HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or go online to www homelink com HomeLink Universal Transceiver HomeLink is a registered trademark As required by the FCC of Johnson Controls Inc This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for co
291. n be hazardous If the vehicle seat is too far forward or the child s head is thrown forward during a collision an inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to kill or very seriously injure a small child Larger Children Children who have outgrown child seats are also at risk of being injured or killed by an inflating passenger s front airbag Whenever possible larger children should sit in the back seat on a booster seat if needed and be properly restrained with a seat belt see page 53 for important information about protecting larger children CONTINUED 37 Ayoyes Jesuesseg pur PAA Protecting Children General Guidelines To remind you of the passenger s front airbag hazards and that children must be properly restrained in a back seat your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard U S models and on the front visors Please read and follow the instructions on these labels 38 U S Models DASHBOARD SUN VISORS AIRBAG WARNING This Vehicle is Equipped with Advanced Air Bags FLIP VISOR OVER Even with Advanced Air Bags Children can be killed or seriously injured by the air bag The back seat is the safest place for children Never put a rear facing child seat in the front Always use seat belts and child restraints See owner s manual for more information about air bags EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS m Children can be killed or seriously injured by the air bag
292. n by pressing the SEL RESET button CONTINUED 89 sjonuop pue sjusUIn QsU Multi Information Display SELECTION LANGUE FRANCAIS R GLAGE When your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU All messages on the multi information display will be shown in the language you selected 90 L NGUA SELECTION SETTING INCOMPLETE If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX To exit LANGUAGE SELECTION without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU Multi Information Display Adjust Outside Temp Display If you sometimes find that the temperature reading is a few degrees above or below the actual temperature you can adjust it by following these instructions CUSTOMIZE S 0S A MENU ADJUST OUTS ENTER ENTERETEMP DIS Be 7I While METER SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU Press the INFO A V button until you see the above display 2011 RDX Canada Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as shown above The highlighted number is the current setti
293. n h High Beam Indicator 69 Timing Control System 488 Si de Aibar O o 39 66 High Beams Turning on 116 Immobilizer System 124 SRS S ihrer pe 32 65 Lights On Indicator 70 Important Safety Precautions 6 Syst AM ee A N i 79 Low Beams Turning on 116 Indicators Instrument Panel 63 TPMS Ti nee Bee ear echo Reminder Chime cc c0es000 116 ABS Anti lock Brake 66 388 Mateo e 71 390 TUrMing OM ceesesseeceeeeseseeees 116 A T Temp csvcccsvscessvees Hcebstedeses cc 65 T i A fe d Hazard p i Head Restraints 0 cccceceeeees 135 Brake Amber 00006 67 468 W Igna and iazar 69 Heated Mirrors eeeeecesesseeesesese 147 Brake Red ccseceeeees 67 467 vs AA ones 69 Heaters Seats ccssssccsssseeeees 141 Charging System 65 465 VSA Sv ni GOT erras E eE 68 Heating and Cooling 164 Cruise Control c cccecesseceeeee 69 Individ Mar ica 152 High Altitude Starting at 374 Cruise Main seessecsssecseeessees a eee ar arenas CONTINUED V 2011 RDX Index Infant Restraint ss ssiaseusctaesens 41 K Hi MMU rinnas 128 Infant Seals veccccccsiesssssscscexeecavecseves 41 Low Coolant Level ccccceeee 397 Tether Anchorage Point OL Keys ereinen i 122 Lower Anchors seeeeseeenseeseeseseee 46 Inflati
294. n this service is shown on a maintenance message on the multi information display Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature 1 Park the vehicle on level ground Start the engine let it run until the radiator fan comes on then shut off the engine For accurate results wait about 60 seconds but no longer than 90 seconds before doing step 2 2011 RDX DIPSTICK 2 Remove the dipstick yellow loop from the transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth CONTINUED 427 aoueUD UIP Automatic Transmission Fluid UPPER MARK LOWER MARK 3 Insert the dipstick all the way into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration 4 Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level It should be between the upper and lower marks 428 FILL PLUG 5 If the level is below the lower mark remove the fill plug then add the fluid into the fill hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks on the dipstick Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any Clean up any spills immediately it could damage components in the engine compartment 2011 RDX Always use Acura ATF Z1 automatic transmission fluid NOTICE Use only Acura ATF Z1 automatic transmission fluid Do not mix with other transmission fluids Using transmission fluid other than Acura ATF ZI may cause deterioration in transmission operation and durability and coul
295. nce Fader These two modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker BALANCE adjusts the side to side strength while FADER adjusts the front to back strength 2011 RDX ADJUSTMENT LEVEL PWR VOL KNOB iE r EA iO SOUND CLOCK BUTTON BALANCE can be adjusted in levels between L9 and R9 FADER can be adjusted in levels between F9 and R9 When FADER adjustment level reaches F9 the subwoofer speaker will be turned off CONTINUED 177 soinjeoy Playing the FM AM Radio Models without navigation system SUBWOOFER Use the SUBWOOFER mode to adjust the strength of the sound from the subwoofer speaker Turn the PWR VOL knob to the desired level 6 to 6 Even if the adjustment level reaches 6 the subwoofer is not turned off 178 Speed sensitive volume compensation SVC The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed The faster you go the louder the audio volume becomes As you slow down the audio volume decreases The SVC has four modes SVC OFF SVC LOW SVC MID and SVC HIGH Turn the PWR VOL knob to adjust the setting to your liking 2011 RDX Audio System Lighting You can use the instrument panel brightness control knob to adjust the illumination of the audio system see page 120 The audio system illuminates when the parking lights are on even if the system is turned off Playing the XM Radio Models without na
296. ncel the appointment select YES then press ENTER If you select NO the screen goes back to the previous message display If you select the cancel appointment you cannot try to reschedule the appointment If you want to change Contirmation or reschedule the appointment date Your appointment on Dec 22 at call your dealer directly with HFL 8 00am has been canceled The system will automatically connect to the Acura server then show you the confirmation on the navigation screen If you accept the cancel press ENTER CONTINUED 343 2011 RDX soinjeoy AcuraLink U S models only Using automated appointment your Recall Campaigns For this reason it is important that registered dealer through Owner we retain your current phone Link is automatically selected If you number Please update your want to select another dealer such as information using My Acura at in case of an emergency find the Product Update May 6 07 www owners acura Com nearest dealer and call the dealer Please visit your dealer as soonias ti tl t ti directly with HFL wea 7 PASAS apra When a maintenance appointment is Voice Se oas due soon you will also receive an PrI AIAD Schedule Dealer J appointment reminder message Appointment If your vehicle is affected by a recall or other important safety information a letter will be mailed to you about the issue and how to fix it If you
297. ncy locking retractor In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely in your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt During a collision or sudden stop the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body The seat belts in all positions except the driver s have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat see page 50 CONTINUED 21 Ayoyes Jesuesseg pur PAA Additional Information About Your Seat Belts If the shoulder part of the belt is Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners pulled all the way out the lockable retractor will activate The belt will retract but it will not allow the passenger to move freely To deactivate the lockable retractor unlatch the buckle and let the seat belt fully retract To refasten the seat belt pull it out only as far as needed For added protection the front seat belts are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners When activated the tensioners immediately tighten the belts to help hold the driver and a front passenger in position 22 2011 RDX The tensioners can be activated during a collision in which the front airbags do not deploy In this case the airbags would not be needed but the additional restraint could be helpful If the tensioner is activated the SRS indicator comes on and the tensioner must be replaced Additional Information About Your Seat Belts Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn duri
298. nd refilled with Acura PSF as soon as possible A low power steering fluid level can indicate a leak in the system Check the fluid level frequently and have the system inspected as soon as possible LOWER LEVEL Check the level on the side of the reservoir when the engine is cold The fluid should be between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL If not add power steering fluid to the UPPER LEVEL Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any Clean up any spills immediately it could damage components in the engine compartment 430 2011 RDX If you are not sure how to add fluid contact your dealer NOTICE Turning the steering wheel to full left or right lock and holding it there can damage the power steering pump Headlight Aiming The headlights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new If you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or pull a trailer readjustment may be required Adjustments should be done by your dealer or another qualified technician Low Beam Headlight Bulb Replacement The low beam headlight bulbs are high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the light switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to examine or change a low beam headlight bulb yourself If alow beam headlight bulb fails take the vehicle to your dealer to have it replaced Replacing a High Beam Headlight Bulb Your
299. ndicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem 2011 RDX How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works Canada U S SIDE 7 OFF a This indicator alerts you that the passenger s side airbag has been automatically shut off It does not mean there is a problem with your side airbags When you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position the indicator should come on for several seconds and then go off see page 66 If it doesn t come on stays on or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat have the system checked You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on themulti information display see page 80 Additional Information About Your Airbags How the Passenger Airbag Off Indicator Works PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR PASSENGER AIRBAG This indicator alerts you that the passenger s front airbag has been shut off because weight sensors detect about 65 Ibs 29 kg or less the weight of an infant or small child on the front passenger s seat It does not mean there is a problem with the airbag Be aware that objects placed on the front seat can cause the indicator to come on If no weight is detected on the front seat the airbag will be automatically
300. ne 11 299 soinjeoy Cruise Control Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed above 25 mph 40 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal It should be used for cruising on straight open highways It is not recommended for city driving winding roads slippery roads heavy rain or bad weather Using Cruise Control CRUISE BUTTON RES ACCEL BUTTON Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash CANCEL BUTTON SET DECEL BUTTON 1 Push in the CRUISE button on the steering wheel The CRUISE MAIN indicator on the instrument panel comes on Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather 2 Accelerate to the desired cruising speed above 25 mph 40 km h 300 2011 RDX Qo Press and release the SET DECEL button on the steering wheel The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel comes on to show the system is now activated Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up and down hills If your vehicle speed increases going down a hill use the brakes to slow down This will cancel the cruise control To resume the set speed press the RES ACCEL button The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will come back on Cruise Control Changing the Set Speed You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways e Press and hold the RES ACCEL button When you reach the desired cruising speed
301. nformation Display Auto Door Lock There are three settings you can choose from OFF The auto door lock is deactivated all the time WITH VEH SPD The doors lock when the vehicle speed reaches about 9 mph about 15 km h SHIFT FROM P The doors lock whenever you move the shift lever out of Park CUSTOMIZE DOOR as AUTO DOOR LOCK re While DOOR SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button You will see the above display 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZE AUTO DOOR LOCK WITH EH SPD A nt Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as shown above Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection CONTINUED 103 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display When your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU 104 AUTO DOQ SETTING INCOMPLETE If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZE en rete a ale ts SETUP To exit AUTO DOOR LOCK without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU Multi Information Di
302. ng Crosswinds and Bufteting Crosswinds and air turbulence caused by passing trucks can disrupt your steering and cause the trailer to sway When being passed by a large vehicle keep a constant speed and steer straight ahead Do not try to make quick steering or braking corrections 2011 RDX Backing Up Always drive slowly and have someone guide you when backing up Grip the bottom of the steering wheel then turn the wheel to the left to get the trailer to move to the left and turn the wheel right to move the trailer to the right Parking Follow all normal precautions when parking including putting the transmission in Park and firmly setting the parking brake Also place wheel chocks at each of the trailer s tires Towing Your Vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency see page 475 Off Highway Driving Guidelines General Information Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement But its higher ground clearance and super handling all wheel drive SH AWD system allow you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads to campgrounds picnic sites and similar locations It is not designed for trailblazing mountain climbing or other challenging offroad activities If you decide to drive on unpaved roads you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills Your vehicle will also handle somewhat differently th
303. ng a crash For safety you should check the it must be replaced by your dealer A condition of your seat belts regularly belt that has been worn during a Pull each belt out fully and look for crash may not provide the same level frays cuts burns and wear Check of protection in a subsequent crash that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the the belts retract easily If a belt does anchors for damage and replace not retract easily cleaning the belt them if needed If the automatic seat may correct the problem see page belt tensioners activate during a 438 Any belt that is not in good crash they must be replaced condition or working properly will not provide good protection and should be replaced as soon as possible Acura provides a limited warranty on seat belts See your Acura Warranty Information booklet for details 2011 RDX Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible 23 Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAA Additional Information About Your Airbags Airbag System Components 1 Driver s Front Airbag 2 Passenger s Front Airbag 3 Control Unit 4 Front Seat Belt Tensioners 5 Side Airbags 6 Side Curtain Airbags 7 Driver s Seat Position Sensor 8 Front Passenger s Weight Sensors 9 Front
304. ng above or below the outside temperature Press the INFO A V button repeatedly until the number you want appears then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection CONTINUED 91 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display ADJUST SIDE TEMP DISPLAY When your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU 92 ADJUST OUTS TEWP DISPLAY SETTING INCOMPLETE If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX To exit ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP DISPLAY without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU Multi Information Display Trip A amp Avg Fuel Reset with Refuel To cause Trip A and AVG FUEL A to reset every time you refuel your vehicle follow these instructions CUSTOMIZE Te RION R SETUP TRIP A amp AVG FUEL RESET with REFUEL k While METER SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU Press the INFO A V button until you see the above display 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZER S Suen HAL RESET with REFUEL G FUEL Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as
305. ng preset 3 The display will return to the normal display 3 Select CAL START by pressing preset 1 The system will start the calibration CAL will appear on the display then the direction will also begin to blink If you select R by pressing preset 3 the display will return to the compass setting mode 4 When the direction stops blinking the calibration mode is completed The display will return to the normal display CONTINUED 297 2011 RDX soinjeoy Compass 2 Select ZONE by pressing preset 2 to enter the zone setting mode The display will change to zone setting mode and show you the current zone setting If you want to cancel this mode select R by pressing preset 3 The display will return to the normal display 3 Find the zone for your area on the map see next page 1 Press and hold the SOUND CLOCK and RPT buttons at the same time for about 2 seconds You will hear a beep then the center display will change to the compass setting mode as shown above 298 2011 RDX 4 If the zone is incorrect press preset 1 or preset 2 to get the zone number to count up and down When you finish setting the correct zone or want to cancel this mode without changing the current setting select SET by pressing preset 3 The display will return to the normal display Compass 2011 RDX Guam Island Zone 8 Puerto Rico Zo
306. ng the Clock Security System Compass 0068 Compass Operation Cruise Control AcuraLink U S models only 332 Rearview Mirror with Rearview Camera Display 163 soinjeoy Climate Control System Models without navigation system Models with navigation system DRIVER S SIDE MODE INDICATOR TEMPERATURE DISPLAY Te PASSENGER S SIDE PASSENGER S SIDE E TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TEMPERATURE DISPLAY DRIVER S SIDE MODE INDICATOR TEMPERATURE DISPLAY WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON MODE BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HEATED MIRROR BUTTON DUAL BUTTON PASSENGER S SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS DRIVER S SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS RECIRCULATION BUTTON FAN CONTROL BUTTONS AIR CONDITIONING A C BUTTON U S model is shown AUTO BUTTON 164 2011 RDX Climate Control System Proper use of the climate control system can make the interior dry and comfortable and keep the windows clear for best visibility For the climate control system to provide heating and cooling the engine must be running You can adjust the temperatures of the driver s side and the passenger s side independently see page 169 Voice Control System On models with navigation system The climate control system can also be operated by voice control See the navigation system manual for complete details Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control
307. nishes scanning all the discs disc scan is canceled and the system begins to play the first track file of that disc normally Each time you press and release the SCAN button the mode changes from scan to folder scan disc scan then to normal play RANDOM Random within a Disc This feature plays the tracks all files in each folder in MP3 WMA mode within a disc in random order To activate it press and release the ASSEL RDM button In MP3 WMA mode press the A SEL RDM button twice to select random play within a disc You will see RDM on the center display Press and hold the ASEL RDM button for more than 2 seconds to return to normal play 2011 RDX In MP3 WMA mode FOLDER RANDOM This feature plays the files within a folder in random order rather than in the order they are compressed in MP3 To activate it press the A SEL RDM button once You will see F RDM on the center display The system will then select and play files randomly This continues until you deactivate folder random play by pressing and holding the RDM button for more than 2 seconds Each time you press and release the A SEL RDM button the mode changes from folder random to random then to normal play CONTINUED 193 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models without navigation system To Pause a Disc To pause a disc press the corresponding number of the current disc on the appropriate side of the preset bars To play the
308. nlatch the buckle unroute the seat belt and let the belt fully retract 2011 RDX Installing a Child Seat with a Tether TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT A child seat with a tether can be installed in any seating position in the back seat Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap shoulder belt installation we recommend using a tether whenever one is required or available CONTINUED 51 Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAIA Installing a Child Seat TETHER STRAP 1 Remove the cargo area cover and place it on the cargo area floor see page 160 52 2 Outer seating position After properly securing the child seat see page 50 lift the head restraint then route the tether strap over the seat back and through the head restraint legs Rear center seating position Remove the head restraint see page 136 Make sure the removed head restraint is secured in the cargo area Reinstall the head restraint when the child seat is removed After properly securing the child seat see page 50 route the tether strap over the top of the seat back When you install the child seat in the rear center seating position you cannot use the seat belt behind the driver s seat 2011 RDX TETHER STRAP HOOK ANCHOR 3 Attach the tether strap hook to the anchor making sure the tether strap is not twisted 4 Tighten the strap according to the seat maker s instructions If the tet
309. nother major brand non silicate coolant as a temporary replacement Make sure it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines Continued use of any non Honda coolant can result in corrosion causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze coolant as soon as possible 2011 RDX If the reserve tank is completely empty you should also check the coolant level in the radiator Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out seriously scalding you Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap Engine Coolant en N Se T RADIATOR CAP Make sure the engine and radiator are cool Relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap counterclockwise without pressing down Remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise RESERVE TANK MAX MIN 4 The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck Add coolant if it is low Pour the coolant slowly and carefully so you do not spill any Clean up any spills immediately it could damage components in the engine compartment 2011 RDX 5 Put the radiator cap back on and tighten it fully 6 Pour coolant into the reserve tank Fill it halfway between the MAX and MIN marks Put the cap back on the reserve
310. ns 357 Carbon Monoxide Hazard 57 LATCH seerne 46 Proper Solution cccccceees 424 Cape ee 36 4 Risks with Airbags 000 37 Courtesy Lights ccccsceeeees 153 Br Gear A Small Children sissors 42 Crankcase Emissions Control Cargo Area Cover ccccccsseceeerees 160 D e E E A ol Syete wescisscessiesesscssssstasstases 487 Cargo Area Light ccssccceeeees 153 W Label 38 Cruise C iiad 69 Cargo How to Carry seesccsssecsssee 364 arning IS rearen rulse ontrol In icator REE p Where Should a Child Sit rf Cruise Control Operation 300 Carrying Cargo cccccesssseeceeeees 364 Child Seats Crise Main Indicator 69 CAUTION Explanation of SNe alo ts ili eee occceesccceccscesccsessesecseses TE VALUL LVECALIL LIUICALUIL cocccccccccccccces LATCH Anchorage Points is Cup Holders c seeecscssneceessenees 156 ll 2011 RDX Customized Settings PDO DANGER Explanation of Daytime Running Lights Rae Defects Reporting Safety Seca Defogger Rear Window Defrosting the Windows Dimming the Headlights Automatic Transmission ae ee T EEE E Disc Brake Wear Indicators Disc Changer Error Disposal of Used Oil Doors Childproof Door Locks 127 Locking and Unlocking 126 Power Door Locks 0006 126 DOT Tire Quality Grading U S Vehicles saacanna arn 482 Driver and Passenger Safety 5 DinDon 371 ECONOMY seon cietecteetteo
311. nseees 157 Vanity Mirror sessies 158 Console Compartment 158 Cargo Area COVE cecsscccees 160 Coat HOOK assesses 161 61 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Control Locations INSTRUMENT PANEL Wart et jehi MONITOR CEILING CONSOLE INDICATORS P 63 A z GAUGES P 73 MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON P 146 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM P 164 AUDIO SYSTEM P 216 POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH P 126 POWER WINDOW SWITCH P 142 ACCESSORY POWER DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM P 148 POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH P 126 POWER WINDOW SWITCHES P 142 HOOD RELEASE HANDLE P 355 FUEL FILL DOOR SOCKET RELEASE HANDLE PARKING BRAKE AUTOMATIC USB ADAPTER CABLE P 157 P 353 PEDAL P 150 TRANSMISSION P 199 207 263 274 P 376 Vehicle with navigation system is shown x1 On models without navigation system 2 On models with navigation system 3 HomeLink Buttons P 303 Moonroof Switch P 144 Front Ceiling Light Switch P 151 62 2011 RDX Instrument Panel VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST VSA HIGH BEAM INDICATOR P 69 LOW TIRE PRESSURE TPMS INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR P 71 390 P 68 VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST VSA BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR AMBER P 67 468 ACTIVATION INDICATOR P 69 CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR P 69 EMI EER a 7 CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR LIGHTS ON INDICATOR P 69 P 70 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
312. nt panel lights Turn the when you turn the light switch to the knob to adjust the brightness z00 or ED position Separate adjustments can be made when the headlights are on and off The level of brightness is shown on the multi information display while you adjust it It goes out 5 seconds after you finish adjusting 120 2011 RDX Rear Window Defogger Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger In cold weather the defogger will not Hazard Warning Button automatically shut itself off You must manually shut off the rear window defogger when it is no longer needed Make sure the rear window is clear and you have good visibility before starting to drive The defogger wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged When cleaning the glass always wipe side to side The rear window defogger clears fog Pushing this button also turns the Push the button between the center frost and thin ice from the window mirror heaters on or off For more vents to turn on the hazard warning Push the defogger button to turn it on information see page 147 lights four way flashers This and off The indicator in the button causes all outside turn signals and comes on to show the defogger is on If both indicators in the instrument you do not turn it off the defogger will panel to flash Use the hazard shut itself off within about 5 to 30 minutes according to the outside temperature It also shuts off when you
313. nts and will not be compatible with the tire pressure monitoring system TPMS Larger or smaller wheels and tires can interfere with the operation of your vehicle s anti lock brakes and other systems Modifying your steering wheel or any other part of your vehicle s safety features can make the systems ineffective If you plan to modify your vehicle consult your dealer 2011 RDX 363 SUIALI ag Table of Contents Carrying Cargo DOOR LINING POCKETS FRONT DOOR POCKET CARGO HOOKS CENTER POCKET a i 4 Ne z gt Ca Re y T A J gt CARGO AREA GLOVE BOX SEAT BACK POCKETS CONSOLE COMPARTMENT 364 2011 RDX Your vehicle has several convenient storage areas e Glove box e Front door pockets e Door lining pockets e Seat back pockets e Center pocket e Console compartment e Cargo area including the rear seats when folded down e Roof rack if equipped However carrying too much cargo or improperly storing it can affect your vehicle s handling stability stopping distance and tires and make it unsafe Before carrying any type of cargo be sure to read the following pages Table of Contents Carrying Cargo Load Limits AWARNING Steps for Determining Correct Load The maximum load for your vehicle Overdadingorimproper Limit j oe it kg loading can affect handling and 1 Locate the statement
314. o sources Dolby prologic II can only be activated when listening to CD CD DA MP3 WMA XM radio and AUX When it activates DPL II is shown on the upper display Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system To set this feature on or off select Dolby PL II and press ENTER on the interface selector Rotate the interface dial to ON or OFF and press ENTER Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby ProLogic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Speed sensitive volume compensation SVC The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed The faster you go the louder the audio volume becomes As you slow down the audio volume decreases 2011 RDX The SVC has four modes OFF LOW MID and HIGH Turn the interface dial to the desired setting and enter your selection by pressing ENTER 227 soinjeoy Playing the XM Radio Models with navigation system U S model is shown 228 XM BAND PRESET CHANNEL NUMBER NUMBER ond l Lf a Pa gt us out gd A iJ cea CADCH L CLOCK arc on att TEMP __j TEMP CH MODE INDICATOR CATEGORY MODE INDICATOR 001 AAA caTeGoRY BBBB NAME CCCC TITLE DDDD Ha a CATEGORY Axm2 CATEGORY P 022 CCC 3 1 4 023DDD 021 BBB 2 5 024 EEE 001 AAA q 6 025 FFF V AUDIO MENU 2011 RDX Pl
315. o CUSTOMIZE MENU If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX To exit INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU CONTINUED 99 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display Headlight Auto Off Timer The headlights parking lights side marker lights taillights and license plate lights go off after the selected time when you close the driver s door and take the remote with you To change how long the lights stay on before they go off follow these instructions 100 CUSTOMIZE oes SETUP HEADLIGHT AUTO CFF TIMER kd re EF While LIGHTING SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU Press the INFO A button until you see the above display 2011 RDX ean HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as shown above Select how long you want the lights to stay on before they go off 0 15 30 or 60 seconds by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection Multi Information Display HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER SEC SETUP When
316. oblem with the USB adapter Appears when the overcurrent protection BAD USB feature of the system stops supplying DEVICE power to USB because an incompatible PLEASE CHECK oe power device is connected Disconnect the OWNERS device Then turn the audio system off MANUAL and turn it on again Do not reconnect the device that caused the error Appears when the files in the USB flash memory device are DRM or an U A i BLE he of unsupported unsupported format This error message appears for a few seconds then plays the next song Appears when the USB flash memory device is empty or there are no MP3 USB No files in USB flash WMA or AAC files in the USB flash NO SONG memory device memory device Save some MP3 WMA or AAC files in the USB flash memory device Appears when an unsupported device is Use of unsupported connected See page 272 for information UNSUPPORTED USB flash memory on USB flash memory devices If it appears device when the supported device is connected reconnect the device 2011 RDX 279 soinjeoy Bluetooth Audio System Models with navigation system BLUETOOTH INDICATOR TIITA COLTA Pee Poo P902iS Bluetooth AUDIO For more information on this function go to ww acura com handsfreel ink mvo 9 Haa SKIP V AUDIO MENU SKIP gt U S model is shown 280 2011 RDX Bluetooth Audio System Models with navigation system U S model is shown AUDIO BUTTON INTERFACE DIAL
317. obtain a copy or see your dealer Dust and Pollen Filter 439 Wiper Blades ccccssseeeeseeees 440 WOES vis ccsces ctsteceetecieesdevcss thoes 443 TAPES orna NNS 444 Checking the Battery 450 Vehicle Storage ccsssccessseees 451 Interior Caresser 452 409 2011 RDX aoueUD UIe Maintenance Safety All service items not detailed in this section should be performed by a certified technician or other qualified mechanic Important Safety Precautions To eliminate potential hazards read the instructions before you begin and make sure you have the tools and skills required e Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground the parking brake is set and the engine is off To clean parts use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner not gasoline To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion keep cigarettes sparks and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts e Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air 410 AWARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations and schedules in this owner s manual Potential Vehicle Hazards e Carbon Monoxide poison from engine exhaust Be sure there is adequate ven
318. oes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZERT ey RELOCK TIMER SETUP To exit SECURITY RELOCK TIMER without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU Multi Information Display Auto Door Unlock There are three settings you can choose from SHIFT TO P The driver s door or all the doors unlock when you move the shift lever to Park with the brake pedal depressed IGN OFF The driver s door or all the doors unlock when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK 0 position OFF The auto door unlock mode is deactivated all the time Customize ier SETUP While DOOR SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU Press the INFO A V button until you see the above display 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZERT DRIVER DOOR WITH SHIFT TO F RE ul Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as shown above Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection CONTINUED 111 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TO F SETUP UNLO SETTING INCOMPLETE CUSTOMIZERT SETUP When your choice is set you will see the above display f
319. off can cause the windows to fog up Switch to recirculation mode when driving through dusty or smoky conditions then return to fresh air mode Windshield Defroster Button 7 This button turns the windshield defroster on and off When you push this button air flows from the defroster vents at the base of the windshield and the system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A C When the indicator in the button is on the passenger s temperature cannot be set separately from the driver s 2011 RDX Rear Window Defogger Button Gy isp This button turns the rear window defogger on and off Pushing this button also turns the mirror heaters on and off see page 121 CONTINUED 167 soinjeoy Climate Control System Mode Button Use the MODE button to select the vents the air flows from Some air will flow from the dashboard corner vents in all modes The mode indicator in the display changes to the current mode each time you press the button 168 H Air flows from the center and corner vents in the dashboard 4 4 Airflow is divided between the vents in the dashboard and the floor vents Air flows from the floor vents 44 Airflow is divided between the floor vents and the defroster vents at the base of the windshield 2011 RDX To Turn Everything Off If you press the OFF button the climate control system shuts off completely e Keep the system off for short periods
320. olders the same way Playing Discs Models with navigation system DISC SCAN The disc scan function samples the first track file in MP3 WMA mode on each disc within the changer in numerical order To activate this feature press the SCAN button twice In the MP3 WMA mode press the SCAN button three times The first track file on each disc plays for about 10 seconds You will see SCAN next to the DISC icon on the audio control display You will also see SCAN and the disc number blinking on the upper display To hear the rest of the track file on the disc currently scanning press and hold the SCAN button for more than 2 seconds SCAN INDICATOR Disc FOLDER DISC SCAN ICON If you don t the system advances to the next disc plays about 10 seconds of it and continues through the rest of the discs the same way Each time you press and release the SCAN button the mode changes from scan to folder scan to disc scan then to normal play 2011 RDX RANDOM Random within a disc This feature plays the tracks all files in each folder in MP3 WMA mode within a disc in random order To activate random play press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display then push down the selector on the interface dial Rotate the interface dial to select TRACK RANDOM Press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection CONTINUED 251 soinjeoy
321. oline is highly flammable and explosive You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel e Stop the engine and keep heat sparks and flame away e Handle fuel only outdoors e Wipe up spills immediately FUEL FILL CAP TETHER CONTINUED 353 SULALIG ag Service Station Procedures Se Remove the fuel fill cap slowly You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank equalizes Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door 4 Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off Do not try to top off the tank This leaves some room in the fuel tank for the fuel to expand with temperature changes If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even though the tank is not full there may be a problem with your vehicle s fuel vapor recovery system The system helps keep fuel vapor from going into the atmosphere Try filling at another pump If this does not fix the problem consult your dealer 354 D o gt Screw the fuel fill cap back on until it clicks at least once If you do not properly tighten the cap you will see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi information display see right column on this page and the malfunction indicator lamp may also come on see page 466 Push the fuel fill door closed until it latches 2011 RDX Tighten Fuel Cap Message TIGHTEN FUEL CAP If your fuel fill cap is loose or missing a
322. ollow the above procedure exactly If you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine your vehicle must be transported with the front wheels off the ground With the front wheels on the ground do not tow the vehicle more than 50 miles 80 km and keep the speed below 35 mph 55 km h 476 NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle s weight 2011 RDX NOTICE The steering system can be damaged if the steering wheel is locked Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY I position and make sure the steering wheel turns freely before you begin towing Technical Information The diagrams in this section give you the dimensions and capacities of your vehicle and the locations of the identification numbers It also includes information you should know about your vehicle s tires and emissions control systems Identification Numbers 478 Specifications eesse 480 DOT Tire Quality Grading U S VENICIES ssscssedestassssestensescesis 482 Uniform Tire Quality Grading cccsssccessssseeeeeees 482 Treadweat cccccccecsssssssssseeeees 482 ACH OD vz ccscdescsscdveedevedinveides 482 Temperature ccccccecceeeeeee 483 Tire Labeling cccssccccssseeees 484 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Required Federal Explanation ccccssceccees
323. ollow the HFL prompts and say Enter to store the entry 2011 RDX NOTE e Avoid using duplicate name entries e Avoid using home as a name entry It is easier for HFL to recognize a multisyllabic or longer name For example use Peter instead of Pete or John Smith instead of J oh n CONTINUED 321 soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To edit the number stored in a name Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phonebook 2 Say Edit after the prompts 3 Follow the HFL prompts and say the name entry you want to edit 4 When asked say the new number for that name 5 Follow the HFL prompts to complete the edit 322 To delete a name Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phonebook 2 Say Delete after the prompts 3 Say the name you want to delete and follow the HFL prompts to complete the deletion 2011 RDX To list all names in the phonebook Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phonebook 2 Say List after the prompts 3 HFL begins reading the names in the order they were stored 4 If you hear a name you want to call immediately press the HFL Talk button and say Call Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To store a specific phone number from your cell phone directly to the HFL phonebook available on some phones Press and
324. on Proper Tire 444 Low Fuel Indicator cce 68 Recommended Pressures 445 Low Oil Pressure Inside Mirror cccceeceeeeeeeeeee 146 Indicator sidecases 65 465 Inspection Tire ccceceeseeeeeees 445 Low Tire Pressure TPMS Installing a Child Seat 0 45 a iag OUUU 478 MNGi CAtOR sinens 71 390 Instrument Panel ccceeeeees 63 Pe ts eae ENE settee 1 ae Lubricant Specifications Chart 480 Instrument Panel Brightness 120 p Shoulder Belt 4 Luggage Storing cargo 364 Instruments and Controls 61 LATCH Anchorage System 46 Intercooler cecessececeecereeeee 439 Lights MSY Interface Dial oi 216 a En soosneeeeeennanecs es See re maui anaes bt Interior ssccissysussescssovossesovsevesese 151 Maintenance ssssecseeseesees 409 ii AOA PARAS ees 116 Main Items and Sub Items 415 SE ra a aR A E i Minder eessen arn n 411 iPod ons 197 260 Ma aa sovsseeeeannnnseeeson sae an aera ace alan x Dernr AMoaocaanaraa 9NAN2 DEQ LAU LAILL sessssesoooooooooooosoososo 9 iPod Error Messages ASP LOCK enidan Key Position 125 Checks oo cesccesssesssssssessseesees 417 Locks Dale LY aoier sorre era a ese 410 J Anti theft Steering Column 125 Schedule w c cccccccscccsseesseeseees 418 Childproof Door sessseseseesesesese 127 Malfunction Indicator Jacking up the Ve
325. one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders These devices record front seat belt use front passenger seat occupancy airbag deployment data and the failure of any airbag system component This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service related devices that record information about powertrain performance The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes but it remains confidential California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags seat belt tensioners and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 2011 RDX A Few Words About Safety Your safety and the safety of others is very important And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility To help you make informed decisions about safety we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others Of course it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or ma
326. ook or any phone number You can also redial the last number called HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth which means the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is 30 feet 10 meters During a call HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you remove the key from the ignition switch However this may weaken the vehicle s battery 316 To make a call using a name in the HFL phonebook Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Call or Dial 2 Follow the HFL prompts and say the name stored in the HFL phonebook that you want to call 3 Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the name and make the call 2011 RDX To make a call using a phone number Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Call or Dial 2 Follow the HFL prompts and say the phone number you want to dial 3 Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number and say Call or Dial Once connected you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To redial the last number called by To make a call from an imported HFL phonebook on models with Press and release the HFL Talk navigation system button and say Redial Select an option Search Imported Dial Phonebook INFO Main Info b Other Import Cellular Delete Imported Phonebook Phonebook PIN Number Messages Traffic
327. oot 6 J AcuraLink Messages AcuraLink Messages 1 Delete Messages 2 New Message Notification 3 Auto Reading 4 Phone Data Connection pawn 5 Connect to the Acura Server To access the following functions press the SETUP button push the interface selector to the right to select MORE then rotate the interface knob to select AcuraLink Messages Delete Messages Select this option to delete all stored messages within a category except for diagnostic info and recall campaign messages These messages can only be deleted by a certified technician after the recall is done or the problem is corrected or through a broadcast message from Acura New Message Notification Select ON if you want to be notified of new messages envelope icon appears on the navigation screen Select OFF if you do not want to be notified of new messages envelope icon does not appear on the navigation screen 2011 RDX Auto Reading Select ON to have the system automatically read each message to you Select OFF to manually select the Voice option when you want a message read to you Phone Data Connection Select this option to begin the process required to connect to Acura This is used to access the most recent diagnostic information when a problem occurs CONTINUED 337 soinjeoy AcuraLink U S models only NOTE For the Phon
328. or several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU 112 If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX To exit AUTO DOOR UNLOCK without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU Controls Near the Steering Wheel HEADLIGHTS TURN PADDLE SHIFTERS WINDSHIELD UPPER DISPLAY SIGNAL FOG LIGHTS P 380 WIPERS WASHERS P 173 P 116 119 REAR WINDOW WIPER WASHER P 114 115 HAZARD WARNING BUTTON P 121 NAVIGATION SYSTEM CENTER DISPLAY P 172 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR P 33 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HEATED MIRROR BUTTON P 121 147 REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS P 289 VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST VSA OFF SWITCH P 396 MIRROR CONTROLS P 146 AUXILIARY INPUT JACK i P 291 VOICE CONTROL ie a n POWER BUTIONS lt SOCKET De P 157 BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK HORN BUTTONS P 306 SEAT HEATER SWITCHES STEERING WHEEL MULTI INFORMATION CRUISE CONTROL P 141 ADJUSTMENTS P 122 BUTTONS P 74 BUTTONS P 300 Vehicle with navigation system is shown 1 To use the horn press the center pad of the st
329. ore iPod with m 5th Ver 1 2 or more generation iPod nano Ver 1 2 or more iPod nano 2nd generation Ver 1 1 2 or more iPod nano 3rd generation Ver 1 0 or more iPod nano 4th generation Ver 1 0 2 or more iPod touch Ver 1 1 1 or more iPod touch Ver 2 1 1 or more 2nd generation iPhone Ver 2 1 0 or more iPhone 3G Ver 2 1 0 or more 2011 RDX Use only compatible iPods with the latest software iPods that are not compatible will not work in this audio unit NOTE e Do not connect your iPod using a hub e Do not keep the iPod in the vehicle Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector We recommend backing up your data before playing it Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter if this is the case use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device Playing an iPod Models without navigation system Connecting an iPod If the iPod indicator does not appear USB ADAPTER CABLE in the center display check the connections and try to reconnect the iPod a few times If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod the iPod may need to be reset Follow the instructions that came with your iPod or you can find reset instructions online at USB ADAPTER CABLE www apple com ipod 2 Connect your dock connector to 1 Push the release button to re
330. ore than 99 folders and each folder can hold up to 255 playable files When there are more than 99 folders on a disc the center display only shows two digits CONTINUED 189 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models without navigation system NOTE If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is protected by digital rights management DRM the audio unit displays FORMAT and then skips to the next file If the disc has a complex structure it will take a while to read the disc before the system begins to play it Depending on the software the files were made with it may not be possible to play some files or display some text data 190 Name Display Function Each time you press the DISP MODE button while playing a CD CD DA the center display changes from album name to track name to artist name and then to normal display If the disc was not recorded with CD TEXT NO INFO will be shown on the center display When playing a disc compressed in MP3 WMaA format the display changes from folder name to file name to artist tag to album tag to track tag and then to normal display each time you press the DISP MODE button If the disc was not recorded with this information NO INFO will be shown on the center display 2011 RDX If the title is too long it will not show all at once Press and hold the DISP MODE button and the rest of the title will show on the center display You will also see the album an
331. originally supplied with the vehicle Tire size and construction can affect wheel speed and may cause the ABS or VSA system to activate 2011 RDX It is best to replace all four tires at the same time If that is not possible or necessary replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels Also be sure you use only TPMS specific wheels If you do not the tire pressure monitoring system will not work Replacement wheels are available at your dealer CONTINUED 447 IDULUJQJJUIE IN Tires AWARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner s manual 448 Wheel and Tire Specifications Wheels 18 x 7 1 2J TPMS Tires P235 55R18 99V See page 482 for information about DOT Tire Quality Grading and page 484 for tire size and labeling information 2011 RDX Winter Driving Tires marked M S or All Season on the sidewall have an all weather tread design suitable for most winter driving conditions For the best performance in snowy or icy conditions you should install snow tires or tire chains They may be required by local laws un
332. orm for Previous Years Indicate Year and Model Desired 497 2011 RDX SURLY WUT pue uere Index A Armrests cssstceccusstaacctnatigstinceetncy 138 Maintenance setees Siete ac ectes 450 Audio Antenna cccsccceeeseees 439 Specifications cccssccceeseeees 481 Accessories and Audio System ccccseeees 172 216 Before Driving ccccceeeees 351 Modifications sseececceeeees 362 Automatic Lighting Off Belts Seat ccccssssseccssreeeess 9 20 ACCESSORY Ignition Key F Aatuire sss css essssaccasecssuenssdseveses 118 Beverage Holders ee 156 POSItION seren nannererernras 125 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners 22 Bluetooth Audio 212 280 Accessory Power Sockets 157 Automatic Speed Control 300 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink 306 AcuraLink U S models Automatic Transmission 376 Booster Seats ccsssccccsssscessses 54 Only szcavscssnpdenvdecevenceesviactionviers 332 Capacity FIG siisii 480 Brakes Additives Engine Oil wo 421 Checking Fluid Level 427 Anti lock Brakes ABS 388 Adjusting the Sound 177 224 Driving with the Paddle Break in New Linings 352 Adjusting the Steering Wheel 122 eo a E 380 Bulb Replacement 004 433 Advanced Airbags cccceccsseeeeees 28 SNINE serris aa nasr 376 MUA easa 429 Airbag SRS
333. ou to change or customize HFL basic settings 328 To set a 4 digit passcode to lock the HFL system for security purposes Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say System setup 2 Say Security after the prompts 3 Follow the HFL prompts and say the 4 digit passcode you want to set 4 Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number 2011 RDX NOTE Once a passcode is set you will need to enter it to use HFL each time you start the vehicle If you forget the code your dealer will have to reset it for you or you will have to clear the entire system see page 330 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To change your security pass code Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say System setup 2 Say Change passcode after the prompts 3 Follow the HFL prompts and say the new 4 digit passcode 4 Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number To select either a ring tone ora prompt as the incoming call notification Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say System setup 2 Say Call notification after the prompts 3 Follow the HFL prompts and say Ring tone or Prompt You can also say Off for no audible incoming call notification x The default setting is a ring tone 2011 RDX To activate or deactivate the auto transfer function If you get into the vehicle while you are on
334. ously plays a file Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off this feature FOLDER RANDOM This feature plays the files in the selected folder in random order TRACK RANDOM This feature plays all the files in random order 2011 RDX TRACK SCAN This function samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored To activate the scan feature push the selector to the right You will see TRACK SCAN on the screen You will also see SCAN on the upper display and the file number blinking You will get a 10 second sampling of each file in the folder Push the selector repeatedly to get out of the scan mode The system plays the last file sampled You can also select the scan feature with the SCAN button on the control panel Press and release the SCAN button Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the scan mode and play the last file sampled CONTINUED 277 soinjeoy Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models with navigation system FOLDER SCAN This function samples the first file in each folder in the order they are stored To activate the folder scan feature push the selector to the right repeatedly You will see FOLDER SCAN on the screen You will also see SCAN on the upper display and the folder number blinking You will get a 10 second sampling of the first file in each folder Push the selector repeatedly to get out of the scan mode The system plays the last file sampled
335. ow tire pressure TPMS indicator may come on unexpectedly Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS For example if you check and fill your tires in a warm area then drive in extremely cold weather the tire pressure will be lower than measured and could be underinflated and cause the low tire pressure TPMS indicator to come on Or if you check and adjust your tire pressure in cooler conditions and drive into extremely hot conditions the tire may become overinflated However the low tire pressure TPMS indicator will not come on if the tires are overinflated Refer to page 444 for tire inflation guidelines If there is a problem with the TPMS this indicator begins to flash It stops flashing after approximately 1 minute then stays on You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 393 Although your tire pressure is Tire Pressure Monitor monitored you must manually check the tire pressures monthly Each tire including the spare should be checked monthly when the oe vehicle is cold and set to the MENi LIRE DRESS Ok lt I recommended inflation pressure as ji NORMAL ly specified on the vehicle placard and 2 in the owner s manual see page page 445 INFO BUTTON To select the tire pressure monitor press the INFO button several times with the ignition switch in the ON dI position You will see the above display on the multi information display when all
336. ow to properly position the seats and seat backs The controls for the power adjustable front seats are on the outside edge of each seat bottom You can adjust the seats with the ignition switch in any position Make all seat adjustments before you start driving The passenger seat has the same adjustments as the driver s seat but without any height and lumbar adjustments t 4 t 4 134 DRIVER S SEAT Moves the seat forward and backward Moves the front of the seat up or down Driver s seat only Raises or lowers the seat Driver s seat only 2011 RDX PASSENGER S SEAT N S i Moves the whole seat up and forward or down and backward The front of the seat also tilts up or down at the same time Driver s seat only Adjusts the seat back angle forward or backward Increases or decreases the lumbar support Driver s seat only Seats Head Restraints See page 15 for important safety information and a warning about improperly positioning head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions to help protect you and your passengers from the likelihood of whiplash and other injuries They are most effective when you adjust them so the center of the back of the occupant s head rests against the center of the restraint 2011 RDX Front CUSHION SEAT BACK RELEASE BUTTON Adjusting the Head Restraint The front and rear head restraints ad
337. peatedly to select another audio interference that may cause undesired mode If iPod or USB flash memory Operation device is connected to the USB Changes or modifications not expressly adapter cable or audio unit is approved by the party responsible for connected to AUX jack pressing the compliance could void the user s CD AUX button also changes a authority to operate the equipment mode This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 215 2011 RDX soinjeoy Audio System Models with navigation system Interface Dial SELECTOR DIAL Most audio system functions can still be controlled by standard buttons bars and knob but some functions can only be accessed using the interface dial The interface dial has two parts a knob and a selector When you operate the audio system with the interface dial press the AUDIO button on the control panel to display the audio control on the navigation display 216 The knob turns left and right Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen The selector can be pushed left right up down and in Use the selector to scroll through lists to select menus and to hi
338. play is reset change the engine oil every year recommended by the Maintenance Minder If you a See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 417 regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions have the transmission and transfer fluid changed at 60 000 fg NOTE Independent of maintenance message in the Information Display miles 100 000 km then every 30 000 miles 48 000 km oO replace the brake fluid every 3 years 4 Replace spark plugs nspect idle speed every i miles m gt e t idl d 160 000 miles 256 000 km a g j i Inspect valve clearance Adjust the valves during services A B 1 2 or 3 if they are noisy 5 Replace engine coolant 6 Replace rear differential fluid Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical shear stress to fluid This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions have the differential fluid changed at 7 500 miles 12 000 km then every 15 000 miles 24 000 km 2 SH AWD only 418 2011 RDX Fluid Locations ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK Orange loop WASHER FLUID Blue cap ENGINE OIL FILL CAP POWER STEERING FLUID Red cap ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR RADIATOR CAP 2011 RDX BRAKE FLUID Black cap
339. position In the ON position the light stays on continuously except when the front ceiling light switch is in the position CONTINUED 151 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Interior Lights In the door activated position both front and rear ceiling lights come on when you e Open any door e Remove the key from the ignition switch e Unlock the doors with the key lock tab on the driver s door master door lock switch or remote transmitter After all doors are closed tightly the light s dims slightly then fades out in about 30 seconds 152 If you do not open any door after unlocking the driver s door or removing the key from the ignition switch the light s fade out in about 30 seconds If you leave any door open without the key in the ignition switch the light s will go off after 3 minutes To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME setting see page 98 2011 RDX Individual Map Lights LENSES You can use the front ceiling lights whenever the lights are off To turn a light on or off push its lens Interior Lights Courtesy Lights COURTESY LIGHTS The courtesy lights in the ceiling console come on when the parking lights are turned on You can adjust their brightness by turning the select reset knob on the instrument panel In addition to the courtesy lights on the ceiling the driver s and front passenger s ambient foot lights come on The courtesy light in eac
340. press the A SEL RDM button repeatedly You will see F RDM in the center display To turn it off press and hold the ASEL RDM button Each time you press the A SEL RDM button the mode changes from shuffle all play to shuffle album play then to normal play NOTE Available operating functions vary on models or versions Some functions may not be available on the vehicle s audio system CONTINUED 201 soinjeoy Playing an iPod Models without navigation system To Stop Playing Your iPod To play the radio press the AM FM or xm button Press the CD AUX button to switch between disc ifa disc is loaded Bluetooth Audio and the iPod 202 Disconnecting an iPod You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display Always make sure you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display before you disconnect it Make sure to follow the iPod s instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable x The displayed message may vary on models or versions On some models there is no message to disconnect 2011 RDX If you reconnect the same iPod the system may begin playing where it left off depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected iPod Error Messages For information see page 203 iPod Error Messages Models without navigation system If you see an error message in the cen
341. r and total of 1 Push the release button to release the iPod correctly and securely een ere a it the USB adapter cable 3 Install the dock connector to the eno PP pay USB ad bl l Pressing the AUDIO button displays adapter cable securely the artist album and track file names on the navigation screen CONTINUED 263 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing an iPod Models with navigation system To Change or Select Files To Select a File from iPod Menu Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files anmst Artist 1 SKIP Each time you press and Abem d release the gt gt I side of the SEEK SKIP bar the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file AET Press and release the K4 side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current file Press it again to skip to the beginning of the iPod Menu 1 Playlists Artists 3 Albums 4 Songs previous file You can also change files with the interface dial Press the AUDIO To move rapidly within a file press button to show the audio control Sree pae e pa aa and hold either side lor 4 of display Push the selector to the right i as and songs p sate ie the SEEK SKIP bar side to skip forward and to the left interface dial Pee ne AUDIO side to skip backward button to display the audio control display Push up the interface
342. rate to severe frontal collision sensors will detect the vehicle s rapid deceleration If the rate of deceleration is high enough the control unit will inflate the driver s and front passenger s airbags at the time and with the force needed 26 2011 RDX During a frontal crash your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest Although both airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other it is possible for only one airbag to deploy This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin or threshold that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy In such cases the seat belt will provide sufficient protection and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal Only the driver s airbag will deploy if there is no passenger in the front seat or if the advanced airbag system has turned the passenger s airbag off see page 33 Additional Information About Your Airbags The total time for inflation and Dual Stage Multiple Threshold Front deflation is one tenth of a second so Airbags SRS fast that most occupants are not Your vehicle is equipped with dual aware that the airbags deployed until stage multiple threshold front they see them lying in their laps airbags SRS During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy the airbags can inflate at different rates
343. rature The oil viscosity or weight is provided on the container s label 5W 30 oil is formulated for year round protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and fuel economy 421 2011 RDX IDULUJQJUIE IN Changing the Engine Oil and Filter Always change the oil and filter according to the maintenance messages shown on the multi information display The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from underneath the vehicle The vehicle should be raised on a service station type hydraulic lift for this service Unless you have the knowledge and proper equipment you should have this maintenance done by a skilled technician 422 OIL DRAIN BOLT WASHER ja Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature then shut it off Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap Remove the oil drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine Drain the oil into an appropriate container bo 2011 RDX 3 Remove the oil filter and let the remaining oil drain A special wrench available from your dealer is required 4 Check the oil filter to make sure its gasket did not stick to the filter base A stuck gasket could cause an oil leak 5 Install a new oil filter according to the instructions that come with it Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
344. re several system messages to be shown the display switches these messages every 5 seconds To switch the message s before 5 seconds have elapsed press the INFO A V button on the steering wheel SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR Pia r 2407 ra mw 260 1 Press the INFO A V button Even if you press the INFO A V button some messages stay on or come on again at regular intervals until the problem is corrected e FASTEN SEAT BELT e FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT e RELEASE PARKING BRAKE e DOOR amp TAILGATE OPEN 2011 RDX If the system message indicator remains lit on the instrument panel you can see the corresponding message s again by pressing the INFO A V button repeatedly 81 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display Customized Settings With the multi information display and the INFO A V and SEL RESET buttons on the right side of the steering wheel you can customize some vehicle control settings To enter the customizing mode press and hold the INFO A V button for more than 3 seconds To change the settings the ignition switch must be in the ON ID position and the vehicle must be stopped with the transmission in Park 82 You cannot customize the settings under these conditions e If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY I or the LOCK 0 position e If you move the shift lever out of Park The first customizing menu is e DEFAULT ALL e CHG SETTI
345. re he Servo error consult your dealer Do not try to force the disc MANUAL out of the player 2011 RDX Playing an iPod Models without navigation system USB INDICATOR iPod INDICATOR I AIC ON 2 temp PASSENGER AIRBAG c ACURA CD AUX BUTTON Ee DISP BUTTON RPT BUTTON AN Me ery aC WF SEEK SKIP BAR iE ibs Te e PWR VOL KONB RDM BUTTON TUNE FOLDER BAR SOUND CLOCK BUTTON U S model is shown CONTINUED 197 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing an iPod Models without navigation system To Play an iPod This audio system can operate the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the disc player To play an iPod connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector then press the CD AUX button The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY J or ON dD position The iPod will also be charged with the ignition switch in these positions The audio system reads and plays sound files to be playable on the iPod The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc 198 iPods compatible with your audio system using the USB adapter cable are Model Software iPod classic _ Ver 1 0 or m
346. reception can be affected by atmospheric conditions such as thunderstorms high humidity and even sunspots You may be able to receive a distant radio station one day and not receive it the next day because of a change in conditions Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems 2011 RDX As required by the FCC Changes or moditications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Remote Audio Controls MODE BUTTON VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON Three controls for the audio system are mounted in the steering wheel hub They let you control basic functions without removing your hand from the steering wheel The VOL button adjusts the volume up A or down Press the top or bottom of the button hold it until the desired volume is reached then release it The MODE button changes the mode On vehicles without navigation system Pressing the MODE button repeatedly cycles through all possible media sources whether they are present or not On vehicles with navigation system Pressing the MODE button repeatedly cycles through all present connected media sources Media sources that are not present or connected will not appear when cycling with the MODE button 2011 RDX If you are listening to the radio use the CH button to change stations Each time you press and releas
347. red indoors Disconnect the battery Support the front and rear wiper blade arms with a folded towel or rag so they do not touch the windshield To minimize sticking apply a silicone spray lubricant to all door and tailgate seals Also apply a vehicle body wax to the painted surfaces that mate with the door and tailgate seals 452 e Cover the vehicle with a breathable cover one made from a porous material such as cotton Non porous materials such as plastic sheeting trap moisture which can damage the paint e If possible periodically run the engine until it reaches full operating temperature the cooling fans cycle on and off twice Preferably do this once a month 2011 RDX Interior Care Leather Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently Pay close attention to the pleats and seams Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90 water and 10 neutral wool detergent solution Then buff it with a clean dry cloth Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately Taking Care of the Unexpected This section covers the more common problems that motorists experience with their vehicles It gives you information about how to safely evaluate the problem and what to do to correct it If the problem has stranded you on the side of the road you may be able to get going again If not you will also find instructions on getting your vehicle towed 2011 RDX Compact Spare T
348. release button on the front of the shift lever to shift from Park to reverse To shift from reverse to neutral come to a complete stop and then shift Press the release button before shifting into reverse from neutral Neutral N Use neutral if you need to restart a stalled engine or if it is necessary to stop briefly with the engine idling Shift to the Park position if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason Press on the brake pedal when you are moving the shift lever from neutral to another gear CONTINUED 377 SUIALIG Automatic Transmission Drive D Use this position for your normal driving The transmission automatically adjusts to keep the engine at the best speed for the driving conditions S Position S To shift into the S position press the release button on the front of the shift lever and move the lever to S This position is similar to D except only gears from first to fourth are selected The S position keeps the transmission from cycling between fourth and fifth gears in stop and go driving 378 With the shift lever in D or S you can also use the paddle shifters to shift the transmission up or down Once you begin to use the paddle shifters in S the transmission will no longer upshift or downshift automatically For more information of driving with the paddle shifters see page 380 2011 RDX Engine Speed Limiter If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are
349. release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phonebook 2 Say Receive contact after the prompts 3 Follow the HFL prompts select a number from your cell phone and send it to HFL 4 Follow the HFL prompts and name the number or say Discard if it is not the number you want to store on Follow the HFL prompts if you want to store another number On models with navigation system Cellular Phone Options available on some phones If you select Cellular Phone from the INFO screen menu you will see five HFL options For a list of cell phones that are compatible with this feature In the U S visit www acura com handstreelink or call 888 528 7876 In Canada visit www acura ca or call 888 9 ACURA 9 2011 RDX Import Cellular Phonebook The entire phonebook data of the cell phone that is linked to HFL can be imported to the navigation system Select an option Search Imported Phonebook Dial Import Cellular Phonebook Delete Imported Phonebook PIN Number Select Import Cellular Phonebook and HFL will begin importing the phonebook Select OK after the import is completed CONTINUED 323 soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Search Imported Phonebook Once a phonebook has been imported you can search the phone numbers by the person s name PIN CODE Select a phonebook 1 Eric s Phone Sep 2 2006 mm
350. ress the INFO 4 V button or rotate the select reset knob Customize GROUP EP CONTINUED 87 2011 RDX sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display Meter Setup Here are the four custom settings for the meter setup e LANGUAGE SELECTION e ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP DISPLAY e TRIP A amp AVG FUEL RESET with REFUEL e ELAP TIME RESET CONDITION While METER SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button Each time you press the INFO A V button the screen changes as shown in the illustration Press the INFO A V button until you see the setting you want to customize then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection 88 Uq Press the SEL Press the INFO EED See page 89 See page 91 See page 93 RESET button or the select reset knob 4 button or rotate the select reset knob EEE See page 95 2011 RDX Multi Information Display Language Selection There are three language selections you can make English French and lt Spanish To choose the language you wet WETER SETUP want follow these instructions While METER SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button You will see the above display 2011 RDX ENGLISH Vg Select the desired language by pressing the INFO A V button then enter your selectio
351. restraints do not return to their normal position or in the event ofa severe collision have the vehicle inspected by an Acura dealer 2011 RDX For a head restraint system to work properly Do not hang any items on the head restraints or from the restraint legs e Do not place any object between an occupant and the seat back e Install each restraint in its proper location e Only use genuine Acura replacement head restraints 137 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Seats Armrests Front The lid of the console compartment can be used as an armrest 138 The rear seat armrest is in the center of the rear seat Pivot it down to use it A beverage holder is located in the armrest 2011 RDX Folding the Rear Seats Down The rear seat backs can be folded down to give more cargo room Each side folds down separately So you can still carry a passenger in the rear seat Remove any items from the seat before folding down the seat back Make sure there are no items on the floor before folding down the seats Seats BUCKLE 1 Move the front seats as far forward 4 Push the armrest back in place as possible Make sure the front A seat backs are in the upright 7 Baie ga eok ofthe ei seal f batons cushion then pull up on the rear o p the seat cushion then fold the 2 Store the center seat belt buckle cushion forward into the pocket in the rear seat back 3 Lower the head restrain
352. reviously read messages ENVELOPE ICON Select a message T Appt Dec 22 at 8 00am Main Info gt Other al mi Eleetrie Power Steering 22 7 Cellular a Emissions System P0420 essages Phone Tire Pressure Monitor 83 Heading up AAN Tate ree N New Messages Q Traffic Incidents Weather Info J S Traffic Incidents Q Calender Weathe oy Information ZA S Calculator Trip Computer imoaceide 1 AcuraLink Messages Vehicle Stability Assist 31 e Select Messages to display the If you have new messages an a Souler ty Press the INFO button and the envelope icon appears in the top MESSAGES INFO screen will be shown right corner of the navigation screen f e Scroll up or down and select the To open a message message you want to read by e Press ENTER on the interface pressing ENTER on the interface selector then select New selector Messages from the navigation system map menu If there is more than one message stored in the system you will see a list of message titles CONTINUED 333 2011 RDX soinjeoy AcuraLink U S models only Unread messages have a closed envelope icon next to them The icon disappears when it has already been After purchasing your vehicle messages may not appear immediately Select a message category 7 ALL MESSAGES 2
353. rt with a frozen battery can cause it to rupture 2 Turn off all electrical accessories heater A C climate control audio system lights etc Put the transmission in Park and set the parking brake 2011 RDX I I EE BITA Ma MEZO F BOOSTER BATTERY The numbers in the illustration show you the order to connect the jumper cables CONTINUED 461 pepedxouy op jo 31 SULL Jump Starting Se Connect one jumper cable to the positive terminal on your battery Connect the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery 462 4 Connect the second jumper cable to the negative terminal on the booster battery Connect the other end to the grounding point as shown Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine 5 If the booster battery is in another vehicle have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle 6 Start your vehicle If the starter motor still operates slowly check that the jumper cables have good metal to metal contact 2011 RDX 7 Once your vehicle is running disconnect the negative cable from your vehicle then from the booster battery Disconnect the positive cable from your vehicle then from the booster battery Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until everything is disconnected Otherwise you may cause an electr
354. rvice or organization Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain It is very dangerous On SH AWD models The only way you can safely tow your vehicle is with flat bed equipment The operator will load your vehicle on the back of a truck Any other method of towing will damage the drive system When you contact the towing agency inform them a flat bed is required NOTICE Towing with only two tires on the ground will damage parts of the all wheel drive system Your vehicle should be transported on a flat bed truck or trailer Execpt SH AWD models There are two ways to tow your vehicle Flat bed Equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck This is the best way to transport your vehicle Wheel lift Equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground The rear tires remain on the ground This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle 2011 RDX If due to damage your vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground do this e Start the engine e Shift to the D position and hold for 5 seconds then to N e Turn off the engine e Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY I position so the steering wheel does not lock e Release the parking brake CONTINUED 475 pepedxouy op jo area Surely Emergency Towing NOTICE Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission F
355. s ccssesceceessseeees 211 279 Operation ssesseeesseerssseessseesssees 114 Used Oil How to Dispose of BAS Wheels icicc ceescdesscedissedsecesseesiveess 443 Adjusting the Steering 122 Alignment and Balance 447 Compact Spare c sccceesseceees 454 Vanity Mirror cccccccceeseeneeees 158 Wrench Nut sssssssseeeesssssssssss 455 Xl 2011 RDX Service Information Summary Gasoline Premium unleaded gasoline pump octane number of 91 or higher NOTICE Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter Fuel Tank Capacity 18 0 US gal 68 L Required Engine Oil Always use Mobil 1 5W 30 or an equivalent oil that meets the Acura HTO 06 standard Oil change capacity including filter 5 0 US qt 4 7 L Automatic Transmission Fluid Acura ATF Z1 automatic transmission fluid see page 427 On models with SH AWD Rear Differential Fluid Use Acura ATF Z1 automatic transmission fluid only Capacity SH AWD differential case 2 67 US qt 2 53 L On models with SH AWD Transfer Assembly Fluid SAE 90 or SAE 80W 90 viscosity hypoid gear oil API service classified GL4 or GL5 only 2011 RDX Power Steering Fluid Acura Power Steering Fluid preferred or another brand of power steering fluid as a temporary replacement Do not use ATF see page 430 Bra
356. s 1 5 percent see page 411 Maintenance Minder SERVICE PAST DUE Al If the indicated maintenance service is not done and the remaining engine oil life reaches 0 the multi information display will show the message SERVICE PAST DUE and the maintenance item code s This message is displayed when the total distance traveled is less than 10 miles for U S models or 10 km for Canadian models after the engine oil life became 0 These messages will come on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position Immediately have the service performed and make sure to reset the oil life minder as previously described INST MPG 20 Hi ao OIL LIFE 0 SERVICE The message will be canceled if the V or A button on the steering wheel is pressed Press the V or A button to see the message again Press the SEL RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life The message SERVICE along with 0 and the maintenance item code are displayed on the lower part of the multi information display when the calculated engine oil life is 0 1 CONTINUED 413 2011 RDX IDULUJUIE IN Maintenance Minder TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCE TRAVELED 10mile SERVICE U S PAST DUE A1 CANADA MAINTENANCE CODE 10km SERVICE PAST DUE Al If the indicated required service is not done and the remaining engine oil life becomes 0 the multi
357. s 51 Protecting Larger Children 53 Checking Seat Belt Fit 53 Using a Booster Seat cc00es 54 When Can a Larger Child Sit in TORE orreitan rei eee Ten Er REE 59 Additional Safety Precautions 56 Carbon Monoxide Hazard 57 Safety Labels cscssescscesceeseseees 58 5 Jes Josuesseg pur PAA Important Safety Precautions You ll find many safety recommendations throughout this section and throughout this manual The recommendations on this page are the ones we consider to be the most important Always Wear Your Seat Belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts not replace them So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts and wear them properly see page 15 Restrain All Children Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat not the front seat Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap shoulder belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat see pages 36 56 2011 RDX Be Aware of Airbag Hazards While airbags can save lives they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them or are not properly restrained Infants young children and short adults are at the
358. s feature press the RPT button for more than 2 seconds CONTINUED 191 soinjeoy Playing Discs Models without navigation system In MP3 WMA mode FOLDER REPEAT This feature when activated replays all the files in the current folder in the order they are compressed in MP3 WMA To activate folder repeat mode press the RPT button twice You will see F RPT on the center display Press and hold the RPT button for more than 2 seconds to turn off this feature DISC REPEAT Press the RPT button twice to continuously replay the current CD In MP3 WMA mode press the RPT button three times You will see D RPT on the center display Press and hold the RPT button for more than 2 seconds to turn off this feature Each time you press and release the RPT button the mode changes from repeat to folder repeat disc repeat then to normal play 192 SCAN The scan function samples all the tracks files in a folder in MP3 WMA mode on the current disc in the order they are recorded on the CD To activate this feature press and release the SCAN button You will see SCAN and the track file number flashing on the center display The system will then play the track file for approximately 10 seconds To hear the rest of the track file press and hold the SCAN button for more than 2 seconds If you do nothing the system will then play the following tracks files for 10 seconds each When the system finishes s
359. s more power when climbing uphills You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm The transmission also shifts automatically as the vehicle comes to a complete stop It downshifts to first gear when the vehicle speed reaches 6 mph 10 km h or less The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if e You downshift before the engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower gear If you try to do this the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times then return to a higher gear e You upshift before the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher gear e You try to shift to third or a higher gear when the vehicle is stationary You pull both paddle shifters at the same time e You pull one of the two paddle shifters while continuously pulling on the other one 2011 RDX Starting in Second Gear When you are in sequential shift mode and the vehicle is stopped pull the right paddle shifter to shift to second gear You will see M2 in the display Starting in second gear helps to reduce wheelspin in deep snow or ona slippery surface CONTINUED 383 Sunna Driving with the Paddle Shifters Super Handling All Wheel Drive SH AWD System Recommended Shift Points Drive in the highest gear that lets the engine run and accelerate smoothly This will give you good fuel economy and effective emissions control
360. s without navigation system REARVIEW CAMERA DISPLAY tt S n auo 5A SSS aay POWER BUTTON You can turn the camera display on and off by pressing the power button when the shift lever is in reverse The camera display turns on everytime you shift to reverse even if you turned it off the last time Whenever you shift to reverse R with the ignition switch in the ON I position the rear view appears on a display in the rearview mirror 348 2011 RDX For the best picture always keep the rearview camera clean and do not cover the camera lens To avoid scratching the lens when you clean it use a moist soft cloth Since the rearview camera display area is limited you should always back up slowly and carefully and look behind you for obstacles Rearview Mirror with Rearview Camera Display If the engine has just been started it may take a short time for the system to display the rearview The camera display brightness is adjusted automatically by sensors If you use the camera display continuously at high temperature the image will gradually dim and eventually turn off automatically If you change to another shift position the camera display will come on again when you return to reverse The inside mirror will be hot when you use the monitor for an extended period of time If a bright light such as sunlight is reflected on the mirror the image may be difficult to see
361. see page 255 begins playing press the eject button Adjusting the Sound Press and hold the eject button until For information see page 224 you hear a beep to remove all the discs from the changer You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off by pressing the eject button The disc that was last selected is ejected first You can eject the rest of the discs one at a time 254 2011 RDX Disc Changer Error Messages Models with navigation system If you see an error message in the display while playing a CD find the Error Cause Solution 4 Message cause in the chart to the right If you g cannot clear the error message take the vehicle to your dealer Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc CHECK DISE FOCUS Error changer Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged For more information see page 258 Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc Check the disc for damage or deformation For MECH ERROR x more information see page 258 Mechanical Error If the disc cannot be pulled out or the error message does not disappear after the disc is ejected see your dealer Will disappear when the temperature returns to T HO High Temperature amna Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc CHECK DISC LOAD Check Disc Make sure a playable disc is in the CD changer see page 241 Press the EJECT button and pull out the
362. selling dealer is Acura of Manhattan and your servicing dealer is Acura Of Columbus May 16 06 Delete f Stop Reading Call These messages based on updated vehicle information and comments from other RDX owners supplement your Owner s Manual and Advanced Technology Guide They provide you with relevant information for a safe and enjoyable ownership experience For additional information call Acura Client Services directly through the HFL Feature Guide AcuraLink Messages May 16 06 AcuraLink Feature Guide messages give details about your vehicle A message appears once a day stop Reading call Delete During the first 90 days of ownership one of 22 different messages appears each day These messages help you to use and understand the technological features of your vehicle 2011 RDX Maintenance Minder Maintenance System A1 May 16 07 Vehicle maintenance is due See owner s manual or select VOICE to hear maintenance items Stop Reading Call Your Dealer G Acura Dir Schedule Dealer Appt Delete These messages provide detailed information about the service needed for your vehicle When a maintenance message appears on the multi information display a list of needed maintenance items is provided through an Acuralink message These messages tell you the exact maintenance needed he
363. setup and say Pair bo Follow the HFL prompts and put your phone in discovery or search mode HFL will give you a 4 digit pairing code and begin searching for your phone 3 When your phone finds a Bluetooth device select HFL from the options and enter the 4 digit code from the previous step 4 Follow the HFL prompts and name the newly paired phone 2011 RDX On U S vehicles with navigation system Once the pairing process is completed AcuraLink may display a connection confirmation screen This screen is used to create a data connection between your cell phone and the AcuraLink system You can choose to set up the data connection later or do it later If you want to do it now exit the HFL menu by pressing the HFL Back button one or more times CONTINUED 313 soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To rename a paired phone Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phone setup 2 Say Edit after the prompts 3 If there is more than one phone paired to the system HFL will ask you which phone s name you want to change Follow the HFL prompts and rename the phone 314 To delete a paired phone Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Phone setup 2 Say Delete after the prompts 3 HFL will ask you which phone you want to delete Follow the HFL prompts to continue with the deletion 2011 RDX To hear the names
364. shown on the multi information display FASTEN Hals Awe See page PNE See pase seal See page RR aes See page A OTEN 12 PRESSURE 392 RELEASE RELEASE OIL BRAKE 0 EER See page En PRESSURE See page 67 LOW 465 U S Canada an OH See page aa CHECK ING See page 467 SYSTEM 465 U S Canada CHECK CHECK IA OELH See page See page 467 468 466 U S Canada CONTINUED 79 2011 RDX sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display O Sa See page VS AOSA See page r TAI GATE See page MISSION 376 SYSTEM 395 m 12 SHAWN See page starter I T Starter See page TIGHTEN See page SYSTEM 385 SYSTEM SYSTEM 375 FUEL CAP 354 U S Canada See page a eee PIE See page oa MASHER See page 385 oe A AIRBAG 32 lt LOW 426 U S Canada SERVICE pa EDK See page DRL See page DUE NOW See page system 32 SYSTEM 119 A 412 CHECK O ABS See page N FUEL LOW See page jar See page SYSTEM 388 68 125 80 2011 RDX Multi Information Display The system message s triggers the appropriate indicator s on the instrument panel including the system message indicator to come on The system message indicator does not go off until the problem s is corrected You will also hear a beep when the system message comes on for the first time Most of the messages are displayed for about 5 seconds and then the normal display returns If there a
365. shut off However the indicator will not come on The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold If an adult or teenage passenger is riding in front move the seat as far to the rear as possible and have the passenger sit upright and wear the seat belt properly 2011 RDX If the indicator comes on with no front seat passenger and no objects on the seat or with an adult riding there something may be interfering with the weight sensors Look for and remove e Any items under the front passenger s seat e Any object s hanging on the seat or in the seat back pocket e Any object s such as a folded down back seat that are touching the rear of the seat back If no obstructions are found have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible 33 Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAIA Additional Information About Your Airbags Airbag Service Your airbag systems are virtually maintenance free and there are no parts you can safely service However you must have your vehicle serviced if e An airbag ever inflates Any airbag that has deployed must be replaced along with the control unit and other related parts Any seat belt tensioner that activates must also be replaced Do not try to remove or replace any airbag by yourself This must be done by an authorized dealer or a knowledgeable body shop 34 The SRS in
366. so your radio could display a frequency of 100 9 even though the announcer may identify the station as FM101 FM AM Radio Reception How well the radio receives stations is dependent on many factors such as the distance from the station s transmitter nearby large objects and atmospheric conditions A radio station s signal gets weaker as you get farther away from its transmitter If you are listening to an AM station you will notice the sound volume becoming weaker and the station drifting in and out If you are listening to an FM station you will see the stereo indicator flickering off and on as the signal weakens Eventually the stereo indicator will go off and the sound will fade completely as you get out of range of the station s signal 2011 RDX Driving very near the transmitter of a station that is broadcasting on a frequency close to the frequency of the station you are listening to can also affect your radio s reception You may temporarily hear both stations or hear only the station you are close to CONTINUED 287 soinjeoy FM AM Radio Reception Radio signals especially on the FM band are deflected by large objects such as buildings and hills Your radio then receives both the direct signal from the station s transmitter and the deflected signal This causes the sound to distort or flutter This is a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving 288 Radio
367. splay Door Lock Mode To select whether the driver s door unlocks or all the doors unlock when you unlock the doors with the remote transmitter or the key follow these instructions waa la DOOR Be TUPI DOOR LOCK MODE re fie While DOOR SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU Press the INFO A V button until you see the above display 2011 RDX DRIVER DOOR Vio Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as shown above Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection CONTINUED 105 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display DOOR LOCK MODE ALL DOORS SETUP DOOR LOCK SETTING INCOMPLETE CUSTOMIZE DOOR LOCK MODE When your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU 106 If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX re So To exit DOOR LOCK MODE without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button and then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU Multi Information Display Keyless Lock Acknowledgement When yo
368. ss the bottom to skip backward to the beginning of the current file Press it twice to return to the previous file When playing a USB flash memory device you can also use the seek function to skip the folder To activate this press and hold either side of the CH button until you hear a beep Auxiliary Input Jack accessories The auxiliary input jack is on the disc changer unit The system will accept auxiliary input from standard audio 2011 RDX When the audio system is on and you plug in a mini jack cable between a compatible audio unit and the jack you will see AUX in the display and the system automatically switches to AUX mode 291 soinjeoy Radio Theft Protection Your vehicle s audio system will disable itself if it is disconnected from electrical power for any reason To make it work again you must enter a specific five digit code with the preset bars or buttons depending on models Because there are hundreds of number combinations possible from the five digits making the system work without knowing the exact code is nearly impossible You should have received a card that lists your audio system code number and serial number It is best to store this card in a safe place at home In addition you should write the audio system s serial number in this owner s manual If you lose the card you must obtain the code number from your dealer To do this you will need the audio syste
369. ssenger s front airbag inflates in a moderate to severe frontal collision the airbag can cause serious injuries to a child who is unrestrained improperly restrained sitting too close to the airbag or out of position A side airbag also poses risks If any part of a larger child s body is in the path of a deploying side airbag the child could receive possibly serious injuries 2011 RDX Of course children vary widely And while age may be one indicator of when a child can safely ride in front there are other important factors you should consider Physical Size Physically a child must be large enough for the lap shoulder belt to properly fit see pages 15 and 53 If the seat belt does not fit properly with or without the child sitting on a booster seat the child should not sit in front Maturity To safely ride in front a child must be able to follow the rules including sitting properly and wearing the seat belt properly throughout a ride CONTINUED 55 Ayoyes Jesuesseg pur PAIA Protecting Larger Children If you decide that a child can safely ride up front be sure to e Carefully read the owner s manual and make sure you understand all seat belt instructions and all safety information Move the vehicle seat to the rear most position Have the child sit up straight back against the seat and feet on or near the floor Check that the child s seat belt is properly and securely posit
370. st be properly restrained in child seats Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash even though your vehicle has airbags In addition most states and all Canadian provinces require you to wear seat belts AWARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash even though your vehicle has airbags Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly When properly worn seat belts e Keep you connected to the vehicle so you can take advantage of the vehicle s built in safety features e Help protect you in almost every type of crash including frontal impacts side impacts rear impacts rollovers 2011 RDX e Help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle and against other occupants Keep you from being thrown out of the vehicle Help keep you in a good position should the airbags ever deploy A good position reduces the risk of injury from an inflating airbag and allows you to get the best advantage from the airbag Of course seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash But in most cases seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury What You Should Do Always wear your seat belt and make sure you wear it properly Ayoyes Josuesse g pur PAIA Your Vehicle s Safety Features ATA A Your vehicle also has sid
371. strong station and play it for 10 seconds When it plays a station that you want to listen to press the SCAN button again or push the interface selector to the right again PRESET ICONS Preset Each preset button icon can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM To view the preset icons on the audio control display push the AUDIO button 2011 RDX 1 Select the desired band AM or FM FM1 and FM2 let you store two sets of FM frequencies with the preset buttons on screen icons 2 Use the TUNE SEEK or SCAN function to tune the radio to a desired station 3 Pick a preset number 1 6 you want for that station Press the preset button and hold it until you hear a beep CONTINUED 221 soinjeoy Playing the FM AM Radio Models with navigation system To store the frequency on a preset icon turn the interface dial to select a desired preset icon The selected preset icon will be highlighted Press and hold ENTER on the selector for more than 2 seconds to store the frequency 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM 222 AUTO SEL INDICATOR A SEL ICON AUTO SELECT If you are traveling and can no longer receive your preset stations you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area 2011 RDX To activate AUTO
372. sure are low inflate them to the correct pressure For more information see page 392 78 Temperature Gauge This shows the temperature of the engine s coolant During normal operation the reading should rise from the C Cold mark to about the middle of the gauge In severe driving conditions such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving the reading may rise to near the H Hot mark of the gauge If it reaches the H mark pull safely to the side of the road See page 463 for instructions and precautions on checking the engine s coolant system 2011 RDX Bluetooth HandsFreeLink You can receive or make phone calls from your cell phone through your vehicle s Bluetooth HandsFreeLink HFL system without touching your cell phone To use the system your cell phone and the HFL system must be linked Not all cell phones are compatible with this system Refer to page 313 for instructions on how to link your cell phone to HFL and how to receive or make phone calls or visit the acura com handsfreelink website In Canada visit www acura ca or call 1 888 9 HONDA 9 Multi Information Display System Messages If there is a problem with your vehicle for example the engine oil level is low or a door is not fully closed the multi information display will show you the problem It does this by interrupting the current display with one or more messages Here is a list of messages
373. t should be installed as firmly as possible However it does not need to be rock solid Some side to side movement can be expected and should not reduce the child seat s effectiveness If the child seat is not secure try installing it in a different seating position or use a different style of child seat that can be firmly secured 2011 RDX 3 Secure the child in the child seat Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child seat according to the child seat maker s instructions A child who is not properly secured in a child seat can be seriously injured in a crash The following pages provide guidelines on how to properly install a child seat A forward facing child seat is used in all examples but the instructions are the same for rear facing child seats 45 Ayoyes Jesuesseg pur PAA Installing a Child Seat Installing a Child Seat with LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren at the rear seats to secure a child seat in any seating position one in each outer seating position or one in the center BUTTON LOWER ANCHORS FOR CENTER LATCH The five lower anchors are located between the seat back and seat bottom and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH LOWER ANCHORS FOR OUTER LATCH The location of each lower anchor is indicated by a small button above the anchor point When you install a ch
374. t Headlight High 6 20A FR Fog Lights 14 7 5A Small Lights Interior T 75A Driver s Power Seat Lumbar 15 15A Small Lights Exterior Support 16 15A_ Right Headlight Low 8 10A RR Wiper 17 15A Left Headlight Low 2011 RDX x SH AWD models only CONTINUED 473 pepedxouy op jo 3J Surely Fuse Locations UNDER HOOD FUSE BOXES PRIMARY SECONDARY 474 Primary Fuse Box No Amps Circuits Protected No Amps Circuits Protected 11 15A LAF 1 100A Main Fuse 12 15A Stop amp Horn 30A SH AWD 13 20A Driver s Power Seat Reclining 2 80A Option Main 14 20A Driver s Power Seat Sliding 50A Ignition Switch Main 15 7 5A _ IGPS Oil Level 3 40A ABS VSA Motor 16 20A Passenger s Power Seat Sliding 20A ABS VSA Fail Safe 17 15A Electric Vacuum Pump 4 50A Headlight Main 18 15A IG Coil 40A Power Window Main 19 15A FI Main 5 30A Passenger s Power Seat 20 75A MG Clutch Reclining 21 15A DBW 30A Main Fan Motor 22 75A Interior Light 30A Sub Fan Motor 23 10A Back Up 30A Rear Defogger Ojojoo 40A Blower 10 15A Hazard Secondary Fuse Box No Amps Circuits Protected 1 7 5A Electric Vacuum Pump 2 20A Passenger s Power seat Reclining 2011 RDX x On SH AWD models only Emergency Towing If your vehicle needs to be towed call a professional towing se
375. t any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on e Never let passengers ride in the cargo area or on top of a folded down back seat If they do they could be very seriously injured in a crash Passengers should not stand up or change seats while the vehicle is moving A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle against other occupants or out of the vehicle Two people should never use the same seat belt If they do they could be very seriously injured in a crash belts Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability of the belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates Keep your hands and arms away from the airbag covers If your hands or arms are close to an airbag cover they could be injured if the airbag inflates 2011 RDX the front airbag covers Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate Do not attach hard objects on or near a door If a side airbag or a s
376. t have the proper coolant mixture available you can add plain water Remember to have the cooling system drained and refilled with the proper mixture as soon as you can 10 Put the radiator cap back on tightly Run the engine and watch the temperature gauge If it goes back to the H mark the engine needs repair see Emergency Towing on page 475 If the temperature stays normal check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank If it has gone down add coolant to the MAX mark Put the cap back on tightly Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator Low Oil Pressure Indicator TA This indicator should never come on when the engine is running If it starts flashing or stays on the oil pressure has dropped very low or lost pressure Serious engine damage is possible and you should take immediate action You will also see an OIL PRESSURE LOW message on the multi information display see page 79 NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately Turn off the engine as soon as you can safely get the vehicle stopped 1 Safely pull off the road and shut off the engine Turn on the hazard warning lights bo Let the vehicle sit for a minute Open the hood and check the oil level see page 356 An engine very low on oil can lose pressure during cornering and other driving maneuvers Se If necessar
377. t lever move the lever to the S position then pull either paddle shifter To cancel the sequential shift mode and return to the ordinary automatic transmission move the shift lever from the S position When moving the shift lever be careful not to operate incorrectly While you are driving in the sequential shift mode the transmission will not automatically return to ordinary automatic transmission 382 GEAR POSITION INDICATOR When you move the shift lever from D to S and pull either paddle shifter the gear position indicator displays M along with the selected gear number To upshift pull the right paddle shifter To downshift pull the left paddle shifter 2011 RDX When you accelerate from a stop the transmission starts in first gear and you must manually upshift between first and fifth gears Make sure you upshift before the engine speed reaches the tachometer s red zone The transmission remains in the selected gear 5 4 3 2 or 1 There is no automatic downshift when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor When you are driving in 4th or 5th gear the transmission downshifts to the lower gear under the following conditions e The vehicle slows down to a certain speed e You press the brake pedal Driving with the Paddle Shifters Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills and provide
378. t pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics DOT Tire Quality Grading U S Vehicles Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 483 2011 RDX woneULIOyUy erya Tire Labeling The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markin
379. ted is ejected first You can eject the rest of the discs one at a time Protecting Discs For information on how to handle and protect compact discs see page 257 Disc Changer Error Messages For information see page 195 Adjusting the Sound For information see page 177 Disc Changer Error Messages Models without navigation system If you see an error message in the display while playing a CD find the cause in the chart to the right If you cannot clear the error message take the vehicle to your dealer Error Cause Solution Message Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc CHECK DISC FOCUS Error changer Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged For more information see page 258 MECH ERROR Mechanical Error Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc Check the disc for damage or deformation For more information see page 258 If the disc cannot be pulled out or the error message does not disappear after the disc is ejected see your dealer HOT High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal CHECK DISC LOAD Check Disc Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc Make sure a playable disc is in the CD changer see page 187 CHANGER ERROR Check Disc and Changer Error Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc Check the disc for damage or deformation For more inform
380. ter display while playing an iPod find the solution in the chart to the right If you cannot clear the error message take your vehicle to your dealer Error Message Cause Solution USB ERROR USB ROM error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit BAD USB DEVICE PLEASE CHECK Abnormal power Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected Disconnect the iPod Sai UA Source device Then turn the audio system off and turn it on again Do not reconnect the device that caused the error i Appears when the iPod is empty Store NO SONG No files in iPod some files in the iPod Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected See page 198 for specification AAST RTED ee unsupported information on iPods If it appears when a supported iPod is connected update the iPod software to the newer version si Appears when the system does not CONNECT RETRY Recognition failure of acknowledge the iPod Reconnect the iPod 2011 RDX 203 s mM Le y Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models without navigation system USB INDICATOR FILE TYPE I AIC ON 2 temp PASSENGER AIRBAG La ACURA CD AUX BUTTON i L coaux uom TT Fa J am Josee DISP BUTTON RPT BUTTON j AY _ wz SCAN BUTTON sco er Oz RDM BUTTON SEEK SKIP BAR Ee SS CREA TUNE FOL
381. ter your selection You will see REPEAT next to the DISC icon on the audio control display To turn off this feature select the DISC REPEAT then press ENTER again REPEAT INDICATOR Dise REZNE FOLDER FOLDER REPEAT ICON In MP3 WMA mode FOLDER REPEAT This feature when activated replays all the files in the selected folder in the order they are compressed in MP3 WMA To activate folder repeat press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display then push down the selector on the interface dial Rotate the interface dial to select FOLDER REPEAT Press ENTER on the selector to enter your selection 2011 RDX You will see FOLDER REPEAT on the audio control display To turn off this feature select FOLDER REPEAT then press ENTER again SCAN The scan function samples all tracks files in a folder in MP3 or mode on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc To activate scan press and release the SCAN button You will also see SCAN and the track file number blinking on the upper display To hear the rest of the track file press and hold the SCAN button for more than 2 seconds If you don t the system advances to the next track file plays about 10 seconds of it and continues through the rest of the track file the same way When the system finishes scanning all the tracks files on the current disc the system returns to the track f
382. the ignition switch to the ON ID position If this indicator comes on at any other time there is a problem in the SH AWD system You will also see a CHECK SH AWD SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 80 Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked For more information see page 385 Instrument Panel Indicators If this indicator blinks while driving it indicates the differential temperature is too high You will also see an SH AWD DIFF TEMP HIGH message on the multi information display see page 80 Pull to the side of the road when it is safe shift to Park and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out If the indicator does not go out take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked For more information see page 385 NOTICE Continuing to drive with the SH AWD indicator blinking may cause serious damage to the system Low Tire Pressure TPMS Indicator This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position This indicator has two functions 1 If it comes on while driving it indicates that one or more of your vehicle s tires are significantly low on pressure 2011 RDX You will also see a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message on the multi information display see page 79 Check the tire pressure monitor on the multi information display and determine the cause see page 392 If t
383. the upper half of the space by putting the shelves down until they latch The front and rear shelves can be used separately The items on each shelves should not exceed 11 Ibs 5 kg Heavy items may damage the shelves CONTINUED 159 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Interior Convenience Items Cargo Area Cover HOOK TAB lt a gt ME PEN 7 CARGO 10 D y NS z C HANGER BAR When you store a large item like a an To remove it needa nes the shelves up to create Your vehicle has a cargo area cover 1 Open the tailgate Remove the ae Spans to conceal your luggage and protect hook from the tab on the tailgate The maximum dimensions of the them from direct sunlight Make sure you use both hands to item you can store in the console x prevent the cargo area cover from compartment are Do not put any items on top of the falling accidentally cargo area cover They can block Length 16 9 in 430 mm your view and be thrown around the 2 Lift and pull the rear edge of the Height 12 2 in 310 mm vehicle during a crash cargo area cover slightly to unlock Width 5 5 in 140 mm The car b it from the hanger bars then go area cover may be removed to give you more cargo remove it straight out space 160 2011 RDX Interior Convenience Items Coat Hook 3 Place the cargo area cover on the cargo area floor To use a coat hook pull it down Make sure the cargo area cover is secur
384. the channel on a preset icon rotate the interface dial to select a desired preset icon The selected preset icon will be highlighted Press and hold ENTER on the selector for more than 2 seconds to store the channel CONTINUED 233 2011 RDX soinjeoy Playing the XM Radio Models with navigation system XM Radio Display Messages LOADING XM is loading the audio or program information OFF AIR The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting 234 UPDATING The encryption code is being updated Wait until the encryption code is fully updated Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally NO SIGNAL The signal is currently too weak Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon 2011 RDX c The selected channel number does not exist or is not part of your subscription or this channel has no artist or title information at this time ANTENNA There is a problem with the XM antenna Please consult your dealer Playing the XM Radio Models with navigation system Satellite Radio Signals Satellite radio receives signals from Signal may be Signal is weaker in two satellites to produce clear high blocked by these areas quality digital reception It offers mountains or large obstacles to the south many channels in several categories Along with a large selection of
385. the child s head is thrown forward during a collision an inflating airbag can strike the child with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries Even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger s front airbag off see page 33 a back seat is the safest place for a small child If itis necessary to put a forward facing child seat in the front move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible and be sure the child seat is firmly secured to the vehicle and the child is properly strapped in the seat 2011 RDX Placing a forward facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates If you must place a forward facing child seat in front move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and properly restrain the child 43 Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAA Selecting a Child Seat When buying a child seat you need to choose either a conventional child seat or one designed for use with the Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH system Conventional child seats must be secured to a vehicle with a seat belt whereas LATCH compatible seats are secured by attaching the seat to hardware built into the rear seating positions 44 Since LATCH compatible child seats are easier to install and reduce the possibility of improper installation we recommend selecting this style In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with L
386. the climate control system when it is in the AUTO mode All other features remain automatically controlled Fan Control Select the fan speed by pressing the fan control buttons amp A or 8 V The fan speed is represented by vertical bars in the display Temperature Control To adjust the desired temperature push the temperature control buttons A or V 2011 RDX Dual Button Press the DUAL button to select dual temperature control mode see page 169 The indicator in the DUAL button comes on When you press the DUAL button again indicator turns off both sides adjust to the driver s side temperature Air Conditioning A C Button Press the A C button to turn the air conditioning on and off You will see A C ON or A C OFF in the display When you turn the A C off the system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the temperature control below the outside temperature Climate Control System Recirculation Button 4e When the indicator in the button is on air from the vehicle s interior is sent through the system again When the indicator is off air is brought in from the outside of the vehicle fresh air mode The outside air intakes for the climate control system are at the base of the windshield Keep this area clear of leaves and other debris The system should be left in fresh air mode under almost all conditions Keeping the system in recirculation mode particularly with the A C
387. the phone the call can be automatically transferred to HFL with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY I or ON ID position 1 Say System setup 2 Say Auto transfer after the prompts 3 HFL will let you know if auto transfer is on or off depending on the previous setting Follow the HFL prompts to change the setting CONTINUED 329 soinjeoy Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To clear the system This operation clears the passcodes paired phones all names in the HFL phonebook and all imported phonebook data Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say System setup 2 Say Clear after the prompts 3 Follow the HFL prompts to continue to complete the clearing procedure 330 You can also clear the system when you have forgotten the passcode and cannot access HFL When HFL asks you for the passcode say System clear Paired phones all names in the HFL phonebook and all imported phonebook data will be lost 2011 RDX Quick Language Selection Canadian models only To quickly change the language Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say the language you want to change to in that language 2 Follow the HFL prompts Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Change Language Canadian models only To change the system language between English and French Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command 1 Say Change languag
388. the switch and hold it 142 The windows will operate for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch Opening either front door cancels this function AWARNING Closing a power window on someone s hands or fingers can cause serious injury Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them 2011 RDX When you push the MAIN switch in the switch is off and the passenger windows cannot be raised or lowered To cancel this feature push on the switch again to get it to pop out Keep the MAIN switch off when you have children in the vehicle so they do not injure themselves by operating the windows unintentionally Power Windows AUTO To open or close either front window fully push or pull the window switch firmly down or up to the second detent and release it The window will automatically go up or down all the way To stop the window pull or push the window switch briefly To open or close either front window partially push down or pull back on the window switch lightly to the first detent and hold it The window will stop when you release the switch AUTO REVERSE If either front window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically it will reverse direction and then stop To close the window remove the obstacle then use the window switch again Auto reverse stops sensing when the window is almost closed You should always check that all passengers
389. tilation whenever you operate the engine Burns from hot parts Let the engine and exhaust system cool down before touching any parts 2011 RDX e Injury from moving parts Do not run the engine unless instructed to do so Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner s manual Some of the most important safety precautions are given here However we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task Maintenance Minder One of the most convenient and important features of the multi information display on your vehicle is the Maintenance Minder Based on engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining engine oil life and displays it as a percentage The system also displays the code for other scheduled maintenance items needing service Engine Oil Life INFO BUTTONS ENGINE OIL SEL RESET BUTTON LIFE DISPLAY To see the current engine oil life displayed on the multi information display turn the ignition switch to the ON ID position and press the SEL RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed 2011 RDX The remaining engine oil l
390. tire pressures are normal CONTINUED 391 2011 RDX SUIALIG Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Eal m 32 R 132 Eal PSI TIRE PRESSURE 220 R 1220 220 R i 220 kPa Canada SEL RESET BUTTON To see the inflation pressures of all four tires press the SEL RESET button The display changes as shown above Each tire pressure is shown in PSI U S models or in kPa Canadian models 392 CHECK TIRE PRESSURE This shows that front left tire is losing pressure Each tire has its own pressure sensor If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on If this happens you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multi information display along with a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message 2011 RDX TIRE PRESS ERROR SYSTEM FUNC NORMAL When any of the tires have low pressure the tire pressure monitor shows a TIRE PRESS ERROR SYSTEM FUNC NORMAL message When you continue driving after installing the spare tire you will also see this message on the multi information display Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS I SYSTEM FUNCTION i ERROR If there is a problem with the TPMS the tire pressure monitor shows a SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR message and the tire pressure readings are not displayed If this happens you wil
391. tist name and music title MODE To switch between the category mode and channel mode press and hold the DISP MODE button until the mode changes A CH channel or CAT category mode indicator appears on the center display 2011 RDX To Select a Channel When in the satellite radio mode you can use any of four methods to find channels TUNE SEEK SKIP CATEGORY SCAN and the preset bars TUNE Press the TUNE FOLDER bar to change channel selections Press the B side of the bar to tune to higher numbered channels and the lt 4 side of the bar to tune to lower numbered channels In the category mode you can only select channels within that category SEEK SKIP CATEGORY Press either side of the SEEK SKIP CATEGORY bar lt 4 or gt gt to select another category Playing the XM Radio Models without navigation system SCAN The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode In the category mode only the channels within that category are scanned To activate scan press the SCAN button The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds then selects the next channel When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to press the button again Preset You can store up to 12 preset channels using each side of the preset bar Each side of the bar stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band To store
392. tmosphere The positive crankcase ventilation valve routes them from the crankcase back to the intake manifold They are then drawn into the engine and burned Evaporative Emissions Control System As gasoline evaporates in the fuel tank an evaporative emissions control canister filled with charcoal adsorbs the vapor It is stored in this canister while the engine is off After the engine is started and warmed up the vapor is drawn into the engine and burned during driving 487 uwoneULIoyUy eY L Emissions Controls Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery The onboard refueling vapor recovery ORVR system captures the fuel vapors during refueling The vapors are adsorbed in a canister filled with activated carbon While driving the fuel vapors are drawn into the engine and burned off Exhaust Emissions Controls The exhaust emissions controls include three systems PGM FI ignition timing control and three way catalytic converter These three systems work together to control the engine s combustion and minimize the amount of HC CO and NOx that come out the tailpipe The exhaust emissions control systems are separate from the crankcase and evaporative emissions control systems 488 PGM FI System The PGM FI system uses sequential multiport fuel injection It has three subsystems air intake engine control and fuel control The powertrain control module PCM uses various sensors to determine how much air is go
393. ton To do this press and hold the two outside buttons on the HomeLink transceiver for about 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Release the buttons then proceed to step 1 CONTINUED 303 soinjeoy HomeLink Universal Transceiver If you are training the second or third buttons go directly to step 1 Training a Button Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 3 inches 3 8cm from the HomeLink button you want to program Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on the remote transmitter you wish to link Does the HomeLink indicator LED blink at a faster rate after about 10 seconds Press and hold the button on the remote and the HomeLink button at the same time Then while continuing to hold the HomeLink button press and release the button on the remote every 2 seconds Does the LED blink at a faster rate within 20 seconds 304 sy Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second Does the device garage door opener work NO YES Press and hold the HomeLink button again Training complete HomeLink indicator HomeLink flashes for 2 seconds LED is on then remains on The remote has a rolling code Press the learn button on the remotely controlled device e g garage door opener Within 30 seconds press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 seconds Press the programmed HomeLink butto
394. ts to their lowest positions 2011 RDX RELEASE LEVER 6 Pull up the release lever on the outside of the seat back Fold the seat back forward 7 Move the front seats backward to the desired position CONTINUED 139 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Seats Do not put any heavy items on the seat back when it is folded down Make sure all items in the cargo area are secured Loose items can fly forward and cause injury if you have to brake hard See Carrying Cargo on page 364 Make sure that the folded down rear seat does not interfere with the front passenger s seat back This will cause the front passenger s weight sensors and the front passenger s seat belt reminder indicator to work improperly see pages 21 and 33 Also check the passenger airbag off indicator to assure proper operation of the passenger s front airbag 140 RELEASE LEVER After returning the seat back to the upright position tug on the seat back to make sure it is latched If the seat back is not latched fully the seat belt will not work properly and you will see the red indicator behind the release lever as shown 2011 RDX To return the seat cushion to its original position lift up the seat cushion then place the rear of the seat cushion at the base of the seat back Use the seat buckles as guides Lower the front of the seat cushion until it locks into place Make sure the seat back and seat cushion are locked se
395. u press the DISP MODE button the display mode shows you in sequence the folder name the file name the artist name the album name the song name or name off which turns off the text display The center display shows up to about 16 characters of the selected data If the text data has more than 16 characters you will see the first 16 characters and the gt indicator in the center display Press and hold the DISP MODE button until the next 16 characters are shown CONTINUED 207 soinjeoy Playing a USB Flash Memory Device Models without navigation system FOLDER SELECTION To select a different folder press and release either side of the TUNE FOLDER bar Press the B side to skip to the next folder and press the lt side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder 208 To Change or Select Files Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to change files SKIP Each time you press and release the PP side of the SEEK SKIP bar the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file Press and release the I side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current file Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file To move rapidly within a file press and hold either side PPI or 4 of the SEEK SKIP bar 2011 RDX To Select Repeat Random or Scan Mode You can select any type of repeat random and scan modes by using the RPT button ASEL
396. u press the UNLOCK button on the remote transmitter to unlock the doors and the tailgate the exterior lights blink twice to verify that the doors and the tailgate are unlocked and the security system is turned off When you push the LOCK button on the remote transmitter some exterior lights flash and a beeper sounds when you push the LOCK button again within 5 seconds to verify that the doors and the tailgate are locked and the security system has set see page 294 You can customize the exterior lights not to flash and the beeper not to sound CUSTOMIZE SETUP re While DOOR SETUP is shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the multi information display press the SEL RESET button The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU Press the INFO A V button until you see the above display 2011 RDX Press the SEL RESET button The screen changes as shown above Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection CONTINUED 107 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OFF When your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU 108 5o LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SETTING INCOMPLETE If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same
397. uetooth Audio System Models with navigation system To change sound settings P902iS Bluetooth AUDIO For more information on this function go to www acura com handsfreel ink _ BACK ll RESUME PAUSE 7 S Press the AUDIO button then push down the selector to display the audio menu Turn the knob to switch the setting between the resume pause mode and the sound mode Select SOUND then press ENTER to set your selection Turn the knob to select a sound mode then press ENTER to set your selection Turn the knob to your liking see page 224 for more sound setting information To switch to HFL mode If you receive a call when the Bluetooth Audio is playing press the HFL Talk button on the steering wheel The audio control display and the upper display switch to the HFL mode see page 309 After ending the call press the HFL Back button to go back to the Bluetooth Audio mode If you receive a call while the system is in the pause mode the mode will be canceled and Bluetooth Audio will continue to play 2011 RDX To turn off the Bluetooth Audio mode Select any other audio mode by pressing a button AM FM XM or DISC AUX if a disc is loaded on the audio control panel or press the mode button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select another audio mode If an iPod or USB flash memory device is connected to the USB adapter cable or audio unit is connected to AUX ja
398. upper limit it is displayed as _omorth Push AUTO or 7 The selected temperatures appear in the display When the indicator in the DUAL button is off you can adjust both sides to the same temperature by adjusting the driver s side temperature control buttons AorY DRIVER S SIDE PASSENGER S SIDE REAR POSITION FLOOR VENTS 170 2011 RDX Climate Control System Climate Control Sensors SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR The climate control system has two sensors A sunlight sensor is in the top of the dashboard and a temperature sensor is next to the steering column Do not cover the sensors or spill any liquid on them 171 2011 RDX soinjeoy Table of Contents Audio System Read the appropriate pages in this Models without navigation system section for operation of the audio systems installed in your vehicle e For vehicles without navigation system see pages 174 thru 215 e For vehicles with navigation system see page 216 thru 286 m NAME Gi TTE ZENE co Ch reur U S model is shown 172 2011 RDX Audio System Models with navigation system AUDIO MENU U S model is shown n Es ae a NTE 6 DISC CHANGER Disc Cg 2 JES c eA EE OYO 2011 RDX 173 soinjeoy Playing the FM AM Radio Models
399. ure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer Treadwear Indicators TWI Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Required Federal Explanation Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires 2011 RDX As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale W when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltal
400. uthority to operate the equipment This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Ignition Switch The ignition switch has four positions LOCK 0 ACCESSORY ON M and START ID LOCK 0 You can insert or remove the key only in this position To turn the key the shift lever must be in Park and you must push the key in slightly If the front wheels are turned the anti theft lock may make it difficult to turn the key Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or right as you turn the key ACCESSORY I You can operate the audio system and the accessory power sockets in this position ON ID This is the normal key position when driving Several of the indicators on the instrument panel come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch from the ACCESSORY I to the ON dD position START III Use this position only to start the engine The switch returns to the ON ID position when you let go of the key 2011 RDX You will hear a reminder beeper if you leave the key in the ignition switch in the LOCK 0 or the ACCESSORY I position and open the driver s door Remove the key to turn off the beeper You will also see a REMOVE KEY message on the multi information
401. vehicle has halogen headlight bulbs When replacing a bulb handle it by its base and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects If you touch the glass clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth NOTICE Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot when lit Oil perspiration or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter 1 Open the hood Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down 2 Remove the bulb by turning it about one quarter turn counterclockwise 2011 RDX 3 Insert the new bulb into the hole and turn it one quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place 4 Push the electrical connector onto the new bulb 5 Turn on the headlights to test the new bulb CONTINUED 431 oUeUD UIP Lights Replacing a Front Turn Signal Parking Light Bulb p Open the hood Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one quarter turn counterclockwise Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing the bulb in and turning it counterclockwise until it unlocks N 432 3 Install the new bulb in the socket Turn it clockwise to lock it in place 4 Test the lights to make sure the new bulb is working 5 Insert the socket back into the headlight assembly Turn it clockwise to lock it in place 2011 RDX Replacing a Front Side Marker Light Bulb SOCKET BULB 1
402. ver rate than other types of vehicles In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt As a reminder make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover read Driving Guidelines on page 372 of this manual and the Off Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 405 Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of control or an accident 2011 RDX 2011 RDX Online Reference Owner s Manual Contents Owner s Identification Form Your Vehicle at a Glance main controls ccccccccsesssssnseceeccesesseeceeescescsssnseeecececesseuueessececesseseeecscesessesseaeseseceneseuanees 3 Driver and Passenger Safety seat belts SRS and child protection ccccscccssssscceesscecesssseccsssaeeeceseecessaeeeessaeeeees 5 Instruments and Controls indicators gauges multi information display dashboard and steering column 61 Features climate control audio steering wheel security cruise control HomeLink and other convenience items 163 Before Driving fuel vehicle break in and cargo loading ccccssssccessseceeesseecessececscsaeeceesseeeecessecesseseaeseseaeeceesea 351 Driving engine and transmission operation ccccssssceessssecessssecsesesecsescesecesceccesesecessaeeceeseueeecesseceseeaeaeseseaseceesea 371 Maintenance minders fluid checking minor servi
403. vigation system Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Radio anywhere in the United States and Canada except Hawaii Alaska and Puerto Rico XM is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc and XM CANADA is a registered business name of Canadian Satellite Radio Inc XM Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear high quality digital reception It offers many channels in several categories Along with a large selection of different types of music XM Radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display CHANNEL MODE INDICATOR CATEGORY MODE INDICATOR XM BUTTON CHANNEL NAME WS heb PRESET h NUMBER XM BAND SCAN BUTTON SEEK SKIP CATEGORY BAR U S model is shown 2011 RDX CLOCK l _ UNE FOLDER BAR PWR VOL KNOB PRESET BARS CONTINUED 179 soinjeoy Playing the XM Radio Models without navigation system Operating the XM Radio To listen to the XM Radio turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY M or ON ID position Push the PWR VOL knob to turn on the audio system and press the m button Adjust the volume by turning the PWR VOL knob The last channel you listened to will show on the audio display 180 DISP Each time you press and release the DISP MODE button the center display changes in the following sequence Channel name category ar
404. ving What gasoline to use how to break in your new vehicle and how to load luggage and other cargo Driving The proper way to start the engine shift the transmission and park plus what you need to know if you re planning to tow a trailer Maintenance The Maintenance Minder shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer for maintenance service There is also a list of things to check and instructions on how to check them Taking Care of the Unexpected This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience and details how to handle them 2011 RDX Technical Information ID numbers dimensions capacities and technical information Warranty and Client Relations U S and Canada only Asummary of the warranties covering your new vehicle and how to contact us for any reason Refer to your warranty manual for detailed information Index Service Information Summary Asummary of the information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump Your Vehicle at a Glance INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS P 63 GAUGES P 73 DRIVER S FRONT AIRBA P 10 26 DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM P 148 POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH P 126 POWER WINDOW SWITCHES P 142 HOOD RELEASE HANDLE P 355 FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE P 353 AUDIO SYSTEM REARVIEW MONITOR P 174 PARKING BRAKE PEDAL P 150 Vehicle with navigation system is shown P
405. while you wait for activation This should take about 30 minutes While waiting for activation make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception Once your audio system is activated CAT or CH will appear in the display and you ll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request If the service has not been activated after 36 hours contact XM Radio In Canada contacr XM CANADA Playing Discs Models without navigation system Normal mode MP3 WMA mode SCAN D SCAN INDICATOR RPT D RPT FOLDER NUMBER MP3 MODE WMA MODE INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR DISC INDICATOR 15 33 tia TEMP 2 TEMP N sul DISC NUMBER M TRACK NUMBER INDICATOR SCAN F SCAN RPT F RPT RDM F RDM INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR U S model is shown CONTINUED 185 2011 RDX soinjeay Playing Discs Models without navigation system U S model is shown 186 mane A Eg ACURA CD AUX BUTTON l DISP MODE BUTTON RPT BUTTON SCAN BUTTON SEEK SKIP BAR A SEL RDM BUTTON TUNE FOLDER BAR PWR VOL KNOB PRESET BARS DISC SLOT DISC LOAD INDICATOR 2011 RDX Playing Discs Models without navigation system Your audio system has an in dash CD changer that holds up to six CDs providing several hours of continuous entertainment You oper
406. with your keys You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced Use only Acura approved key blanks These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the immobilizer system They will not work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged e Protect the keys from direct sunlight high temperature and high humidity e Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them e Keep the keys away from liquids If they get wet dry them immediately with a soft cloth The valet key does not contain a battery Do not try to take it apart Retractable Master Key RELEASE BUTTON The master key can be retracted into the remote transmitter To use the key push the release button to release the key from the transmitter The key should be fully extended To retract the key push the release button and at the same time push the key into the remote transmitter until it is securely latched 2011 RDX Always use the fully extended key when you insert it to the ignition switch If the key does not fully extend the immobilizer system may not operate properly and may prevent the engine from starting The key may come in contact with your finger while being retracted or extended Make sure your fingers do not touch the pivot of the key when retracting or extending the key 123 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Immobilizer System The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft If an i
407. wn You can also use the sun visor at the side window Remove the support rod from the clip and swing the sun visor toward the side window Make sure you put the sun visor back in place when you are getting into or out of the vehicle 157 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Interior Convenience Items Vanity Mirror VANITY MIRROR To use the vanity mirror on the back of the sun visor pull up the cover The light comes on when you pull up the cover 158 Console Compartment Your vehicle has a multi function console compartment It includes an armrest a coin holder a pen holder acard holder a removable tray and a console compartment with two separable shelves 2011 RDX MASTER KEY BUTTON To open the console compartment push the button and lift the lid To close lower the lid and push it down until it latches You can lock or unlock the console compartment lid with the master key Interior Convenience Items PEN HOLDER COIN CARD HOLDER You can use the inside of the lid for a pen holder a coin holder and a card holder The console compartment light comes on when the parking lights are on REMOVABLE TRAY You can store small items on the removable tray To remove the tray pull it out from the console compartment frame to get more space 2011 RDX The console compartment has two shelves to divide it into two levels To store small items you can use
408. y add oil to bring the level back to the full mark on the dipstick see page 420 4 Start the engine and watch the oil pressure indicator If it does not go out within 10 seconds turn off the engine There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving see Emergency Towing on page 475 2011 RDX Charging System Indicator If the charging system indicator comes on brightly when the engine is running the battery is not being charged You will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi information display see page 79 Immediately turn off all electrical accessories Try not to use other electrically operated controls such as the power windows Keep the engine running starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly Go to a service station or garage where you can get technical assistance 465 poeyedxeuy ot Jo area SULL Malfunction Indicator Lamp If the indicator comes on while driving it means one of the engine s emissions control systems may have a problem Even though you may feel no difference in your vehicle s performance it can reduce your fuel economy and cause increased emissions Continued operation may cause serious damage If you have recently refueled your vehicle the indicator coming on could be due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap You will also see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi information d
409. y or death Protecting Infants and Small Children Protecting Infants Only a rear facing child seat provides Rear facing Child Seat Placement proper support for a baby s head A rear facing child seat can be placed neck and back in any seating position in the back seat but not in the front Never puta Two types of seats may be used a rear facing child seat in the front seat seat designed exclusively for infants or a convertible seat used in the rear Ifthe passenger s front airbag facing reclining mode inflates it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or Do not put a rear facing child seat in seriously injure an infant a forward facing position If placed facing forward an infant could be When properly installed a rear very seriously injured during a facing child seat may prevent the frontal collision driver or a front passenger from moving their seat as far back as recommended or from locking their seat back in the desired position Child Seat Type An infant must be properly restrained in a rear facing reclining child seat until the child reaches the seat It could also interfere with proper maker s weight or height limit for the operation of the passenger s seat and the child is at least one year advanced front airbag system old CONTINUED 41 2011 RDX Ayoyes Jesuosseg pur PAA Protecting Infants and Small Children In any of these situations we strongly recomm
410. y properly or possibly jam in the drive CONTINUED 257 soinjeoy Protecting Your Discs Additional Information on 1 Bubbled wrinkled labeled and excessively thick discs Recommended Discs The in dash disc player changer has a sophisticated and delicate mechanism If you insert a damaged disc as indicated in this section it may become stuck inside and damage the audio unit Examples of these discs are shown to Bubbled With Label Using Printer Sealed With Plastic the right Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring 2 Damaged discs 3 Poor quality discs One SY SH Chipped Warped Cracked 258 2011 RDX Protecting Your Discs 4 Small irregular shaped discs 5 Discs with scratches dirty discs 3 inch 8 cm CD Triangle Shape Fingerprints scratches etc e CD R or CD RW may not play due to the recording conditions e Scratches and fingerprints on the discs may cause the sound to skip a CN Can Shape Arrow Shape 2011 RDX e Recommended discs are printed with the following logo ISE DIGITAL AUDIO e Audio unit may not play the following formats Cis Cis Windows W Media 259 soinjeoy Playing an iPod Models with navigation system 1 IL 1a ceo L CLOCK arc on iPOD INDICATOR 1 407 USB INDICATOR ARTIST Artist 1 algum Album 1 TRACK Track 01 la a SKIP A iPod MENU SKIP _ gt gt 1 1 AAAA 2 2 BBBB
411. y enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide High levels of carbon monoxide can collect rapidly in enclosed areas such as a garage Do not run the engine with the garage door closed Even with the door open run the engine only long enough to move the vehicle out of the garage 2011 RDX With the tailgate open airflow can pull exhaust gas into your vehicle s interior and create a hazardous condition If you must drive with the tailgate open open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below If you must sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running even in an unconfined area adjust the climate control system as follows 1 Select the fresh air mode 2 Select the p mode 3 Set the fan speed to high 4 Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting 57 Ayoyes Josuesseg pur PAA Safety Labels These labels are in the locations shown They warn you of potential SUN VISOR hazards that could cause serious U S models only Canadian models injury or death Read these labels BARE sero nt oon PR arawe carefully AIRBAG WARNING FLIP VISOR OVER If a label comes off or becomes hard to read except for the U S AWARNING dashboard label which may be A WARNING removed by the owner contact your EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS e m Children can be killed or seriously injured by the air bag ae m The back seat is the safest place for children
412. ying Discs Models without navigation system 3 You will see DISC READ on the center display then the system begins to play the CD You can load a CD into an empty position while a CD is playing Select the empty position the disc indicator is not shown on the center display by pressing the appropriate side of the preset bars The current CD stops playing and starts the loading sequence The CD just loaded will play You can load a disc s in any mode AM FM XM or AUX if you do not select an empty position If you press the LOAD button while a disc is playing the system will stop playing that disc and start the loading sequence It will then play the disc just loaded To Play a CD Select the CD changer by pressing the CD AUX button You will see CD on the center display The system will begin playing the last selected CD in the CD changer You will see the disc and track numbers displayed When the system reaches the end of the disc the system will advance to the next disc and begin to play To select a different disc press an appropriate side of the preset bar 1 6 If you select an empty position in the CD changer the system will try to load the CD in the empty slot 2011 RDX Playing an MP3 WMA Disc The CD changer can play CD Rs and CD RWs compressed in MP3 and WMA format When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA you will see MP3 or WMA on the center display A disc can support m
413. you ever have to carry a group of children and a child must ride in front e Place the largest child in the front seat provided the child is large enough to wear the lap shoulder belt properly see page 53 e Move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible see page 134 e Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat see page 17 e Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured see page 15 Many parents say they prefer to put an infant or a small child in the front passenger seat so they can watch the child or because the child requires attention Placing a child in the front seat exposes the child to hazards in a frontal collision and paying close attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of driving placing both of you at risk 2011 RDX we strongly recommend that another adult ride with the child in a back seat The back seat is far safer for a child than the front 39 Jes Josuesseg pur PAA Protecting Children General Guidelines Additional Safety Precautions Never hold an infant or child on your lap If you are not wearing a seat belt in a crash you could be thrown forward and crush the child against the dashboard or a seat back If you are wearing a seat belt the child can be torn from your arms and be seriously hurt or killed Never put a seat belt over yourself ora child During a crash the belt could press deep into the child and
414. your choice is set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER SETTING INCOMPLETE If your choice is not set you will see the above display for several seconds then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU If this happens you need to repeat the same procedure 2011 RDX CUSTOMIZE Sie nee SL OFF TIMER EXIT To exit HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER without changing the current setting select EXIT by pressing the INFO A V button then press the SEL RESET button The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU CONTINUED 101 sjonuop pue suoumysuj Multi Information Display Door Setup Here are the five custom settings for the door setup e AUTO DOOR LOCK d e DOOR LOCK MODE i e KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT e SECURITY RELOCK TIMER e AUTO DOOR UNLOCK While CUSTOMIZE GROUP is AR he SEL shown on the multi information Ese ates display select DOOR SETUP by or a pressing INFO A V button then piereurne press the SEL RESET button SM Each time you press the INFO A rotate the elect reset knob V button the screen changes as perce tee ce shown in the illustration Press the INFO A V button until you see the setting you want to customize then press the SEL RESET button to enter your selection 102 2011 RDX mum See page 103 mm See page 105 See page 107 EE See page 109 mum See page 111 Multi I
415. your phone to HFL when you Press HFL _ C enter the vehicle See page 329 Talk button Clear Clear the system of all paired phones phonebook entries and security passcode See page 330 Change Language Change language from English to French See page 331 Tutorial Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system See page 308 Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command See page 308 Hands Free Help S Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command Canadian models 312 2011 RDX Bluetooth HandsFreeLink To use HFL you need to pair your Bluetooth compatible cell phone to the system Phone Setup This command group is available for paired cell phones Phone pairing tips e You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving e Your phone must be in discovery or search mode to pair Refer to your phone s manual e Up to six phones can be paired e Your phone s battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL e If after three minutes your phone is not ready to pair or a phone is not found the system will time out and return to idle To pair a cell phone 1 Press and release the HFL Talk button If you are pairing a phone for the first time HFL will give you information about the pairing process If it is not the first phone you are pairing say Phone
416. your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on Immediately after freeing your vehicle be sure to switch the VSA on again We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA and traction control systems switched off 396 VSA OFF SWITCH This switch is under the driver s side vent To turn the VSA system on and off press and hold it until you hear a beep When VSA is off the VSA activation indicator comes on as a reminder Press and hold the switch again It turns the system back on VSA is turned on every time you start the engine even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle 2011 RDX VSA and Tire Sizes Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction When replacing tires make sure they are the same size and type as your original tires see page 448 If you install winter tires make sure they are the same size as those that were originally supplied with your vehicle Exercise the same caution during winter driving as you would if your vehicle was not equipped with VSA Towing a Trailer Your vehicle has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo You can also use it to tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits use the proper equipment and follow the guidelines in this section Break In Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle s first 600 miles 1 000 km see page 352

Acura 2011 RDX User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents